Home

drivemaster2 - SIEB & MEYER AG

1. Current reference filter Speed controller Controller alo Current feed forward 42 Ref current filter ff Curent controller Dr Speed controller 42 Position controller Fig 37 Parameter page Controller for SERVO VECTOR operation In the drive function SERVO VECTOR you set the control characteristics via the pages Reference current filter Current controller and Speed controller If the operating mode is a position control Profile Velocity Mode interpolated position control or electronic gear the pages Position controller and Current feed forward are displayed additionally see Operating Mode of the Drive SD2x p 90 With sensorless vector control SVC the controller configuration changes fundamen tally see section 10 10 2 Controller Parameters for SVC Operation p 136 Current Feed Forward SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 This page provides the parameters for the current feed forward drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x T a STET 3 Eg Device overview Parameters F Diagnosis H POO Doc Axis E Curent feed forward 2 g Configuration it Monitorings Ih Analog signals a Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller 42 Position controller Dr Speed controller 3o Ref current filter ff Curent controller irevposacc
2. EEN 117 DiGi OU SID 25 I aasaases TAF Motor POIBBBORIBIBE oesiratesserecstesctatapectesletsbenenviceciiaeed dems eeteeaeltowtaaie 118 Motor Potentiometer SeLUp iet ceo shed ierden ed Sagan ca sane deca nep dees sepan t EEEE ien 118 Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Time Controlled sessssssssss 119 Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Edge Controlled aeee 120 Target Ll M 121 Internal Target Values SD2X erai eee eer oansko RR t ER RR SEXES B nip ia iaiT 122 Encoder Emulation esis scsccscccccasseatcscainncteaccduadvacs ned nn ina a Ra red Bain e n a Ex a a 123 Function Encoder Emulation SD2X rtt eim ERR RR APER EM Enea Rn Es 123 Encoder Emulation Motor Measuring System AB Quadrature Signals SD2x 124 Encoder Emulation Speed Pu lse SD2X erret ctc te te ER n denn nh 125 Encoder Emulation Trigger Signals SD2xX een ener ertet 125 Electroni GRAD Pr PH a 126 N Content 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 2 10 10 3 10 10 4 10 10 5 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 El ctronic Gear 9D23 a caet tantem iia Padre ie eate tere i oa eee 127 drag e P 127 Controller Parameters for SERVO VECTOR Operation ssssss 128 Current Feed Forward SD2x SERVO VECTOR eese nennen 128
3. Fig 59 Parameter page Start up Startup current The parameter indicates a constant current in amperes that is impressed on startup The starting current must be greater than the acceleration current of the drive at least 120 Start threshold The parameter indicates the minimum speed required for the closed loop control in revolutions per minute As soon as the reference speed value N ref controller reaches this value the drive switches to the speed controlled range From this point the actual speed is determined by the phase voltage measuring system and the commutation is derived from the rotor position om The reference speed values must not be below the start threshold since the motor can not be driven optimally in this range In order to avoid reference values this low switch to the page Speed ref values and set the parameter Min limit to a value equal to or greater than the start threshold Thus the motor can not be operated continuously in the range of open loop control drivemaster2 User Manual 157 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 158 INI Holding current The parameter Holding current equals the set holding current on the page Current controller The value is displayed a second time here to make parameterizing easier Stop threshold When the speed reference value N ref controller drops below this value braking the motor is continued by open loop control Braking current The param
4. m POO Doc Drive Motor potentiometer Q g Configuration f Monitorings Motor potentiometer setup v Analog signals 24 Digital signals MOP function Additional speed ref value time controlled Nj Motor potentiometer E M Motor potentiometer Encoder emulation Dr Controller Reset MOP Value At start drive Save MOP Value No save Motor potentiometer parameters Maximum value 1320 000 RPM D IN MOP up Ramp up time 10000 ms Ramp down time 10000 ms Start value 0 000 RPM D IN MOP ion Minimim value 1320 000 RPM Fig 33 Parameter page Motor potentiometer Description of the motor potentiometer function By use of two digital inputs you can simulate a digital motor potentiometer MOP in the software arivemaster2 Therefore the reference speed value is increased via one input function MOP up or reduced via another input function MOP down For this purpose connect two switches push buttons with the corresponding digital inputs of the drive Motor Potentiometer Setup SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 v This parameter group serves to make global settings for the motor potentiometer MOP function This parameter group indicates the function of the motor potentiometer by which the reference value is to be changed Depending on this selection different parameters for the motor potentiometer can be set The following entries are available
5. CAN bus monitor E26 C Motor temperature too high PE Object browser E26 C Motor temperature too high Version information E26 C Motor temperature too high E59 4 No drive parameters loaded E18 C Error in spindle selection E06 D Digital input External Hardware E18 C Error in spindle selection E26 C Motor temperature too high E56 A Device configuration E40 B Motor feedback E40 B Motor feedback E26 C Motor temperature too high Time of operation Export As HTML File 57 14 29 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt Fig 98 Diagnosis page Error memory Last errors On this tab page the entries saved in the device error memory are displayed This data makes you understand and analyze a malfunction of the drive easier i e by means of the time flow All entries in the error memory have a timestamp running time meter In addition they provide the number of the parameter set that was active when the error occurred The error memory contains up to 32 entries All following errors overwrite the oldest entries in the error memory list Via the button Export as HTML file all entries are written into a HTML file Thus the data can be stored or forwarded Error statistic On this tab page you find a list of the saved errors and their frequency Time of operation This tab page indicates the time period the device has been supplied with logic voltage until now indicated in ho
6. Fig 22 Parameter page Drive control Operating Mode of the Drive SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 y P4 4 Here the operating mode of the drive amplifier is selected Operating mode The parameter defines which control cascades are active in the drive amplifier Possible operating modes are set by means of a list box For the drive functions HSPWM HSBLOCK FPAM and HSPAM VF you can select only the operating mode Velocity mode 1 at present Description of the operating modes Velocity mode 1 Only the innermost control cascade the current control and the next control cascade the speed control are activated The speed reference value can be set externally Profile Velocity Mode In this mode you can set a reference speed value via SERVOLINK 4 The unit is increments per sample Current control Only the innermost control cascade the current control is activated Thus only the reference current and indirectly a torque or force can be set externally Interpolated position control The innermost control cascade the current control the second control cascade the speed control and the third control cascade the position control are acti vated The SERVOLINK 4 bus protocol allows external setting of interpolation points The interpolated position control can only be operated via the control channel SERVOLINK 4 drivemaster2 User Manual Setpoint channel Parameters of an S
7. 88 Angle Controller SD2X rrien niae titer Le Le Po tn stile ld ele dete d Pede die Te Pond 89 Drive COmtOl mU TT M 90 Operating Mode of the Drive SD 2X icc enn n rp aep ete ner beet keep p other 90 Drive control SD2X 4e tee Lie tci dvds oedi tab dar vee Fide en ne Yd Rape doe epe 91 Behavior im Gase Of SD2X 3 3 peer esaceccehrepancteans red aU eu seh ce F XY EN DG AASER 92 Dus OY SCM sce tes ete as asa tuse tM UM Uu SEL IMP EPI A E 93 CAN M I 93 e EP C P 94 PDO 0 7 PDO 1 9SD2X CAN BUS rc c eec ne ect Si eg ead ere epe EUR ege ecd ie a 95 DNG 8 Byte Telegram x2 oeste eode eed oce Ep ee deserto e eee ceu e eese ht AEE 96 DNG SD2X p 97 PDOO PDO 1J 9SD2X DNO hice aeniea etaria fussdtuavedhesbAeendees ERE ad tip ndash Prae DR de Red 97 BEES Puce 98 MR 99 UICE E 99 Position Factor SD2X nite do be ena cate apo E RR cepa db teenies 100 Monitorings secied secdcescieees sets cscs sesteveecesnccdanesocesnstesucdenscsesasssnnuntenanntesmsdensets 100 Messages Rm 101 Message M12 Speed zero SD2X cessent ten Rede ette edhe e EN pe cH RR odere din 101 Message 10 Ref value reached SD2X nete derent en tee 102 Message 10 Position reached SD2xX sese enne 102 VE Winllels
8. 10 000 Analog offset Fig 29 Parameter page Analog inputs P Lum Noise rejection RPM 0 00 3 Noise rejection A 10 00 The function to be parameterized is selected by the list box at the top The parameters below the list box you can configure for each input accordingly drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Analog In SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv v v Vv Function The parameter indicates the function of the analog input The following reference values or limit values can be selected gt No function gt Speed reference value gt Current reference value only for the drive function SERVO VECTOR negative current reference values are not permitted gt Current limitation gt W24 Warning threshold Current Analog offset The parameter serves for compensating a possibly existing analog offset The offset is entered in millivolts Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is set to 0 ms the low pass filter is deactivated Inverter The parameter inverts the analog input when the check box is activated This can be used for example for a static reversion of rotational direction Scaling 10 The parameter defines the relation of voltage at the analog input to the reference
9. Valid for version 1 15 P TD 0000017 5 2015 07 07 Copyright Translation of the original instructions Copyright 2015 SIEB amp MEYER AG All rights reserved This manual or extracts thereof may only be copied with the explicit authorization of SIEB amp MEYER AG Trademarks All product font and company names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SIEB amp MEYER worldwide For questions regarding our products and technical problems please contact us SIEB amp MEYER AG Auf dem Schmaarkamp 21 21339 L neburg Germany Phone 49 4131 203 0 Fax 49 4131 203 2000 support sieb meyer de http www sieb meyer de SIEB amp MEYER Asia Co Ltd 4 Fl No 532 Sec 1 Min Sheng N Road Kwei Shan Hsiang 333 Tao Yuan Hsien Taiwan Phone 886 3 311 5560 Fax 886 3 322 1224 smasia ms42 hinet net http www sieb meyer com SIEB amp MEYER Shenzhen Trading Co Ltd Room 306 3rd Floor Building A1 Dongjiaotou Industrial Area Houhai Dadao Shekou Nanshan District Shenzhen City 518067 China Phone 86 755 2681 1417 86 755 2681 2487 Fax 86 755 2681 2967 sm china support gmail com http www sieb meyer cn SIEB amp MEYER USA 3975 Port Union Road Fairfield OH 45014 USA Phone 1 513 563 0860 Fax 1 513 563 7576 info sieb meyerusa com http www sieb meyer com drivemaster2 User Manual E Chapt
10. Synchronize Address je C Activate on the tab page View the check box Use simple file sharing Recommended Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that a you are using for this folder to all folders Apply to All Folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process C3 Managing pairs of Web pages and folders Show and manage the pair as a single file Show both parts and manage them individually Show both parts but manage as a single file Remember each folder s view settings C Restore previous folder windows at logon Show Control Panel in My Computer Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color Show pop up description for folder and desktop items Use simple file sharing Recommended X After you have activated the check box Use simple file sharing the tab page Security in the pop up menu Sharing and Security will be displayed 290 drivemaster2 User Manual Appendix SM AG Properties General Sharing Security Customize Group or user names t Administrators BOSSHOG Administrators ff CREATOR OWNER Plevevene JOHN PP Onnar lanra DMC CUM Daniar anre i v lt 1 Permissions for Everyone Allow Deny Full Control Modify Read amp Execute List Folder Contents Read
11. Online Monitoring When the online mode is active the software drivemaster2 permanently monitors the device selected in the device overview so called online monitoring The online monitoring sets the device status in the status bar to online or offline drivemaster2 User Manual 35 Description of the User Interface 5 5 1 3 36 The following values are read out for instance gt CRC check sum of the parameter set gt Serial number of the device gt identification of the device If one or several values are changed in the background e g by a higher ranking control a message appears saying that the parameter set does not match the param eter set in the device In this case the parameter set from the device will be uploaded automatically This function has been implemented to ensure that during online operation the param eter set in the software is identical to the parameter set in the device Changing a Parameter Set Parameters can also be modified during online operation Any modification of parame ters in the software must be sent to the device via the menu Loader Write parame ters to drive You can also click on the symbol 2 in the tool bar If you have changed more than one parameter set for the connected device see Multi Parameters p 62 you can download all changes into the drive at once via the menu Loader Write parameter sets to drive If the modified parameter set i
12. P00 000 AKmis IFrveos pec Y 500 000 Af mjs2 IFF VNEG ACC ye 0 000 Alms IFF VNEG DEC y p 000 Aj mjs Fig 38 Parameter page Current feed forward Current feed forward factors This page allows parameterization of the current feed forward for position controlled systems This discharges the control circuits and improves the control capacity If the values for the current feed forward factors are chosen too high the control capacity deteriorates because in this case the control circuits must also compensate the current feed factor IFF VPOS ACC The parameter sets a positive speed and acceleration for the current feed forward If the parameter is set to 0 the current feed forward is deactivated for this quad rant The parameter must correspond to the output current value of the speed controller when the current feed forward is deactivated and the acceleration is 1 m s IFF VPOS DEC The parameter sets a positive speed and deceleration for the current feed forward If the parameter is set to 0 the current feed forward is deactivated for this quad rant The parameter must correspond to the output current value of the speed controller when the current feed forward is deactivated and the acceleration is 1 m s IFF VNEG ACC The parameter sets a negative speed and acceleration for the current feed forward If the parameter is set to 0 the current feed forward is deactivated
13. Preparation of the Application PC for Network Operation Before you access the devices via the software drivemaster2 by means of the remote PC you should check the network connection between the application PC and the remote PC For this purpose proceed as follows gt Ask your network administrator for the IP address of the remote PC The IP address consists of four numbers between 0 and 255 that are separated by point gt Start the Windows command and enter the following command ping IP address When the IP address is e g 172 16 6 234 the prompt command should look as follows ex Command Prompt n x Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2600 KC Copyright 1985 2081 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings Screenshot gt ping 172 16 6 234 Pinging 172 16 6 234 with 32 byt Reply from 172 16 Reply from 172 16 6 Reply from 172 16 6 Reply from 172 16 Ping s Pa X4 If the network application is OK 0 loss you can start the software drive master2 If the connection is not OK contact your network administrator A correct network connection between your application PC and the communication server remote PC is necessary Otherwise the software adrivemaster2 can not access the devices via network Communication with a Remote PC via USB In the following the hardware and software configuration is described for assemblies in which the hardware is connected to a remote PC via USB drivemaster2 User
14. Risk of injury while working with the reversing function This function in particular needs to be handled carefully Since the PC writes the values cyclically into the device the actual time values may differ pretty much from the set time values and these may not be met Consider the risk of injury while standing near to the motor or other machine parts Keep clear from the machine while moving the axes via the setup tool NOTICE Initial operation with wrong wiring or parameterization To avoid damage of the machine due to wrong wiring or parameterization we recommend to limit the maximum current to a small value during initial operation Select the entry Velocity reversing function from the list in the field Function Function Velocity reversing function V Max Curent 10 0 gt Aeff tp soo ms Vt 1000 gt rpm t 1000 ms V2 1000 mm t2 2000 ms Actual Current 0 88 Aeff Actual Velocity 999 82 rpm Positioning The drive can start moving when the parameterization of the selected profile is finished Therefore proceed as follows Click on the button Enable Operation to activate the controller Start the positioning of the drive with the set profile by mouse click on the button Start Positioning the drive can be stopped at any time by a second mouse click on the button Start n order to deactivate the controller click on the button Enable Operation once more During t
15. Switching off Temperature PS2 This parameter group displays the limiting values of the thermal load of the power supply unit These are read only values loaded from the hardware Heat sink The parameter indicates the maximum heat sink temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade f this temperature is exceeded the device will be Switched off automatically and the error message E05 Heat sink temperature too high appears Environment The parameter indicates the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade If this temperature is exceeded the device will be switched off automatically and the error message E06 Ambient temperature too high appears drivemaster2 User Manual 59 Parameters of a PS2 60 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 Parameters of an SD2x Parameters of an SD2x All parameters of a drive amplifier of the model range SD2x devices SD2 SD2B SD2S SD2T are available via the tab page Parameters To provide an overview of the parameters they are combined in pages whereas these pages are structured via nodes and branches as final nodes leafs in a tree structure SIEB amp MEYER AG dri Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level User I UB FE ie he go ae OW 2 POD servo drive M4D5F Ef Device overview l5 Parameters A Diagnosis E Drive W Configuration E Monitorings Drive selection P Analog
16. mot Later this motor file can be reloaded Open 7 Open M Via this button you can open an existing motor file Then the parameters contained in that file are displayed on the page Motor For this purpose the dialog Chose your motor file appears 199 11 P ters of an FC2 arameters of an m The arrow button located on the right of the button allows to open one of the last four used motor files directly The dialog does not appear Save as B Save as Via this button all parameters of the page Motor are saved in one motor file For this purpose the dialog Chose your motor file appears Motor Type FC2 This parameter group provides parameters for the general identification of the connected motor Manufacturer The parameter indicates identification data of the motor manufacturer The user can enter the manufacturer and information on the series of the motor here The maximum length is 32 characters Designation This parameter is provided for the exact designation of the motor The maximum length is 32 characters Type The parameter indicates the type of the motor The parameter is set by means of a list box Currently only the motor type Asynchronous rotative is available Motor ID This parameter saves a motor specific ID The ID can be selected as desired by the user and can be used for identifying the motor version via the object dictionary The object MOTOR_USER_IDENT_CODE is used for this purpos
17. 255 cod 256 Tagger Parameter orent ra testi rere tete i rera reor PUR EAR ERRR TERRE MERE 25f SI ag SLOP IEEE 258 CURVE IDISDIAY Pre E 258 tatus oieiioetenertiiorteteo ne ontesoia a sacauent a sosauarnedesestabehortewtstarauseerstoeaasd 258 SDX DALAlOQOS I MP 259 Working with Projects ccce 261 Project Files and Project Paths ueincxecisnevistite ri e obiit sig ii lip dag 261 Saving a Projetsen PPS 263 Reading a Project scssssssssssssesssssesseeseseeeeesseeeeceseeseeeeseeseeesseeseeeees 263 Writing a Project RR HL 263 Creating a New Project o noni aborto atrae eodd punta 264 Proper VVIZ ANG m 264 SElECE die CE 264 Edit DEVICES LERNTE 265 Communication 5 c o qpe c ca citus ue maculae e toits xd nas sche 269 Applications and Server cccccccccssssssssceeeeeeesssseseeeeeeeeesesssseeeeeeeeeeess 269 USB Communication Server ssesssssssssssssssssssseeeee nennen nnns nnns inna 270 Main WWI OW Em 270 Men DescriptlODesiacmet nette epit ua denke a d aere neun ek pae dune udi AER ARA KORR urn 211 DIAGNOSIS c 272 Serial COMMUNICATION SEVER csisene cunt asa use ienasi Di DAD ARR RR E Ra R ddr aad 213 drivemaster2 User Manual 15 1 2 1 15 1 2 2 15 1 2 3 15 2 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 4 15 4 1 15 4 2 15 5 15 5 1 15 5 11 15 5 1 2 15 5 2 1
18. CAN Bus MODO assis ecco seroe iuro sie qa EHI rau Re sas apa cue ta var rn aeei kaisa neiaa 230 DNC Bus MOBNIOE sites ior dederitis fatui farsi mi n dietaten UU Mad ui 231 sedie tc emer ccc 232 Type Plate PS2 eem 235 Version Information m 236 MOONS aerae E E 239 drive s lup t0Ol PERPE 239 Men Descriptior MEET 240 SaB PIAY E E A E E E E E E ET 240 Actual Values and Parameters ccccccceecececeeceeeeeeeeeceaueeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeauaneeeseeeas 240 FUNCION RM 243 De M HE 245 hiper endat tool M 246 converter setup fool eese esses esee eene nnne nnn nnne nenne nnn 248 Men DescriptlOlr irure deett teen baba ri ek ka tax eru d dg UR HR E eR adora 248 Status DISPLAY E 249 M tor Selecti m Me 249 DOREM 250 Reference values ccccecccccccccececeeeeeeeseceeaeaeaeaesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaesaaaeaeae 250 CODO imei temor a a a E T tag netics euagassagia I UTE EIE ILE IEEEEL 251 COSCON e 252 Menu Description ceececeecccceceeceee eee eeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeesedeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 253 Menu File a 253 Menu Mew e cem 254 Menu COMMUNICATION senep Ioue eee shes Mets eraa AEEA a SEERE EE ET REEE 255 Menu MIG oc 255 e TEST ei
19. The project directory is created in the default path for projects Several project directories can be saved in the default project path You can select any directory as default project path The default directory is sm smp in the installation path of the software drivemaster2 Example We assume that you want to save a project under the name MyProject The software is installed in the target directory C Program Files SM_AG drivemaster2 The following project path will be suggested C Programs SM_AG drivemaster2 SM_Smp MyProject MyProject smp Default path for projects Project Project directory file The file selection dialogs for project files consider this name convention automatically The parameter files for the individual drives are also saved in the project directory If you want to archive a complete project just file the complete project directory If you want copy a filed project back to the original path just copy the project directory back to the default path for projects Summary of file types used for projects When a project is saved both the project file and the parameter files are saved The project file refers to the individual parameter sets that means to the individual param eter files The motor data is already included in the parameter sets Furthermore it is possible to save additional motor files with just the motor data The relations are displayed in the following figure Project files s
20. This field provides a parameter to set the PWM frequency of the power output stage Power output stage operating frequency The parameter specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation used by the output stage transistors Available values are set by means of a list box and indicated in kilohertz Each speed scaling requires a certain minimum operating frequency The output stage operating frequency depends on the driven speed and on the number of pole pairs drivemaster2 User Manual 73 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 74 Maximum speed x number of pole pairs SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM SVC up to 60 000 rpm electr 16 kHz 16 kHz 16 kHz 16 kHz wore 240 00 om aecr eer _ wo 380 00 om aecr e voto 480 00 om aecr Sm 1 FPAM HSBLOCK FPAM for devices with buck converter In FPAM operation the parameter indicates the switching frequency of the buck converter In FPAM operation a maximum speed of 600 000 rpm electr can be reached The switching frequency of the buck converter is independent of the required maximum speed 2 HSPAM HSPAM VF for devices with buck converter In HSPAM operation the parameter indicates the switching frequency of the buck converter In HSPAM operation a maximum speed of 600 000 rpm electr can be reached The switching frequency of the buck converter is always 8 kHz ES If you set a higher value for the switching frequ
21. Write v For special permissions or for advanced settings click amp dvanced Select in the upper list the user group or the users who will use the software drive master2 If the user or user group is not displayed in the upper list click on the button Add Select Users Computers or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Erom this location i Enter the object names to select examples Check Names 16 A drivemaster2 User Manual 291 16 A i Appendix FEE Enter the name of the user or user group directly into the text field or click the button Advanced The latter opens a list of all users and user groups Select the respective entry Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types Erom this location ee Common Queries Name RDN In Folder Administrator B Administrators E ANONYMOUS LOGON Authenticated Users Backup Operators BATCH DiaLuP Everyone Guest Guests Then confirm by mouse click on OK to return to the dialog Settings in the tab page Security n the lower list you must activate the check box Full Control in the column Allow Confirm by mouse click on Apply Now the user or the user group can use the software drivemaster2 Qo 292 drivemaster2 User Manual Fu
22. 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 4 5 206 switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet Holding Function On this page you can select a holding function El Device overview Parameters g E pop pam converter 1 Holding function 2 7 E f Configuration flv Analog signals Holding function x Digital signals tz Motor configuration 1 Type of holding function Holding current controller with time limit v Motor configuration 2 amp Motor parameters S Motor measurement systei Z VF Characteristic curve WB Messages pet Held uneton TO Speed ref values K Compensation Holding current Gain Kp 1 00 Arms 5 000 V A Holding time Time constant Tn 10 0 s 0 50 ms Actual current value n D J Fig 91 Parameter page Holding function After a deceleration process is finished it is possible that the rotor still rotates at a low speed Most of the applications do not accept a residual speed after deceleration even if the speed value is small For this reason you can select a holding function for each characteristic curve The control parameters Kp and Tn refer to the holding current Holding Function FC2 Via this parameter group you can set a holding function for the motor Holding Function The holding function is active when the controller is switched on and no reference Speed value is set The holding current shall keep the moto
23. 32 Menu EX GOS sicu dacs cacucaautanaatecesacsaantncacedhaaneeedsranatauseseahecsaahiednanivs qud ia 32 Menu HeD apestan aA i aa E E E EEE 33 Program Stait Ke enaa ae Aa EE RA a EA AAE ERESSE CANA 33 Online Offline Mode 25s ciscus wc cate sie E vba ex in aca on Lao Feud vsu ecd but sable ub fa 34 MMS TOMS MOGESE uenire dvet vde i dde ir vetri erbreedisete niet u rao fiere A ER 35 Searching for Connected Devices 2 usura nutereti acte nnda ax Rates E Ru ER E RR ARE 35 Online Monitorning eec M 35 Changing a Parameter Set ecd pe te rettet ation E eee Dro ud caus 36 Switching into the Offline Mode sssen nennen 37 TS Offline Mode mca af Switching to the Online Mode ror erre tren Rt verc d cce ne une eatery 37 Download New System Software essssseeeeeeeee 38 Update of arivemaster2 Software cccccccccssssssssseceeeesssssssneeeeeseesesees 39 Password Protection and User Rights 41 ULITEN T II T 41 Switch User Level eeeeeeeeeeeennnm enne nn nnn nnne nnns rn nnns 42 drivemaster2 User Manual 5 Content 6 3 7 1 7 2 21 7 2 2 7 2 3 T 3 7 4 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 10 1 3 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 4 1 10 2 5 Assigning USE FIGINS usoessexiaiabuc oincdieaniensiedinsnahl aie XI Y dd aa Ve ki wad 42 FIISEDISDS Laeti iai becc hib ERR Ebr Fees TOP LA DRL ET 45 Cre
24. Amplification Kp The parameter specifies the proportional amplification of the speed controller in dependance on the speed scaling and the peak current of the power output stage The reaction time of the speed control circuit is reduced when a high proportional amplifi cation is selected If the amplification value is set too high the speed control circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the speed controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the more accurate the speed control operates If the value is set too small the speed control circuit starts vibrating Position Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s E zm This page provides the parameters for the internal position control of a servo drive 10 These are the controller parameters limitation of control variables error weighting feed forward control and selection of the measuring system drivemaster2 User Manual 133 10 Parameters of an SD2x 134 El Device overview 2 Parameters 2 Diagnosis E POO Doc Axis Position controller 27 g Configuration t Monitorings fh Analog signals si Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller Velocity feed Forward Dr Speed controller ale Current
25. Current Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v On this page you can set the parameters of the current controller for SERVO VECTOR operation These are the current limitation the holding current and the proper control parameters Ef Device overview fy Parameters B m POO servo drive Current controller 7 E fl Configuration m f Monitorings Q Analog signals 4 E Digital signals x Output sta Encoder emulation tput stage E Pr Controller 42 Ref current filter Limitation Amplification Kp 20 00 A 3 000 V A Dr Speed controller l Holding function Integration time Ti Holding current v 1 000 ms Holding current 1 00 A Actual current value Fig 40 Parameter page Current controller Limitation The parameter indicates the limitation in the current controller for the reference value of the current The reference current and its limitation are indicated as peak value in ampere The maximum value of the Limitation are the peak currents of the motor and the power output stage Holding Function The parameter indicates whether a holding current is used The holding current is active when the controller is switched on and no reference value is set The holding current shall keep the motor in position at standstill The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes Amplification Kp The
26. Encoder emulation N E Controller Pr t REETA Direction lock Skip velocity 1 Max Limit Max Acceleration ramp t Variable ramps Negative X 50000 00 RPM 300000 00 RPM 30000 ms Pr Speed controller Skip range 1 Min Limit Max Deceleration ramp ff Current controller x 10000 00 RPM 0 00 RPM 30000 ms Flux controller Direction of positive Flux ref value rotation Skip velocity 2 NMin Mode Max Quick stop ramp bh Compensation Cw X 10 00 RPM N Ref 0 30000 ms t Vibration absorption i i Skip range 2 Ramps based on i Winding detection 9 0 00 RPM y velocity scaling Variable ramps Type 1 Field weakening range Acceleration ramp 60000 ms Deceleration ramp 30000 ms Fig 62 Parameter page Speed ref values Direction of rotation The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt counterclockwise rotation CCW The direction of rotation set in the software should match the actual rotation direction of the motor If this is not the case two motor phases must be exchanged Direction lock If only one direction of the motor is permitted you can lock the other direction via this parameter The following settings are available gt None Both positive and negative speed values are passed to the motor gt Positive Positive speed values are not passed to
27. Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 with NTFS file management system When you use the file system NTFS under Windows the access rights for files which have been created in a user account are restricted i e possibly these files can only be read by other users If a user with administrator rights has installed the software arivemaster2 in an NTFS partition consequently files can not be overwritten by other users Since the software arivemaster2 has to store lots of data in INI and XML files it can not be used in this way For this reason the administrator must assign write access to the directory in which the software is stored for all users who will use the software Take the following steps Open the Windows Explorer and open the installation directory of the software arivemaster2 The standard directory is C Program Files SM_AG drivemaster2 Right click on the directory SM AG and select Sharing and Security Select the tab page Security When this is not displayed one of the following reasons might be the cause You have logged on at a domain via the network Log out and log on again as local administrator drivemaster2 User Manual 289 16 A 16 A i Appendix ia The check box Use simple file sharing is not activated In order to check this open the Folder Options in the Explorer File Edit View Favorites B amp S Help Map Network Drive Back v gt d Disconnect Network Drive
28. 0 Drv 0 Online Click on the button Add to create a new parameter set The following dialog appears New parameter set with Number Name X Cancel drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Enter a number and a name so you can identify the parameter set later You can create up to 64 parameter sets numbers 0 63 for one drive Consider that the software creates a separate file in the project for each parameter set Click on the button Add to apply the new parameter set In the Device overview the parameter sets are subordinated to the drive and ordered by number Click on a parameter set in order to edit it Create the according parameters Afterward you can copy or delete the entire parameter set via the parameter group Parameter set Thereby the previous parameter set is still active The active parameter set is displayed in green color in the device tree The diagnosis pages always apply to the active parameter set If you edit another than the active parameter set the display of the parameter set in process in the tool bar is highlighted in yellow color ITT SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 V1 8 Build 60 29 01 2010 DER Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level Admin LE B 4 ea pa SIEB amp MEYER m CER Fe ie M Wa ae EW Device overview gs Parameters a Diagnosis SD2 0 036 21 40DC A Summary Drv 04 096 21 40DC A isl EED
29. Hiperface initial operation 246 parameter setting 87 Initial operation 239 drive amplifier SD2x 239 frequency converter FC2 248 drivemaster2 User Manual Index L Login 42 Logout 42 M 18 Messages 217 Multi parameters 62 create parameter set 62 select parameter set 63 switch parameter set 64 N Network communication 283 New version available 39 O Object browser 232 Oscar 252 P Parameter download 51 Parameter set change 64 Parameter set change timing 65 Parameter wizard 47 Password protection 41 passwords 43 user level rights 42 user levels 41 Project 261 create 264 edit 265 project files 262 Project wizard 264 R Remote PC 283 S SDx Datalogger 259 Serial communication server 273 299 18 Index 300 SERVOLINK 4 bus monitor 227 configuration FC2 192 configuration SD2x 91 Spindle actual values 227 System software update 51 write 38 U Update 39 USB communication server 270 Driver Troubleshooting 20 driver installation 18 User level 42 User level rights 42 W Warnings 217 drivemaster2 User Manual
30. MEYER AG d Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help m 46 8H Ve LE Ej Device overview fs Parameters Diagnosis co P00 pan converter Configuration p Analog signals Digital signals X ly Motor configuration 1 E Motor configuration 2 NY Motor parameters Drive selection Motor measurement syste iz VF Characteristic curve Messages 42 Holding function lc Speed ref values D Compensation Drive function User Level User Drv OA SIEB amp MEYER POO pam converter 02190 101EC A 230 Vac 325 Vdc 21 00 A 14 85 Arms 32 00 A 22 63 Arms 15 000 s us type HSPAM Identification Drive name pam converter Comment test drive Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost 1 Frequency converter Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI Pow Parameter set ID 1 001 Date Time 0 Drv OA Online The root of the tree is the frequency converter selected in the Device over view 2 Thematic sub division of the parameterization The parameter pages are combined thematically by the subordinated nodes 3 Parameter pages Via the parameter pages you configure the frequency converter according to the application The individual parameters are combined thematically in groups 11 om The speed unit of frequency converters of the series FC2 is defined via the Program options p 32 11 1 Configuration The node Configura
31. RPM Current P1 Current P2 1 00 A 2 00 A Fig 68 Parameter page Compensation Characteristic curve of the field weakening The characteristic curve of the field weakening illustrates the flux current subjected to the speed At first activate the check box then you can set the characteristic curve 10 Characteristic curve of the slip compensation The characteristic curve of the slip compensation illustrates the speed deviation subjected to the current At first activate the check box then you can set the character istic curve Vibration Absorption SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv On this page the vibration absorption of a HSPWM converter is activated and config ured drivemaster2 User Manual 169 Parameters of an SD2x Eg Device overview fa Parameters F Diagnosis POO Doc Axis Vibration absorption 27 g Configuration gt Monitorings hv Analog signals il Digital signals fi Encoder emulation Dr Controller Dr Speed controller ff Current controller A Flux controller Z Flux ref value D Compensation N Ref Vibration absorption Reduced correction Factor 0 100 c Filter time Correction Factor 500 ms 0 350 Ref flux current Actual flux current Fig 69 Parameter page Vibration absorption Vibration absorption active Via the check box the vibration absorption is activa
32. That way you can see which object has been read and which was the content of this object The name of the trace file is S36SerialDncTrace log and it is saved in the same path as the communication server gt Start Stop DNC trace The DNC Trace is started with this option If a DNC Trace is running it can be stopped with it gt View DNC trace file The DNC trace file is displayed with the editor notepad exe Consider that the editor does only display the current state when the file was opened and that it is not updated in the editor 15 1 2 3 Diagnosis 15 The diagnosis display is divided into three groups Serial Port UDP and Serial Serial Port This group displays the serial port used for communication and its status drivemaster2 User Manual 275 15 Communication FEI 15 2 276 The fields have the following meaning gt Device Designation of the serial COM ports This designation is identical to the designation which was selected in the dialog Select serial port gt BaudRate Transmission rate used for communication For all devices the value 57600 Baud is set fixed gt Power ld Value of the address selection switch if existent gt State Error status of the communication The following displays are possible E NONE Serial port has been opened and is ready for operation E SERVER COMM OPEN The serial port can not be opened The port does either not exist or it is currently
33. The zoom can also be reset by a double click on the graphic window or by means of the context menu of the graphic window Colors The colors of the individual curves the background the grid and of the coordinate axes can be changed via the menu item View Colors Status Bar The status bar is divided into three fields but only the two fields on the right side are used Pow 0 Drv 0A 1 Communication address Address of the current device gt Pow Address of the power supply unit gt Drv Address of the drive 2 Operating state or status of communication gt Green display Online The software is communicating with a device gt Red display Offline Communicating with a device is not possible under the selected communication address drivemaster2 User Manual LI 13 5 Tools SDx Datalogger Using the tool SDx Datalogger you can record and document up to four drive parame ters over a longer period of time SIEB amp MEYER AG SDx Datalogger VO 4 Build 60 1729710 DER File Plot monitor Help SIEB amp MEYER State Operation Enabled r Plot monitor Setting Interval time 1000 ms Curve 0 I Act Curve 1 N Act Curve 2 Ambient temperature p T Curve 3 200 E Ambient temperature Actual error Loafile Log data to file 150 Actual error Control Start 200 300 Host localhost Port 0x3600 Pow 0 Drv 0A Online Fig 121
34. dive zi g Configuration E F Monitorings hv Analog signals 4 2 Digital signals E Encoder emulation Dr Controller Output stage Current controller Limitation 8 00 Arms Amplification Kp 12 Speed ref values 3 000 Vrms Arms EZ VF Characteristic curve b Compensation Holding function Dr Speed controller Integration time Ti i Holding current v 1 000 ms Ci N Motor potentiometer ng Holding current 1 40 Arms Actual current value Current controlled startup breaking Flying restart V Startup function enabled V Flying restart enabled Startup current Switching threshold V Only in ref value direction 2 00 Arms 500 000 RPM After every coast to stand still For each Controller On Flying restartcurrent Flying restart time 1 20 Arms 1000 ms Fig 74 Parameter page Current controller Limitation The parameter indicates the limitation in the current controller for the reference value of the current The reference current and its limitation are indicated as peak value in ampere The maximum value of the Limitation are the peak currents of the motor and 10 the power output stage Holding Function The holding function is active when the controller is switched on and no reference Speed value is set The holding current shall keep the motor in position at standstill 0 Hz You can select one of the following holding functions gt Holding current A PI current controller induces a
35. gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below Speed Controller SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s 2 On this page you can set the parameters of the speed controller for a HSPWM converter A suitable measuring system must be parameterized drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Ef Device overview fl Parameters eB POG HSPWM dive E f Configuration tz t Monitorings tz M Analog signals tz E Digital signals tz Encoder emulation Dr Controller Current controller lc Speed ref values K Flux controller Compensation lc Flux ref value Vibration absorption gE M Motor potentiometer Ref val 1 Speed controller active V Speed control only at y constant ref value Amplification Kp Filter time 1 000 20 000 ms Integration time Tt 20 00 ms Fig 64 Parameter page Speed controller Speed controller active You must activate the check box to switch on the speed control Speed control only at constant ref value Activate the check box for less dynamic measuring systems field plate pulse gener ator or Hall sensor The dynamics of these measuring systems are often not sufficient to control the speed in the r
36. resonances of a machine Example Skip velocity 50000 rpm Skip range 10000 rpm max admissible speed below skip speed 40000 rpm min admissible speed above skip speed 60000 rpm vv v drivemaster2 User Manual 149 Parameters of an SD2x 150 Speed reference values within the skip bandwidth 40000 60000 rpm are suppressed Skip bandwidth 60000 50000 40000 N Ref controller Max limit Min limit NMin mode Mode N Ref 0 n ref out M nin min n ref in The parameter indicates the maximum possible reference speed in revo utions per minute The parameter indicates the minimum possible reference speed in revolutions per minute Via this parameter you can select the reference speed to be driven in case a target value below the minimum speed has been selected drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Mode N Ref N Min hysteresis ES It is not possible to reverse the direction of the motor rotation when the target value is below the determined minimum speed Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference speed value They are indicated in milliseconds The parameter displays the time required for reaching the speed scaling from standstill A ramp of e g 12000 ms together with a speed scaling of 120000 rpm 10000 1 min makes a maximum acceleration of 167 1 s or s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the accelerat
37. set to 0 ms the low pass filter is deactivated Noise rejection The parameter specifies a hysteresis threshold for noise rejection in percent 1 96 corresponds to a voltage of 0 1 V at the analog input Analog Outputs This page displays the configured analog outputs g 5 m Eg Device overview fa Parameters a Diagnosis B POD Dolus 1 3 Drive actual values d Errors and warnings Analog Out0 Speed actual value caine voltage f Error memory H ES Position measurement systems y o5 Digital inputs lt Digital outputs Sine Cosine Display 4Z Delta Z Measurement v n Filter time Scaling Analog inputs Sj SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor 1000 000 RPM Analog offset amp HE Object browser Ceo v X18 4 Version information Analog Out 1 Current actual value Dutput voltage Filter time Scaling Arms Analog offset T Y z S X18 4 Fig 106 Diagnosis page Analog outputs 12 The values Analog offset and Filter time are directly read out of the configured parameter values Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is set to 0 ms the low pass filter is deactivated Analog offset The parameter serves for setting an analog offset The offset is entered in vo ts drivemaster2 User Manual 225 12 Diagnosis 12 14
38. v kHz Max ambient temperature 59 C Choke Internal inductance mH Fig 19 Parameter page Power output stage Currents SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM s v s 4 This parameter group provides parameters to configure the maximum admissible rated and peak current of the drive amplifier ES The parameters are also used for the l t calculator of the power output stage When the device is overloaded the l t calculator triggers the error message E25 Power supply load too high and switches the device off Depending on the program configuration the currents are displayed as peak amplitude values or as RMS values in amperes Rated current The parameter specifies the rated current of the device during continuous operation S1 operation The rated current depends on the cooling and is limited by the param eter Max rated current Max rated current The parameter indicates the upper limit of the value range for the parameter Rated current This depends on the used device and on the power stage operating frequency The parameter is a read only value drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Peak current The parameter specifies the peak current of the device The device can provide this current from the cold state once and not longer than the additionally defined time period The parameter is a read only value and depends on the used device DC Link SD2x SERVO HSP
39. 21 90F f SD2 0 03621 1000C FE Drv OA 036 21 10DC A Bi Drv 0B 036 21 10DC B 8 SD2 1 036 21 40DC 3 Drv 14 036 21 40DC A POO Antrieb 1 FC2 2 021 90 101EC l SD2 3 036 21 60D8 Drv 34 036 21 60DB A POO Servo Axis ES If the selected drive is not parameterized the device is not displayed on the right side of the user interface A dialog for the creation of a parameter set will be displayed instead This you can create manually or with the aid of the wizard described in the following chapter 7 2 2 Creating a parameter set Start the wizard via the menu Project New parameters The wizard for parameterizing an SD2 is started automatically The structures of the all wizards are similar the only differences are drive specific details The first page serves for parameterizing the basic device Since the basic device already exists physically the displayed parameters are read from the drive and can not be modified VY SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 DER Setup a new drive 1 Drive Hardware 2 Base Data Select power output stage The power output stage ist already selected by the project and cannot be 036 21 40DC A changed Power output stage data Maximum Rated current Arms Voltage class 230 Vac 325 Vdc Peak current Arms Shutdown temperature e Maximum time of peak cunent 5000 s drivemaster2 User Manual 47 First Steps Click Next to c
40. 4 3 V f Characteristic Curve This page provides up to 8 bending points to edit the V f characteristic curve For checking the characteristic curve is displayed graphically in the top of the window The maximum output voltage of the motor and the power output stage are displayed in the figure to provide assistance during parameterization El Device overview fs Parameters ig im POO pam converter VF Characteristic curve 2 7 1 1 H fl Configuration Q Analog signals Characteristic curve ai Digital signals E S Motor configuration 1 Motor max voltage 45 Vac Max powerstage output voltage 230 Vac B Motor configuration 2 amp Motor parameters S Motor measurement systei iz VF Characteristic curve B Messages 42 Holding function lc Speed ref values be Compensation 100 200 300 500 600 700 800 900 Frequency Hz gt Copy af Check Block commutation from 500 Bending point 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Voltage Vac 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Fig 89 Parameter page V f characteristic curve drivemaster2 User Manual 203 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 4 4 204 m V f Characteristic Curve FC2 Bending points The table columns indicate the voltage and the frequency speed of the individual bending points The origin 0 Hz or 0 rpm 0 V is fixed in the data set so you do not need to enter it Interpolation between the value pairs is linear The number of
41. Curent controller Flascantoller Min Flux current 1 00 a D Compensation H Vibration absorption Start threshold Stop threshold 0 00 A 9 00 A rriu Compensation Flux measuring Yo Switchover point 90 0 Yo Minimum 80 0 Yo N Activation point Changeover point Deactivation point 0 00 RPM 1000 00 RPM 5000 00 RPM j Fig 67 Parameter page Flux ref value Characteristic curve of the load compensation The characteristic curve of the load compensation illustrates the flux current subjected to the reference current Characteristic curve of the flux compensation The characteristic curve of the flux compensation illustrates the rise of the flux current subjected to the speed drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Compensation SD2xHSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s E On this page you set the parameters of the field weakening and slip compensation for a HSPWM converter Ef Device overview Qs Parameters F Diagnosis POO Doc Axis E Compensation Q g Configuration s ka 13 Monitorings LFN Field weakening hy Analog signals id Digital signals 9b Encoder emulation Dr Controller Dr Speed controller ff Curent controller Min Flux current Flux controller 100 0 95 Flux ref value N ho Vibration absorption Switchover point Deactivation point 4750 00 RPM 5000 00 RPM DU sip Slip compensation i 200 000 RPM Slip P1 100 000
42. Display Z Delta Z Measurement S Analog inputs ex Analog outputs a SERVOLINK 4 monitor 9 CAN bus monitor FFE Object browser v Version information m r Digital outputs 036 21 40DC A E S ES EB Fig 102 D agnosis page Digital outputs Depending on the hardware up to 6 digital outputs D OUTO to D OUT5 may be configured The parameters display the set functions of the digital outputs Each output can have the value 0 not active or 1 active In addition the corresponding connector and pin of the device are indicated for each output Set outputs manually You can set the hardware outputs manually in order to check their functionality For this purpose select the option On in the blue field Set outputs manually at the top right When the option for manually setting the outputs is on the control functions are not transmitted via the internal command channel anymore but via the drive setup tool Risk of injury due to manual setting of the digital outputs Take sufficient measures to provide safety at the machines and output functions during manual setting of the outputs Set the desired outputs by clicking on the rectangular boxes The active outputs have the value 1 and a yellow background the inactive outputs have the value 0 and a white background Check the outputs now and measure the individual output signal if required After checking make sure you set the function Set outpu
43. Edge The recording is initiated when a negative edge occurs gt Error lt gt 0 The recording is initiated in case of an error Threshold The parameter indicates the desired threshold value for the two trigger conditions threshold value exceeded and threshold value fell below Trigger position The parameter indicates the recording delay The recording time can be extended up to 100 or be reduced by up to 25 The available values are set by means of a list box 13 drivemaster2 User Manual 257 13 Tools 13 4 5 13 4 6 13 4 7 258 i Start Stop By mouse click on the buttons Normal mode and Single shot the recording of the curve can be started Start Stop Normal mode Single shot In the Normal mode the recording of the selected curves is restarted continuously The Single shot records and displayes the curve only once Curve Display Graphic window zoom In order to zoom in a part of the graphic window the respective part of the window must be marked with the mouse pointer For this purpose you move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the area to be zoomed and press the left mouse button continue pressing it Drag the frame to the right edge of the desired area to be zoomed by pressing the left mouse button When you release the left mouse button the marked area is zoomed in Reset zoom By mouse click on the button Reset zoom the whole graphic window is displayed again
44. File SD2 EUER f M t r Type SD 2 ER 76 Motor Parameters nectit s eaa EAR Rae I E RR sdeaesuncsbereieisisiedeskcdss 76 Motor Parameters for Rotary Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2X 76 Motor Parameters for Linear Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x 78 Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors SD2Xx sene 79 Variable Rated Curte int iiss iae erento erede dies sabe dere ques eerie i p dd Rege dunes 81 Motor measuring system sssssssssseee nem nee eene nnn nennen 82 Motor Measurement System SD2X sssssss eene enne 82 lenti db 84 Pulse Generator SD2X 4 2 eene coemeterio vee LEE cane E Roe Na ER e de ex 85 incremental Encoder TTL 12 V SB23X enr eniro e aA E CEU ER DRE E PR EET IE 85 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 2 6 10 2 7 10 2 7 1 10 2 7 2 10 2 8 10 2 9 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 5 10 5 1 10 5 2 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 drivemaster2 User Manual Content Commutation Controller SX a Ett c ricette bo IRE curet epe rh be adi 86 Lime at all SQ DE 86 DCcteTdlb p 86 Magnetic Alignment Current SD2x ssssssssssssssssseseseeeeer enint nentes enne 87 SineCosine Encoder SD2X 2 cm nue cents sedan Extent e e eni EREE EREMO RU LEa e ERR edo eg RAS 87 Tachometer SD2X ses dacs
45. In the drive function SVC you set the control characteristics via the pages Speed reference values Speed controller Reference current filter Current controller and Start up Speed Reference Values SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM s On the page Speed ref values you can parameterize the reference value generator Ef Device overview fs Parameters m P00 SVC drive Speed ref values 7 g Configuration 18 Monitorings Analog signals af Digital signals NRef N Ref controller i Encoder emulation a E reg r Controller N ts Variable ramps dT Speed controller Direction lock Skip velocity 1 Max Limit Max Acceleration ramp AE Ref current filter Positive X 50000 00 RPM 120000 00 RPM 10000 ms Current controller Skip range 1 Min Limit Max Deceleration ramp Af Start up Pa M 10000 00 RPM 5000 00 RPM 10000 ms Winding detection Direction of positive io Speed ref values rotation Skip velocity 2 NMin Mode Max Quick stop ramp NM Motor potentiometer Cw X 10 00 RPM N Ref 0 5000 ms Skip range 2 i Ramps based on 0 00 RPM y velocity scaling Variable ramps Type 1 Fig 46 Parameter page Speed ref values Direction of rotation 10 The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt cou
46. M10 Ref value reached was triggered Thus peak loads in the acceleration and deceleration ramps are avoided Rise I Motor gt Threshold Before the warning is generated the message M10 reference value reached must have been signaled The warning W24 is generated when the increase current change of I Motor divided by time exceeds the warning threshold in amperes millisec onds The warning message is triggered for at least 200 ms The Window time is the period of time during which the event must be known internally When this time is passed the warning message is generated drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Nmotor Message M10 Ref value reached Imotor i Current change W24 Enable W24 W24 window time ES Current monitoring is not enabled until the message M10 Ref value reached was triggered Thus peak loads in the acceleration and deceleration ramps are avoided W26 Warning threshold overload current SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v 4 4 4 Via this parameter group the warning of the over current monitoring can be parameter ized Via the warning Over current the message W24 is generated The message is gener ated when the motor current exceeds a set threshold You can make the generated warning message available by setting a digital output accordingly Via the list box W26 Mode you can set the desired trigger con
47. Manual Communication 15 5 3 1 Hardware Configuration It does not matter for the settings on the application PC whether the remote PC is connected directly to a device or via a power supply unit or via a converter In the following example 2 devices are connected to the USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 and 3 devices are connected to a power supply unit PC SD2 FC2 03621xx 02190xxx BSR 9 48 Converter 050201 Power 0 Ethernet Remote PC IP address 172 16 6 234 o UDP Port 0x3600 Pow 0 Drv 0A Pow 0 Drv 0B ROWIO s Deve USB Server PS2 SD2 SD2 FC2 0362190 03621xx 03621xx 02190xxx X4 RS 485 X3 x4 RS 485 Power 1 Pow 1 Drv 0A Pow 1 Drv 1A Pow 1 Drv 0B Pow 1 Drv 1B Pow 1 Drv 2A Fig 131 USB communication v a remote PC This configuration requires the following connections gt The individual devices are connected with each other via the X3 X4 bus RS485 gt The remote PC is connected directly to the power supply unit via USB In addition the remote PC is connected to the converter via USB The devices not connected to the power supply unit are connected to the RS485 interface of the converter by the X3 X4 bus gt The application PC and the remote PC communicate via the Ethernet network with each other The individual devices are addressed the same as
48. SDx Datalogger Program settings Via the menu Plot monitor gt Settings you open the dialog Plot monitor configura tion Here you can set the program behavior of the tool Plot monitor configuration Plot monitor configuration Colors Online Offline Background color amp Time until log process willbe aborted 10 gt s Grid color i HET Advanced functions Curve color ie Abort log process on a device error 13 Chart Selection of program colors Log Behavior in case of a drive switch off Set the time after which the record is stopped in case the drive switches into the offline mode Define whether the record shall be stopped in case of a drive error or not Record data Proceed as follows to record the drive data In the field Settings on the right side of the user interface you find the list boxes Curve 0 3 Select up to 4 drive parameters to be recorded via these list boxes Enter the interval time It defines the time between two recorded values The minimum time value that can be set is 100 ms drivemaster2 User Manual 259 13 Tools 260 c If you need to record values with higher frequency you can use the program Oscar p 252 If you need to save the measured values you can select a file and directory in the section Logfile The data are saved in ASCII format measured values are divided by the tab character ASCII 09 Click on the button Start to start the
49. Taking the maximum current into account the motor can be driven with this function for 13 a short time If one of the buttons or is pressed also the corresponding keys on the keyboard are possible the motor moves with the set speed for the set period of time If the button is pressed the sign of the velocity will be inverted In addition the actual current and the actual speed are displayed Function Velocity pushing M Max Current 10 0 Aeff Push Time 1000 gt ms Velocity Pushing Actual Current 1 56 Aeff Actual Velocity 399 93 rpm Velocity 400 rpm 244 drivemaster2 User Manual Tools Current absolute values This function allows to supply the connected motor with a preset current You can change the sign of the current by pressing the button on the right side also when current is flowing In addition the actual current is displayed Function Current absolute values Current Sign Demand Current 2 415 Aeff F11 invert sign Actual Current 2 48 Aeff Current DC resolver offset This function allows to supply the connected motor with a preset DC current This func tion is only available when a resolver measuring system is specified in the parameters In addition the actual current and the phase shift are displayed Function Current DC resolver offset Demand Current 24 5 Aeff Actual Current 0 00 Aeff Phase Shift Motorphase Measur
50. Torque Off SVC sensorless vector control VCC voltage at the common collector VECTOR vector control VF V f Characteristic Curve 14 drivemaster2 User Manual General Information N gf General Information CS This manual describes version 1 15 of the software drivemaster2 This manual will give you basic knowledge of the functions and how to use the opera ting software drivemaster2 with a SIEB amp MEYER drive You find a list comprising all drives compatible to the software in section 2 1 arivemaster2 Applications p 15 The software allows to enter and change the performance parameters of the device in a systematical and clear way In addition the functions for error diagnosis and applica tion are described Any made settings have an immediate effect on the operation of the drive Besides the software provides different tools which will help you to put the drive into operation set its parameters and analyze its performance Further information on the hardware of the individual drive is to find in the technical manual for this drive ES Read the hardware documentation of your device and pay attention to the safety instructions 2 1 arivemaster2 Applications You can configure the following devices using the software arivemasterZ SD2T 036 21 6x Power supply unit Frequency converter FC2 PS2 SD2 SD2T drivemaster2 User Manual 15 General Information drivemaster2 User Manual o su 3 1 3 2 I
51. Trigger position Curve display A m x Start Stop Normal mode TP Start Stop Single shot All okay Status bar at Fig 120 Oscar The sections are described in the following chapters 252 drivemaster2 User Manual Tools 13 4 1 Menu Description Via the main menu you can access the most commands and tools Using the buttons in the tool bar you can directly access frequently used functions of the program menu 13 4 1 1 Menu File gt Load graphic data Opens the dialog Oscar Open oscar graphic File View Communication Help which allows to load a stored BE icadigraghic data F2 graphic from a file The graphics are stored by default in the directory gl Save graphic data F3 SM_Data in the installation path amp Print graphic F4 The file extension is odt Oscar E data Load settings F5 gt Save graphic data Saves the a gt current record The dialog Oscar SEGRE re Save oscar graphic is opened The Reset settings Ctrl Alt R dialog asks for file name and storage location of the file Usually the file is stored in the directory BH Configuration software F12 SM Data in the installation path i3 Exit program F10 gt Print graphic Opens the wizard Printer setup Via this dialog the printer is selected on which the graphic is to be printed Additional settings such as paper format paper size and paper orientation can be determined gt Load settings Opens the dialog OscarO
52. Via RS232 cable Connect the RS232 cable between the male connector X19 of the SD2S and the serial interface of the PC ES The pin assignment of the RS232 cable is described in Drive System SD2S Hardware Description Connection of SD2T Fig 7 Possible connections between PC and SD2T drivemaster2 User Manual 4 6 Device Connection to PC Connect the drive amplifier SD2T via a USB cable to the PC For this purpose connect the USB cable between the female connector X14 of the SD2T and the USB port of the PC Connection FC2 USB gt RS485 232 Converter 050201 FC2 SIEB amp MEYER EN FC2 K362101xxxR01 Fig 8 Possible connections between PC and FC2 Connect the frequency converter FC2 to the PC Via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 Connect the SIEB amp MEYER USB gt RS232 485 converter to the female connector X3 of the FC2 and to a USB port of the PC Via RS232 cable Connect the RS232 cable between the female connector X3 of the FC2 and the serial interface of the PC ES The pin assignment of the RS232 or RS485 cable is described in the documentation FC2 Frequency Converter for Asynchronous Motors Hardware Description drivemaster2 User Manual 27 Device Connection to PC 28 drivemaster2 User Manual Description of the User Interface m Description of the User Interface T
53. W24 No load current Warnings motor WOS Load f 4 FEST x 1 0 100 96 2 40 Arms W26 Warning Over current W26 Mode 1 Motor gt Threshold W26 Warning threshold Different warnings W14 Ambient temperature W26 Filter time Shutdown temperature 75 C W15 Load ballast resistor 100 96 22 Watt Fig 27 Parameter page Warnings Warnings Power Output Stage SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 4 4 Via this parameter group the warnings for the power output stage can be configured The according limiting value to trigger an error is indicated below each parameter drivemaster2 User Manual 103 10 Parameters of an SD2x 104 INI W04 Load The parameter indicates a threshold value for the power output stage load in percent As soon as the load has reached this value the warning W04 is triggered WO6 Temperature The parameter indicates a threshold value for the power output stage temperature in degree centigrade As soon as the temperature has reached this value the warning WO6 is triggered WO8 Overvoltage The parameter indicates a threshold value for overvoltage in the intermediate circuit of the power output stage in vo fs As soon as the voltage has reached this value the warning WO8 is triggered WO09 Undervoltage The parameter indicates a threshold value for undervoltage in the intermediate circuit of the power output stage in vo
54. Window time Speed zero ee Se aes Se E C Window em Us t 1 Message o drivemaster2 User Manual 101 10 Parameters of an SD2x 102 Message 10 Ref value reached SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 v Via this parameter group the window for the message Ref value reached can be set Ref value reached Window Via this parameter you can define whether the Ref value reached window is indi cated by a fixed speed in revolutions per minute or depending on the reference value in percent M10 Window The parameter indicates the maximum speed tolerance at which the Ref value reached window is reached M10 Window time The parameter indicates the width of the Ref value reached window If the reference value is within the window for the total window time the message Ref value reached is triggered n speed K Window time Reference value reched Ref value window Reference value Ref value window Message 0 Ref value reached at Speed zero If the check box is activated the message Reference value reached is triggered when Speed zero is reached Message 10 Position reached SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v Via this parameter group the message Position reached can be set The message is triggered in the dr
55. X3 of the SD2 and to the serial interface of the PC ES The pin assignment of the RS485 cable is described in Drive System SD2 Hardware Description 24 drivemaster2 User Manual Device Connection to PC a ra 4 3 Connection of SD2B K362103xxxR01 Ee 7 USB gt RS485 232 Converter 050201 Fig 5 Possible connections between PC and SD2B Connect the drive amplifier SD2B to the PC Via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 Connect the SIEB amp MEYERUSB gt RS232 485 converter to the female connector X10 of the SD2Band to a USB port of the PC Via RS232 cable Connect the RS232 cable between the male connector X10 of the SD2B and the serial interface of the PC ES The pin assignment of the RS232 cable is described in Drive System SD2B Hardware Description drivemaster2 User Manual 25 Device Connection to PC 4 4 4 5 26 Connection SD2S SD2S USB K362103 0xR01 USB gt RS485 232 Converter 050201 n K362103xxxR01 Fig 6 Possible connections between PC and SD2S Connect the drive amplifier SD2S to the PC Via USB cable Connect the USB cable between the female connector X14 of the SD2S and a USB port of the PC Via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 Connect the SIEB amp MEYER USB gt RS232 485 converter to the female connector X19 of the SD2S and to a USB port of the PC
56. a drive is connected with the PC 7 1 Creating an Online Project Program start gt Start the software via the Windows start menu Programs gt SIEB amp MEYER AG provided that you have saved the software in the default path The start screen appears Do you want to Show instructions G Search for all connected devices g Open a parameter file E Load an existing project SC Create a new project f Setup connection to the device Exit the program Settings for the Communication Click on the button Setup connection to the device to open the dialog window Setup connection to the device Setup connection to the device Setup communication interface Local connection O Network connection Select connection Type PC connection Kommunikationsanschluss COM1 F Keep project connect F Search devices connect X Cancel Select and configure the communication server The selection depends on the used device and its wiring For detailed information refer to chapter 15 Communi cation p 269 drivemaster2 User Manual 45 j First Steps FEE Click on the button Search devices connect to return to the dialog window Start For the following steps it is provided that the communication server is set correctly Searching for connected devices Select the menu item Search for all connected devices in the start screen e Searching for connected devices
57. and enter the 3 dB cut off frequency of the filter The unit is hertz 10 ES Please consider that a low pass in the reference current value reduces the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integration time Band stop filter A band stop filter is used to suppress resonance frequencies caused by the mechan ical construction of the driven machine Enter the center frequency of the band stop filter The bandwidth is set automatically The unit is hertz ES Please consider that a band stop filter in the reference current value can reduce the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integration time drivemaster2 User Manual 155 10 Parameters of an SD2x 156 Current Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s On this page you can set the parameters of the current controller for SERVO VECTOR operation These are the current limitation the holding current and the proper control parameters Ef Device overview fl Parameters B im POO servo drive Current controller 7 H fl Configuration E Monitorings Q Analog signals t 2d Digital signals El Encoder emulation E r Controller 2 Ref current filt
58. bending points must grow with increasing frequency speed or at least remain equal The voltage however can be reduced The selected value can be copied into the next column by mouse click on the button Copy Click on the button Check to trigger a plausibility check of the entered values Linearization When the check box is activated the motor is accelerated or decelerated with increased voltage As soon as the converter reaches the set reference value M10 Ref value reached the voltage is reduced to the normal voltage of the characteristic curve The programming of the desired bending point defines the increase of the linea rization The point is displayed as broken line in the graph The maximum output voltage is defined in the motor parameters Block commutation from Via this parameter you can determine at which frequency the converter switches from V f operation to block commutation Messages On this page you can parameterize the messages regarding the load limit the refer ence value and the motor temperature monitoring F Tm EF Device overview 5 Parameters Diagnosis m Device Messages 1 e g Configuration fv Analog signals Message load limit i Digital signals dj Motor configuration 1 Type of load limit Intemal reference value v amp Motor parameters S Motor measurement system Load reference value u Z U f Characteristic curve le Traveling profile 4t Holding current cont
59. but it is not downloaded to the drive yet Writing the parameter set into the drive is done via a download 50 drivemaster2 User Manual First Steps 7 2 3 Download of Parameter Set Start the download via the menu item Loader Write parameters to drive In the window Write parameters you can watch the progress of the download Write parameters Actual system software firmware gt bootloader m4 Writing initialisation parameter z saving initialisation parameter 46 X After the window has disappeared the parameter download is finished and the configuration of the drive is completed Troubleshooting wrong system software If the parameterization of the drive is not suitable for the logic or firmware in the drive the following dialog opens to point out the problem Attention The parameterset could not be loaded into the drive The system software of the drive is missing the following features Firmware Resolver evaluation Please update the system software of the drive Sli Update system software X Cancel parameter download You have the following possibilities 1 Cancel parameter download The process is canceled and you can change the parameters of the drive as required 2 Update system software You load the logic and firmware file that is suitable for the parameterization into the drive For this purpose the following dialog is opened Update system software The following mat
60. can be determined 10 by means of the output voltage 5 10 of the maximum output voltage are neces sary for commutation finding drivemaster2 User Manual 145 10 P ters of an SD2 arameters of an X nmm The following figure was recorded in the Oscar The start threshold of the motor is at a voltage of 16 V ms and a speed of 3500 rpm EH1 v Vref controller v 3488 4 RPM CH3 Iv Iq ref v 25 Ams CH2 Iv Vact v 34884 RPM CH4 v Veff Motor v 150 v Veff Motor o 1 Switch on threshold 500 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Holding current At standstill the drive must not lose the commutation Therefore a holding current is impressed The holding current should be in the range of 5 25 96 of the motor rated current Stop threshold When the speed reference value N ref controller drops below this value braking the motor is continued by open loop control The parameter is write protected at present The speed parametrized in the start threshold is applied for the stop threshold as well Braking current The parameter indicates the braking current in amperes This current is impressed during open loop controlled braking ES When operating highly inductive motors the commutation can shift due to high braking torques In this case the braking rate is reduced automatically i e the deceleration time might be longer Winding Detection SD2x SVC SERVO HSP
61. can parameterize the reference value generator Ef Device overview l Parameters B a POO pam converter I Speed ref values 9 E l Configuration fy Analog signals ai Digital signals amp Motor configuration 1 N Ref N Ref controller ES Motor configuration 2 i p H Motor parameters t Fad EZ m S Motor measurement syste i NF Chiraci curva Direction lock Skip velocity 1 Max Limit Acceleration ramp Messages Negative X 250 Hz 1000 Hz 10000 ms T Holding function Skip range 1 Min Limit Deceleration ramp ite ERES values nit i 100 Hz o Hz 10000 ms KR jompensation Direction of positive rotation Skip velocity 2 NMin Mode Quick stop ramp Cw 0 Hz N Ref 0 10000 ms Skip range 2 0 Hz Fig 92 Parameter page Speed ref values Speed Reference Values FC2 Direction of rotation The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt counterclockwise rotation CCW ES The direction of rotation set in the software should match the actual rotation direction of the motor If this is not the case two motor phases must be exchanged Direction lock If only one direction of the motor is permitted you can lock the other direction via this parameter The following settings are available gt None Both positive and negative speed values are passed to the motor gt Positive Positive
62. different passwords for the access can be assigned A user hierarchy with up to three user levels can be created User Levels The software provides the following three user levels i User with all predetermined access right Password with max 8 characters OEM User with changeable access rights Password with max 8 characters User with changeable access rights User level after software start After starting the software the user is logged in the currently lowest user level defined in the parameter set The lowest user level depends on the password assignment gt When passwords were assigned to the Admin level and the OEM level the User level is the lowest user level gt When a password was assigned to the Admin level only the OEM level is the lowest user level gt When no passwords were assigned the Admin level is the lowest user level gt When no device is connected to the software on startup the user is logged in as Admin and can create a new parameter set User level of a parameter set When a new parameter set is created the passwords are not assigned yet and the user has administrator rights for this parameter set If you load a parameter set from the device this parameter set is protected by the passwords saved in the device The parameter set is opened in the lowest user level If you load a parameter set from a file this parameter set is protected by the pass words saved in this file The para
63. documentation Voltage The parameter indicates the main voltage of a sine mains supply in vo fs RMS value gt Single phase operation Voltage is related to the neutral conductor gt Three phase operation Voltage is defined between two phases This parameter is used by the load monitoring In the event of an error the device is Switched off with the error E33 Power supply load monitoring gt mains voltage too high or E34 Power supply load monitoring gt mains voltage too low Mains frequency The parameter indicates the frequency of the sine mains supply in hertz or the supply of direct current DC The available variants are set by means of a list box Power SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM v v s 4k This parameter group displays information on the maximum output power of the drive amplifier The displayed values are read only values and depend on the used hardware as well as the parameter Mains phases Rated power The parameter indicates the rated power of the power supply unit in kilowatts This is the maximum output power during continuous operation The indicated value is the apparent power of the device Peak power The parameter indicates the peak power of the power supply unit as apparent power in kilowatts Time for peak power The parameter specifies the period of time in seconds in which the device can provide the peak power once from the cold state drivemaster2 User Man
64. dp dns dyn 72 dss kg Indicates the mass of the motor s primary part including the measuring system and the brake The mass of additionally mounted components is not considered in this parameter Motor mass Voltage constant V m s Specifies the countervoltage constant of the motor The voltage is measured Phase Phase 1 between two phases Vrms m s Force constant N A Specifies the force generation depending on the impressed current Stator resistance N Ams Indicates the resistance of the stator winding The indicated value is the Phase Phase value measured over two phases Stator inductivity Indicates the inductance of the stator winding The indicated value is the Phase Phase value measured over two phases External inductance LN Via this parameter external inductivity can be specified e g chokes Phase shift Motor electr Currently this parameter has no meaning for linear motors phase Measurement Ohm mH mH On delay motor holding ms Indicates the time which passes from the moment the motor holding brake is brake Switched on until the controller the force is switched off ms Ohm C Off delay motor holding brake Indicates the time which passes from the moment the controller the force is switched on until the motor holding brake is switched off Limit of temperature moni Ohm PTC thermal contact toring For a resistor with a positive temperature coefficient PTC th
65. for local communication 15 15 5 3 2 Software Configuration It is required that the communication server runs on the remote PC and network access is allowed drivemaster2 User Manual 285 15 Communication 15 5 4 15 5 4 1 286 After you have started the software drivemaster2 click the button Setup connec tion to the device to open the dialog for the communication Later you can also select the menu Settings Setup connection to the device to call the dialog Setup connection to the device Setup communication interface CO Local connection Network connection Network settings PC Name or IP Address 172 16 6 234 Used connection z F Keep project connect F O Search devices connect X Cancel Make the following settings Communication interface Network connection PC Name or IP Address Name or IP address of the remote PC in the example above 172 16 6 234 Used connection USB Click on the button Search devices connect to apply the settings and create an online project 4 Then the corresponding communication server is started and the result is displayed in the status bar If successful the following entries should appear Host 172 16 6 234 Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 l A a a e e The created project for the connection example above is structured as follows Eg Device overview i SD2 0 036 21 30DDF 5 Drv 0A 036 21 30DF A B Drv OB 03
66. frequency converter is selected Operating mode The parameter indicates the operating mode of the drive It is set by means of a list box but at the moment only the operating mode Velocity mode 1 is available The speed reference value or the velocity reference value can be set externally Control FC2 The communication with the frequency converter is divided into the groups communi cation and control of the drive In the parameter group Control the control channel for the control of the drive is set Control channel The parameter specifies the communication channel for the control of the drive drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 The following entries can be set by a list box gt Digital inputs gt Serial interface RS485 USB gt SERVOLINK 4 Setpoint channel The parameter indicates the channel to be used for sending reference values to the device The provided selection depends on the selected control channel The following entries can be set by a list box Control channel Setpoint channel Digital inputs Analog inputs Serial interface RS485 USB Serial interface RS485 USB SERVOLINK 4 SERVOLINK 4 Behavior in Case of FC2 Via this parameter group you can set the behavior of the frequency converter in different situations The parameterization in this parameter group depends on the complete system mechanical elements working area into which the drive is installed You can
67. no second parameter group gt Motor measurement system AB Quadrature signals available with the drive functions SERVO VECTOR The encoder emulation is realized via the measuring system by AB quadrature signals A second parameter group Encoder emulation Motor measurement system AB Quadrature signals p 124 is displayed gt Speed pulse available with the drive functions HSPWM HSBLOCK FPAM HSPAM VF The encoder emulation is realized via the measuring system by speed pulses The second parameter group Encoder emulation Speed pulse p 125 is displayed gt Speed pulse available with the drive functions SERVO VECTOR The encoder emulation is realized via trigger pulses The second parameter group Encoder emulation Trigger signals p 125 is displayed Encoder Emulation Motor Measuring System AB Quadrature Signals SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 Via this parameter group the encoder emulation is configured for the selected measu ring system by AB quadrature signals Quadrature signals are made up of two rectangular signals A and B and a signal for the zero position N The edge sequence of A and B indicates the counting direction In addition a zero pulse is transmitted The zero pulse is signaled once per revolution for rotary encoders and once per travel range for linear scales By means of the zero pulse an absolute position information can be determined Encoder
68. object DEV CTRL SELECT PARAMETER SET 153 For further information on using objects refer e g to the documentations Drive System SD2 DNC 8 Byte Telegram and Drive System SD2 CAN Bus Connection 10 1 3 Switching the parameter set in the drive n order to change the active parameter set in the drive you must switch off the controller first Switching to another parameter set is only possible when the controller is switched off The drive reacts by removing the bit M01 Power output stage switched on From that moment the parameter set can be changed Change the parameter set by entering the correct parameter set number or by connecting the digital inputs accordingly see below The devices in table top design of the series SD2T allow changing the parameter set also by means of the push buttons on the device front panel see hardware description 64 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 1 3 1 10 2 Parameters of an SD2x Parameter Set Change via the Digital Inputs The following diagram shows the timing when the parameter set is switched via the digital inputs The functions of the digital inputs must be defined accordingly in the soft ware arivemaster2 Switching from one parameter set to another is actually done by unsetting and setting the control input switch on A Logic voltage amp main voltage gt x t Control input Switch on I gt A i t i i i t M01 i i Power output i stage switche
69. of the PC Via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 Connect the SIEB amp MEYER USB gt RS232 485 converter to the female connector X3 of the PS2 and to a USB port of the PC Via RS232 to RS485 converter Connect a commercially available RS232 to RS485 converter to the female connector X3 of the PS2 and to the serial interface of the PC CS The pin assignment of the RS485 cable is described in Drive System SD2 Hardware Description Connect the power supply unit PS2 female connector X4 via a standard Ethernet patch cable to the first drive amplifier SD2 female connector X3 drivemaster2 User Manual 23 Device Connection to PC 4 2 Connection of Double axis Compact Device SD2 SD2 0362130xxy 0362131xxy RS232 RS485 Converter a a a a t USB gt RS485 232 1 Converter 050201 AE NN gt RS485 SS N eo es ey efuuyo Jmm s gs je Gj Ga efje efzo boo jo ef Co EIER Fig 4 Possible connections between PC and SD2 036 21 3x Connect the drive amplifier SD2 036 21 3x to the PC Via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 Connect the SIEB amp MEYER USB gt RS232 485 converter to the female connector X3 of the SD2 and to a USB port of the PC Via RS232 to RS485 converter Connect a commercially available RS232 to RS485 converter to the female connector
70. of the communication server The client application must indicate this number to gain access to the network gt Clients Indicates the number of local client applications that are currently logged on to the communication server Client applications on remote PCs are not counted If this number is reset from 1 to 0 the communica tion server will be terminated gt State Indicates the communication status of the last command 4 Hide main window ES Contrary to the standard function under Windows the red cross in the title bar does not close the communication server but hides the window again Thus the communication server may not be closed by mistake Menu Description Menu File gt Select serial port Opens the following dialog Config serial COM port CoM2 Here the name of the serial interface is entered gt Quit Terminates the serial communication server Still existing connections to applications are interrupted Menu Options This menu allows adaptation of the communication server s behavior gt A Allow remote access This option must be set to allow the applications to access the communication server via network This option is deactivated for safety reasons default setting gt Use command toggle bit The so called toggle bit increases the transmission security Therefore this option should always be activated Menu Logfile The communication server always creates a log file wh
71. of the drive is analyzed If there are current errors the error of the highest priority is displayed If there is no current error the saved error of the highest priority is displayed If the drive has been stopped via the quick stop command the event that triggered the quick stop is also displayed Actual errors The field displays the current error of the drive control if existent This is the error of 12 the highest priority The error class and the internal error code is also displayed The error classes A high priority to D low priority are distinguished Latched error The field displays the saved error of the drive control This is the error that caused the last shutdown of the drive The error class and the internal error code is also displayed The error classes A high priority to D low priority are distinguished When the error is reset the saved error is also cleared drivemaster2 User Manual 217 Diagnosis ri 12 5 Error Memory On this page the error memory of the device is displayed EW Device overview fs Parameters Ad Diagnosis i m Device Error memory 2 1 3 Drive actual values dl Etrors and wamings Error memory d UN Digital inputs d e Digital outputs HB Sine Cosine Display Last Errors Error statistic Time of operation AZ Delta Z Measurement p Analog inputs Last Errors 42x Analog outputs i Par Set Eror F SERVOLINK 4 monitor E26 C Motor temperature too high
72. of the power electronics The voltage range is related to the maximum voltage in the rectified DC link DC voltage and is indicated in vo ts gt Peak current time Specifies the maximum current of the output stage The peak current is indicated as crest value In the cold state this peak current may only flow once for a maximum time period I t time as indicated here Software This field is divided into four tab pages Parameter Firmware Logic Coding and BIOS These tab pages provide the respective version information gt Name Parameter Indicates the individual designation of the parameter set which is the same as the user defined drive name Firmware Indicates the general designation of the firmware This designation is equivalent to the file name of the firmware Logic coding Indicates the general designation of the logic coding This designation is equivalent to the file name of the logic coding drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis BIOS Indicates the general designation of the BIOS This designation is equivalent to the file name of the BIOS gt Version Parameter Indicates the version of the parameter set The version is assigned by the software arivemaster2 Firmware Indicates the version of the firmware Logic coding Indicates the version of the logic coding BIOS Indicates the version of the BIOS Parameter Indicates the identification code of the parameter set The ID is user define
73. parameter group the warning and error message for a speed error and slip 10 monitoring can be configured provided that a suitable measuring system is parame trized The speed of rotary motors is indicated in revo utions per minute the speed of linear motors in millimeters per second Speed error slip Window Via this parameter you can define whether the Slip window is indicated by a fix speed or depending on the reference value in percent W12 Window The parameter indicates the warning threshold of the speed error at which the warning W12 is generated W12 Window time The parameter indicates the time of the W12 window in milliseconds If the speed error is within the W12 window for the total window time the warning W12 is generated E31 Shutdown threshold The parameter indicates the threshold value of the speed at which the error E31 is trig gered drivemaster2 User Manual 109 10 Parameters of an SD2x 110 ral E31 Window time The parameter indicates the time of the E31 window in milliseconds If the speed error is within the E31 window for the total window time the error E31 Speed error or slip too great is triggered and the device is switched off Error E38 Overspeed SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v v s Via this parameter group the error message for overspeed can be configured provided that a suitable measuring system is parameterized The speed of rotary motors
74. progress of the download Write system software C LogikMD04002 HSPwMNArchivW04002v03021 136 Check file compatibility Actual system software firmware bootloader Clear flash EPROM Writing system software 26 4 When the dialog window is closed the download is finished 5 7 Update of arivemaster2 Software The software drivemaster2 provides an update service so the user can find and install new software versions For this purpose the PC must have Internet access If a new software version is available the button New version available appears in the menu bar of the software drivemaster2 om The update contains the standard version of the software arivemaster2 If you have an individual installation with other company logos addresses etc you can adapt or hide the update service For detailed information refer to the documentation drivemaster2 Individual Installation Proceed as follows to update the software gt Click the button New version available or open the menu Help Check for updates The dialog Check for updates appears drivemaster2 Installed version V1 14 151 New version available V1 15 000 what s new Download Q Instal Installed version Indicates the version of the software drivemaster2 that is currently running on you PC New version available Indicates the version number of the new software version if available If not the text No newer Version avail
75. range The following parameters can be set gt Startup current The parameter indicates the desired startup and braking current in amperes gt Switching threshold The parameter indicates the speed in revolutions per minute at which the controller switches to V f voltage characteristic curve during startup and back to the parameterized current during braking Flying Restart If the function Flying restart is activated the controller determines the actual speed when a new reference value is set and the new target speed is reached from that point The following parameters can be set gt Only in ref value direction If this check box is activated the controller searches for the actual speed only in the direction of the actual reference value Thus the flying restart time is cut in half gt After every coast to standstill drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Flying restart is executed each time the spindle was stopped by coasting to stand still gt For each Controller On Flying restart is executed each time after activating the output stage gt Flying restart current The parameter indicates the current in amperes that is used for the spindle restart Typically this value is approximately 50 96 of the rated current gt Flying restart time The parameter indicates the time for the spindle restart in milliseconds If a measuring system is configured the actual speed is not determined but direct
76. rights is to find in section 6 3 Assigning User Rights p 42 98 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 2 9 Parameters of an SD2x Units On this page you can define the units for drives operating with the drive function SERVO VECTOR that are indicated for certain values on the user interface PERET era ER Device overview 5 Parameters F Diagnosis i PO Doci o O g Configuration gt Dive Units 8 Power supply il Power output stage Internal position controller resolution 100 nm x Motor S Motor measurement syster Position unit mm Bs Drive control User level rights Velocity unit tomm Jf Monitorings Acceleration unit Analog signals ij Digital signals fi Encoder emulation Position factor Dr Controller Motor measuring system _ lt gt Fig 25 Parameter page Units Units SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v This parameter group allows setting the units used by the controller internally i e by which it is parameterized Internal position controller resolution The parameter specifies the scaling of the position unit internally used by the position control The value indicates the position deviation which corresponds to one increment Position unit The parameter indicates the unit for distances in the software At present only the unit millimeter can be selected Velocity unit The parameter indicates the unit for veloci
77. risk Risk levels Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage NOTICE eee a hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property Risk symbols General hazardous situation Risk of injury due to hot surfaces A Risk of injury due to electric shock drivemaster2 User Manual 13 About this Manual Potentially risk of injury when working on machines with open covers doors Risk of injury due to flying objects Destruction risk of electrostatically sensitive components Risk of property damage 1 2 Hint with additional further information Tip with suggestions and useful information Terms and Definitions Terms that are specifically explained in the manual are highlighted as underlined and green words All term definitions are to find in the glossary of the manual In the PDF file a mouse click on a highlighted term jumps directly to the according definition 1 3 Abbreviations FPAM flux pulse amplitude modulation HSBLOCK high speed block commutation HSPAM high speed pulse amplitude modulation HSPWM high speed pulse width modulation n c not connected SERVO servo control STO safety function Safe
78. saved in a newly created directory in the installation path these files will not be removed by the uninstall program If necessary these files must be deleted manually USB Driver Installation The USB driver is automatically copied when the Windows software is installed The installation of the USB driver is automatically started by the Windows operating system as soon as a device is connected to a USB port of the computer om You need administrator rights to install the USB driver drivemaster2 User Manual Installation The following dialog window appears when you connect the device to the USB port Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only O Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue Fig 1 Dialog window Found New Hardware Wizard Select the option No not this time because a connection with the Windows Update server is not necessary for the installation Click Next to confirm Then the USB hardware will be detected USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 is detected with the name LibUsb Win32 SM2 TUSB1340 FirmwareLoader and installed Found New Hardware W
79. set the following reactions for the indicated events Reaction Communication Controller off Quick stop Main voltage drop failure SERVO command command Soft LINK 4 se Noacton action still Shutdown Shutdown The motor is decelerated motor is decelerated Description of the reactions gt No action The operation is continued without reaction to the fault gt Shutdown The motor coasts to standstill The power output stage is switched off immediately All control circuits are deacti vated The motor coasts to standstill without control If applicable the motor is kept in position by a mechanical motor brake gt Shutdown The motor is decelerated The motor is decelerated by the standard deceleration ramp whereas the deceler ation is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation As soon as the state Frequency zero is reached the output stage is switched off Then the control of the drive is off If applicable it is kept in its position by means of a mechanical brake gt Shutdown Quick stop ramp The motor is decelerated by the quick stop ramp whereas the deceleration is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation As soon as the state Frequency zero is reached the output stage is switched off Then the drivemaster2 User Manual 193 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 2 11 2 1 194 control of the drive is off If a
80. speed values are not passed to the motor gt Negative Negative speed values are not passed to the motor Skip bandwidth By means of a skip bandwidth you can prevent that definite frequencies speeds are driven for a long time These speeds might be e g resonances of a machine Example gt Skip speed 250 Hz gt Skiprange 50 Hz gt max admissible speed below skip speed 200 Hz gt min admissible speed above skip speed 300 Hz drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Frequency reference values within the skip bandwidth 200 Hz 300 Hz are suppressed f Skip bandwidth 350 f target 250 f ref 150 Max limit The parameter indicates the maximum possible frequency speed in hertz revolutions per minute Min limit The parameter indicates the minimum possible frequency speed in hertz revolutions per minute NMin mode Via this parameter you can select the reference frequency speed to be driven in case a target value below the minimum limit has been selected Mode N Ref 0 n ref out M min Dey in 1 1 min drivemaster2 User Manual 209 11 Parameters of an FC2 210 Mode N Ref N Min hysteresis ES It is not possible to reverse the direction of the motor rotation when the target value is below the determined minimum speed Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference frequency speed They are indicated in millisecond
81. status and the error frequency of the SERVOLINK 4 communication EW Device overview fs Parameters Ad Diagnosis POO Jager_KS 2_10 80 SERVOLINK 4 monitor 7 173 Drive actual values Ural T Configuration Reference values Actual values Errors and wamings f Error memory ES Position measurement system T Digital inputs SERVOLINK 4 status word Digital outputs V Synchronized Sine Cosine Display V CRC Okay 4Z Delta Z Measurement Plies 22 Analog inputs 4 Analog outputs C CRC out of window 1 n O Sync time out CAN bus monitor O Initializing v HE Object browser v res v res y Version information SERVOLINK 4 error counter CRC Error x Zero data telegrams Counter reset SERVOLINK 4 State C Rey Fig 109 Diagnosis page SERVOLINK 4 monitor configuration SERVOLINK 4 status Word This field indicates the status of the SERVOLINK 4 communication and serves for a general analysis of it It is displayed whether the synchronization and the check sum are OK In the event of an error too many successive CRC errors synchronization time out the corresponding errors will be displayed If the communication is being initialized this will also be displayed SERVOLINK 4 CRC error The value error counter displays the number of CRC errors which occurred since the communication was started After CRC error number 65535 there will be an overflow The va
82. the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade If this temperature is exceeded the output stage will be switched off automatically and the error message E27 Ambient temperature too high appears drivemaster2 User Manual 191 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 1 4 192 Choke FC2 This parameter group displays information on the internal inductance Internal inductance The parameter indicates the internal inductance of the output stage choke in m enry If there is no choke in the drive the inductance value is 0 mH Drive Control Via this page the parameters of the drive control are configured T Tm Ef Device overview 2 Parameters 2 Diagnosis ER Device Dive g Configuration fh Drive Operating mode of the drive 18 Power supply H Power output stage Operating mode Velocity mode 1 fh Analog signals x Digital signals Qe Motor configuration 1 Control amp Motor configuration 2 Control channel Digital inputs Setpoint channel Analog inputs Behavior in case of Communication failure SERVOLINK 4 CAN No action Controller off command Shutdown The motor is decelerated Quick stop command Software Shutdown The motor coasts to stands Main voltage drop Shutdown Quick stop ramp Fig 82 Parameter page Drive control Operating Mode of the Drive FC2 Here the operating mode of the
83. the new parameter set in the project Cancel Exits the dialog without applying the parameter set gt Edit parameter set Opens a dialog to edit the selected parameter set You can change the name and the number of the selected parameter set The parameter Number set number 0 cannot be Name changed Apply changes Exits the dialog V Apply changes X Cancel and applies the changes in the project Cancel Exits the dialog without applying the changes gt Copy parameter set Copies the selected parameter set into the clipboard 5 gt Delete parameter set Deletes the selected parameter set Clipboard The clipboard contains the copied object device drive or parameter set Use the available buttons to paste the copied object to the selected place of the project tree gt Paste drive The copied drive is adapted to the target drive All parameter sets are applied Parameter sets of the target drive which are not drivemaster2 User Manual Working with Projects available in the copied drive are deleted You can transfer the drive of a single axis drive amplifier to a double axis drive amplifiers and vice versa Paste device The copied device is adapted to the target device All parameter sets are applied If you transfer a double axis drive amplifier to a single axis drive amplifier the drive B is not applied 6 Project Actions drivemaster2 User Manual Back The d
84. the object window All previously displayed objects are cleared from the display The opened objects are read out permanently Add object file The button opens an existing object list and adds the listed objects in there to the already displayed objects in the object window B Save object file as drivemaster2 User Manual 233 12 Diagnosis 234 The button saves the objects currently displayed in the object window into an object list A file with the file extension E Select objects We ose will be generated The button opens the dialog Object Selection This dialog window allows to select objects of a drive and create an individual object list Object selection Object Dictionary Browser EL Object Selection g Object Dictionary D Object Dictionary LJ DeviceData LJ PowerSupply D PowerStage MotorData J DeviceControl Statistic DrivesetupTools Watnungsmanager Oscar SetpointGenerator PositionControl LJ VelocityControl CurrentFeedForeward E CurrentfieferenceFiller 2 CurrentControl Object Information Object Selection Object Name POWER SUPPLY CHOPPER LOAD MAX POWER SUPPLY STATUS WORD POWER STAGE DC LINK VOLTAGE MAX FOWER STAGE SWITCHING FREQUENCY MOTOR LOAD MAX Object Name MOTOR LOAD MAX Data Type Index 64 Unit E max motor load promill This field displays the entire object directory in
85. the stator winding The indicated value is the Phase Phase value measured over two phases Stator inductivity mH Indicates the inductance of the stator winding The indicated value is the Phase Phase value measured over two phases H External inductance m Via this parameter external inductivity can be specified e g chokes Phase shift Motor electr This parameter is only used for resolver measuring systems The value indi phase Measurement cates the phase between the zero position of the motor and the zero posi tion of the resolver measuring system The phase is indicated as electric angle in It can be determined via the setup tool On delay motor holding brake Off delay motor holding m Indicates the time which passes from the moment the controller the torque Indicates the time which passes from the moment the motor holding brake is switched on until the controller the torque is switched off brake is switched on until the motor holding brake is switched off ms S drivemaster2 User Manual TT 10 Parameters of an SD2x Parameter w pe o Temperature monitoring Specifies which type of temperature monitoring is used in the motor The parameter is set via list box Depending on the selected type of temperature monitoring the parameter Limit of temperature monitoring appears Limit of temperature moni PTC thermal contact toring For a resistor with a positive temperature coefficient P
86. the tracking error window a warning message is immediately triggered Pposition tracking error warning window time no tracking error warning tracking error warning Error E44 Commutation lost SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 m This parameter group allows to configure the error message for loss of commutation 10 Via the check boxes you can activate the corresponding monitoring functions These are writable only for synchronous motors E44 Flux monitoring Via the check box the monitoring function for flux increase is activated The parameter E44 Start threshold indicates the speed in revolutions per minute at which the flux monitoring is activated By means of the parameter E44 Flux threshold you set the maximum flux in a value range of 200 96 800 If this value is exceeded the error message E44 is triggered E44 Under flux Monitoring Via the check box the monitoring function for flux drop is activated The parameter E44 Under flux threshold indicates the minimum flux current in amperes f the flux falls below this value the error message E44 is triggered In addition you can activate the function One restart at magnetic alignment error E44 Over current monitoring Via the check box the monitoring function for current increase is activated drivemaster2 User Manual 111 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 4 10 4 1 112 The paramet
87. the voltage reduction at idle Slip compensation The slip compensation must be activated via the check box The writable parameter specifies the load dependent adaptation of the of the reference value When you change this parameter the frequency speed and the motor voltage are also increased according to the characteristic curve This adaptation is related to the active motor current This function is important because asynchronous motors are at a disadvantage The actual value and the reference value are only during idle operation almost synchro nous On load the actual frequency speed decreases actual current Slip compensation f x input value f motor peak current Load compensation The load compensation must be activated via the check box The writable parameter specifies the load dependent adaptation of the motor voltage in percent This voltage adaptation is related to the active motor current drivemaster2 User Manual 211 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 FEE 212 Small setting values up to approx 15 are especially recommended for the compensation of voltage drops in the motor feeding lines or in the motor windings Higher setting values up to 100 96 are especially recommended for applications in which the motor is loaded rarely Hence a reduced no load voltage is sufficient and this consequently leads to heavily reduced no load losses Exceeding the maximum programmed output voltage is not possible L
88. used by another application E SERVER COMM CONFIG The serial port has been opened but could not be parameterized Possibly the serial interface can not work with a baud rate of 57600 baud UDP This group displays small statistics on the network communication with the client appli cations The displays have the following meaning gt Performance The value indicates the number of commands that have been executed in the last second The performance limit of the bus server is about 150 commands per second gt CMD NACK sent The value indicates the number of commands that have been rejected because the command buffer was full A rise of this value may indicate that too many client applications try to communicate at the same time gt Command Buffer The bar displays the filling level of the command buffer When the command buffer is full the next command is rejected with the command CMD NACK Serial This group displays statistics of the serial communication with the devices The displays have the following meaning gt Command count The value indicates the number of all executed commands gt Repeat count The value indicates how often a command was repeated Before a command is returned to the client with an error message it is repeated once A rise of this value may indicate that the communication path is sensitive for interfer ences gt Error count The value indicates the number of errors that have alread
89. values Servolink 4 monitor WE Object browser y Version information El Device overview fi Parameters A Diagnosis Spindle act values 7 Select i s s s s s s s s s s 9 Temperature Feedback 17022 2063 2025 2046 Fig 108 Diagnosis page Spindle actual values The active spindles have the status 1 in the category Select The following actual values are displayed for each spindle Temperature Indicates the status of the spindle temperature If you have not para meterized a type of temperature monitoring the status is always OK It Displays the Pt load of the spindle in percent Feedback Displays the counting pulses of the measuring system Speed Indicates the actual speed in hertz revolutions per minute gt SERVOLINK 4 Monitor This page is used to analyze the communication of the drive via the SERVOLINK 4 bus system For this purpose the tab pages Configuration Reference values and Actual values are provided Since data are not read out in real time by the software 12 drivemaster2 the data may be inconsistent For further information refer to the SIEB amp MEYER documentation Drive System SD2 Device Control drivemaster2 User Manual 227 Diagnosis INI 12 16 1 Configuration The tab page Configuration allows analyzing the
90. which measuring system is supported for the devices and drive functions and which additional parameter groups appear Measuring system Additional parameter group SERVO SD2 Angle Controller p 89 VECTOR SD2S Sensorless vector controlled SVC Magnetic alignment current p 87 Incremental encoder TTL gt Incremental encoder TTL p 85 SineCosine encoder with EnDat gt SineCosine encoder p 87 SineCosine encoder with Hiperface Linear Hall Linear Hall p 86 Q gt Incremental Encoder 412 V Incremental Encoder 12 V p 85 SD2B Angle Controller p 89 SD2T Sensorless vector controlled SVC Magnetic alignment current HSPWM SD2S Hall Sensor p 84 Hall ABC 12 v2 Magnetic alignment current p 87 9 gt Magnetic alignment current Sensorless 87 3 Field plate 3 wires Field plate 2 wires Pulse generator NAMUR gt Pulse generator p 85 Pulse generator 24V gt Magnetic alignment current 3 Pulse generator at track Hall A Be Pulse generator 5V Digital field plate GMR Sensorless se Sensores 1 piii jd p 87 Field plate 3 wires Field plate 2 wires Pulse generator NAMUR Pulse generator p 85 gt Magnetic alignment current Pulse generator 24V p 87 9 Pulse generator at track Hall A Digital field plate GMR HSBLOCK SD2S Hall ABC 12 V2 Hall Sensor p 84 FPAM Tach
91. 0 v t At v t 0 Variable ramps By means of the function Variable ramps you can set a limit for the mean actual current For this purpose the acceleration is reduced depending on the actual current Typically variable ramps are applied during the start up of pumps or fans In addition the function can be used as general current limitation with the drive function HSPAM VF gt Norm current limitation With the normal current limitation the current is limited according to the following figure drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x acc dec 100 100 gt Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is relative to the maximum current For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps gt Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is relative to a fix current value For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps Variable Ramps SD2x HSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM m s On the page Variable ramps you can parameterize a limit for the mean current Ef Device overview i Parameters g Configuration 3 Variable ramps 7 i fl Drive H Power supply Acceleration 1 Acceleration 2 1 0 Power output stage f Motor S Motor measurement s D Drive control Gi Bus system User level rights gr Monitorin
92. 100 ms 5 00 ms Direction of rotation Quick stop ramp Cw v 10 ms Fig 41 Parameter page Speed controller Limitation The parameter defines the limiting value of the speed controller This value limits the reference speed value The reference speed and its limitation are indicated in mi lime ters per second or in revolutions per minute The maximum value of the Limitation is the speed scaling Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference speed value They are indicated in milliseconds The parameter displays the time required for reaching the speed scaling from standstill A ramp of e g 12000 ms together with a speed scaling of 120000 rpm 10000 1 min makes a maximum acceleration of 167 1 s or s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the acceleration from O to the speed limit v t A9 v 9 gt 0 gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a break application to speed 0 v t At v 9 lt 0 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x FEI gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop to speed 0 v t At v t 0 Direction of rotation The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt counterclockwise rotation CCW For linear drive this parameter is used for inverting the moving direction
93. 16 B Appendix B FAQ FAQ In this section you find answers to questions frequently asked by our customers Why can not connect to the drive when access it via USB When you establish a USB connection for the first time the Windows operating system must search and install the corresponding driver Copying the driver files can take a long time for the first connection or when you switch the USB port You can not access the device via the software until this procedure is finished see also section 3 4 USB Driver Installation p 18 can not get online access to the device There are several possible reasons for this problem Please check the following items gt When you have connected the device to a local PC the option Allow remote access in the menu Options of the communication server system tray must NOT be set gt When you have connected the device to the serial interface of the PC this inter face might be blocked permanently by another device gt Is the device address set correctly gt f you use a very long USB cable this might cause trouble for permanent online connection When update the software arivemaster2to a new version always get error messages from the installation program Before installing the new version you must always close the old version This also applies to the corresponding communication server system tray and the additional applications in the drivemaster2 softw
94. 2 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below 152 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is limited via absolute current values gt c sz 5 2 o E 3 x 30 40 Current Arms The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below Speed Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v On this page you can set the parameters of the speed controller for HSBLOCK FPAM 10 operation drivemaster2 User Manual 153 10 Parameters of an SD2x 154 Ef Device overview fl Parameters I m POO test drive Speed controller Q El a Configuration
95. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Frequency Hz 5 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Voltage Vac 50 2288 2298 2298 2298 2298 2298 2298 lt n gt Fig 75 Parameter page V f characteristic curve Bending points The table columns indicate the voltage and the frequency speed of the individual bending points The origin 0 Hz or 0 rpm 0 V is fixed in the data set so you do not need to enter it Interpolation between the value pairs is linear The number of bending drivemaster2 User Manual 179 10 Parameters of an SD2x 180 points must grow with increasing frequency speed or at least remain equal The voltage however can be reduced The selected value can be copied into the next column by mouse click on the button Copy Click on the button Check to trigger a plausibility check of the entered values Speed Controller SD2x HSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v On this page you can set the parameters of the speed controller for a HSPAM VF converter EG Device overview fl Parameters 5B POD die m l Configuration tz t Monitorings ic ih Analog signals 4 2 Digital signals EN Motor potentiometer E Encoder emulation Pr Controller 1c Speed ref values Ref val 1 N Rot Field ff Current controller ic VF Characteristic curve D Compensation Speed control only at y constant ref value Amplification Kp Filter time 1 000 512 000 m
96. 226 LL Scaling The parameter indicates the relation of voltage at the analog output to target reference or actual value Output voltage The field displays the digitalized voltage at the analog output in vo fs Spindle Select FC2 This page is only provided for the frequency converters of the series FC2 It displays the new selection of motor spindles input connector X32 and the selection which is currently used output connector X33 kg Device overview ils Parameters P Diagnosis E POO pam converter E Spindle select 7 1 3 Drive actual values dl Etrors and wamings f Eror memory Us Digital inputs amp Digital outputs ep Analog inputs zs Analog outputs 5 Spindle select Servolink 4 monitor WE Object browser y Version information IF s 2 S EJ 8 8 S A 8 9 Fig 107 Diagnosis page Spindle select The example shows 4 active motors whereas the new selection has only 2 motors ES A new selection is only applied after Controller off drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis 12 15 Spindle Actual Values FC2 12 16 This page displays the active spindles and the most important performance data of these n m Device 18 Drive actual values d Errors and warnings f Error memory 2 Digital inputs Pi Digital outputs ep Analog inputs is Analog outputs I Spindle select Spindle actual
97. 2x 117 DNC SD2x 97 Drive control SD2x 91 drivemaster2 User Manual Index Parameters 295 17 17 Index Parameters 296 Drive Function FC2 187 Drive Function SD2x 67 Drive Selection FC2 186 66 Drive Selection SD2x 66 E Electronic Gear SD2x 127 Encoder Emulation Motor Measuring System AB Quadrature Signals SD2x 124 Encoder Emulation Speed Pulse SD2x 125 Encoder Emulation Trigger Signals SD2x 125 Error E31 Speed error Slip FC2 203 Error E31 Speed error Slip SD2x 109 Error E38 Overspeed SD2x 110 Error E39 Tracking error SD2x 110 Error E44 Commutation lost SD2x 111 External Ballast Resistor SD2x 70 F Flux Controller SD2x HSPWM 167 Flux Reference Value SD2x HSPWM 168 Function Encoder Emulation SD2x 123 H Hall Sensor SD2x 84 SineCosine Encoder SD2x 87 Holding Function FC2 206 Identification FC2 187 Identification SD2x 67 Incremental Encoder TTL 12 V SD2x 85 Internal Ballast Resistor FC2 189 Internal Ballast Resistor SD2x 71 Internal Target Values SD2x 122 L Linear Hall SD2x 86 M Magnetic Alignment Current SD2x 87 Mains FC2 188 Mains SD2x 69 Message 10 Position reached SD2x 102 Message 10 Ref value reached SD2x 102 drivemaster2 User Manual Index Parameters Message Load Limit FC2 204 Message M12 Speed zero SD2x 101 Message Reference Value FC2 205 Message
98. 32 or a RS485 connector FC2 02190xxx Q9 X4 UDP Port 0x3601 Pow 0 Drv 0A Fig 129 RS232 communication with an FC2 This configuration requires the following connections gt The PC is connected to the device via an RS232 cable The following requirements must be met for the address selection switches gt When connected directly to the PC the power address 0 is assigned to the device gt Any address 0 to F can be selected via the address selection switch The access to the serial communication server in the PC is shared between the different applications In the example above the applications arivemaster2 and converter setup too are running Connection example with RS232 to RS485 converter and several devices In the example 3 devices are connected to the PC via a converter Any common RS232 to RS485 converter can be used drivemaster2 UDP port 0x3601 SD2 SD2 FC2 03621xx 03621xx 02190xxx PC o RS232 to RS485 9 converter E c E X4 RS 485 X3 X4 RS 485 X3 X4 Power 0 Pow 0 Drv 0A Pow 0 Drv 1A Pow 0 Drv 0B Pow 0 Drv 1B BOM DIN 15 Fig 130 Serial communication via an RS232 to RS485 converter This configuration requires the following connections gt The individual devices are connected to the converter via the X3 X4 bus RS485 connection gt The PC is connected directly to the converter via RS232 driv
99. 4 Then the corresponding communication server is started and the result is displayed in the status bar If successful the following entries should appear Host localhost Server S amp M Serial Server V2 0 I eee The created project Connection example with one device p 281 is structured as follows Eg Device overview drivemaster2 User Manual 15 5 15 5 1 15 5 1 1 Communication The created project Connection example with RS232 to RS485 converter and several devices p 281 is structure as follows E Devi i V Device overview 5 SD2 0 036 21 30DDC th Drv 0 036 21 30DC 4 Bi Drv OB 036 21 30DC B amp SD2 1 036 21 30DDF ta Drv 14 036 21 30DF pi Drv 1 B 036 21 30DF B i FC2 2 021 30 101EC Since the converter itself is no communication target it does not appear in the project Network Communication via Remote PC It is not necessary that the software drivemaster2 and the comprised tools run on the same PC as the communication server Since the applications communicate via the network protocol UDP with the communication server the applications and the commu nication server may run on two different remote PCs The remote PC e g an industrial PC is connected to the devices via USB or RS232 RS485 This remote PC could be mounted together with the devices in the same Switch cabinet Preparation of the Remote PC for Network Operation Two alterations are requ
100. 5 5 3 15 5 3 1 15 5 3 2 15 5 4 15 5 4 1 15 5 4 2 16 16 A 16 A 1 16 A 2 16 B 17 18 Content ETRAS 273 Menu Description ccc ccccccccececccceceecesesaeaeaeaeasseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesesaaaaaaaeaea 274 Diagnosis cote ca castes tat ec cates Res Mr DEDE 215 Addressing the Devices cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeess 276 Communication with a Local PC via USB eeeeen 277 Hardware Configuration 2 cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeecenaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseceensaaeeeeeeeeeeeteetees ait Software CONMMG UA ON i 22 3x descend cadsssanactiedenteasad ER EE Te Vx En EEEE AAEN NENEA 279 Communication with a Local PC via R8232 R8485 280 Hardware Configuration sssssssssssssesssse esent nennen 280 Software Configuratio saisai aia a a a i dee eben 282 Network Communication via Remote PC eeeeeereeeenn 283 Preparation of the Remote PC for Network Operation sssssssss 283 Allow Network ACCESS cccccccceccececeeeeeeesesesaeaeaeseaeaeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesesesaaaea 283 Start the Communication Server sssssssssssssssssseeeeeeennenene nennen 284 Preparation of the Application PC for Network Operation 284 Communication with a Remote PC via USB sees 284 Hardware Configuratio Mssari ote P
101. 6 21 30DF B lj FC2 1 021 90 2001C A 8 PS2 1 036 21 90C fl SD2 0 036 21 141C l Drv 0A 03621 141C A SD2 1 036 21 10EEC ih Div 14 036 21 10EC A Bi Drv 1B 03621 10EC B li FC2 2 021 90 2001C A Since the converter itself is no communication target it does not appear in the project Communication with a Remote PC via RS232 RS485 In the following the hardware and software configuration is described for assemblies in which the hardware is connected to a remote PC via RS232 RS485 serial communica tion Hardware Configuration It does not matter for the settings on the application PC whether the remote PC is connected directly to a device or via a converter drivemaster2 User Manual Communication FEI In the following example 3 devices are connected to an RS232 to RS485 converter PC Ethernet SD2 SD2 FC2 Remote PC 03621xx 03621xx 02190xxx IP address RS232 to RS485 2 172 16 6 232 converter rj x4 RS 485 xa X4 Power 0 Pow 0 Drv 0A Pow 0 Drv 1A Pow 0 Drv 0B Pow 0 Drv 1B Pow 0 Drv 2A Fig 132 Serial Communication via Remote PC This configuration requires the following connections gt The individual devices are connected to the converter via the X3 X4 bus RS485 connection gt The remote PC is connected to the converter via RS232 gt The application PC and the remote PC communicate
102. 60 CMD NACK sent 0 Repeat count 0 Command buffer W 20 Error count 0 Port 0x3600 Clients 1 Status E NOME Fig 125 USB communication server 1 Menu bar drivemaster2 User Manual 15 1 1 2 Communication The program menu provides all functions required for using the communica tion server 2 Diagnosis Display This section displays statistical values of the communication 3 Status bar Here the following values are displayed gt Port Indicates the UDP port number of the communication server The client application must indicate this number to gain access to the network gt Clients Indicates the number of local client applications that are currently logged on to the communication server Client applications on remote PCs are not counted If this number is reset from 1 to 0 the communica tion server will be terminated gt State Indicates the communication status of the last command 4 Hide main window ES Contrary to the standard function under Windows the red cross in the title bar does not close the communication server but hides the window again Thus the communication server may not be closed by mistake Menu Description Menu File gt Rescan USB bus Searches for USB hardware devices Usually the operating system gives notice to the USB communication server when a USB device has been added or removed If you anyway reason that a connected USB device has not been detecte
103. 63 Switching the parameter set in the drive i eicere RR nace 64 Parameter Set Change via the Digital Inputs ssss 65 Sepe er 65 BIET M 66 Drive Selection SIO 2K eserci lt 4 66 Drive Function SD2X srainnsear peg tpe sae Ee Me eR Re leben AER d bo EB Eo deu vanes 67 Identification SD 2x C M H N 67 Parameter set SD 2x acs uei tr itp OL cin tem oed te eun eepe etren 68 Power SuUppiy Unit er sininen erana aE AAEE Ea aen EAR aE 68 Main SD2X E e 69 Power SD2 teip oere cect aee aaae eo iai ccm S anes E AEE 69 Chopper SD2 erene a e E EE EEE EEE SE O R 70 External Ballast Resistor S8D2X 4 eicere einer erede ede d dte deed nde pne s 70 internal Ballast Resistor S DX ertet trece ert aa EE AET NEIE I1 Power Output Stage eto tede nii neret nO Dani merit perrita eias ert ied T2 Currents S DX oiii Itt ni pe ir eed eoe Gne Live ibd ede eon etl E dde deena valde dude dey 72 pex App IS Operating Frequency SD2X esce rite Der tert Ree ke EE tende ep cie ete ERR RA 73 Shutdown Temperatures 9 D2X cece dacs nertur rt asap sun ipeo dese tencenad Seep cect fdas Nanai 74 Choke SD2X 74 MUR ernennen RE EEEN 75 Motor
104. 65 When you edit an online project all parameter sets should be initialized in the project If this is not the case the message Uninitialized parameter sets appears Click OK to confirm the message Thus all parameter sets are read from the devices Afterwards the project wizard will open gt At first select a device or a parameter set in the project tree and then switch to the tab page Parameters or Diagnosis You can always edit only one parameter set drivemaster2 User Manual 55 56 Device Overview ty ES The selection made in the Device overview affects the program behavior of the software drivemaster2 That means The selected device influences the contents of the tab pages Parameters and Diagnosis as well as the menu item Extras The following parameter descriptions are ordered by device type drivemaster2 User Manual 9 Parameters of a PS2 Parameters of a PS2 The power supply unit PS2 is always supplied without a valid parameter set error E08 Before initial operation you must set the following power supply parameters via the software drivemaster2 and write the parameter set into the device All parameters of the power supply unit PS2 are combined in parameter groups and displayed on the page Setup T SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 V1 8 Build 60 29 01 2010 Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level User E COB e Sl ie DMI LE eg Device overview 5 Par
105. 8192 Zero Point 0 Resolvable Revolutions 4096 ENDAT State Ready EnDat SIEB amp MEYER Data EnDat Alarms and Errors Data ID Data Version E F5 delete data rre get data E F7 save data Host localhost Port 0x3600 Pow 0 DrviOA Onlne Fig 118 hiper endat tool Click the button F6 detect data for this purpose During data detection current is applied to the motor for a short time in order to determine the commutation offset Before current is applied to the motor a dialog window is displayed to warn you When the data detection was successful the detected data must be applied to the permanent memory of the encoder Click the button F7 save data for this purpose drivemaster2 User Manual 247 Tools 13 3 13 13 3 1 248 INI 4 The encoder now switches to the operating mode Ready and can be used by the drive converter setup tool The program converter setup too allows initial operation of a frequency converter FC2 without addressing it by a control system Via this page some functions can be tested All values set in the converter setup foo are cleared in the device as soon as the logic voltage is switched off om When you position the drive via setup tool keep in mind that the drive receives its commands from the PC now That means in case of an unex pected malfunction of the setup software a movement started by the PC can not be stopped anymore File Mod
106. AEE d epa 175 Current Controller SD2X HSPAM VF reiissi ein tide t tad e ende p ele de ai AT V f Characteristic Curve SD2xHSPAM VF eese eene menn 179 Speed Controller SD2x HSPAM VF eene nene tenente Rae urine ne nein ta 180 Compensation SD2ZXHSPAM ME trae nre ner dnx bre epa axo nrtnid rta rege 181 Winding Detection SD2x HSPAM J VF ierit tni ttt cniinne 182 Parameters of an FC2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 185 Configuration NNI EE T TED 185 DIT E 186 Drive Selection FOZ aitunen iesta see cadet ov vin capa disiencceiantavien Ai ET NENE EEEa RANEREN 186 Drive Function FC2 e 187 Ident fication F G2 iier aa ace E A E T Torre E reer rrr ee 187 Parameter SeE EG2 hitia a ati dida E TAA EEN SE r emu es 187 lai isse EE 188 Ife 188 Power 62 atop nte e erue ELI UI 189 Internal Ballast Resistor F2 isasi 1 2 tont tn trottoir tura turre h nr nter sinine 189 Power Output Stage sssssssssssssssssssseee eene rremrnne nnne 190 Gurrents FO2 5o cee ses sec sie tek etre ees cant plats ch op bap bean tussi D ISI aes 190 peg qiie 191 Shutdown Temperatures FC2 ei eerte citantur hte pe oe ette eR ded e Rr vade tes 191 GOK et G2 E T A E bianteveeslcs ov deeder eoveneees 192 Drive Control PETROL aaa a a A Na aira 192 Operating Mode of the Drive FC2 serasi gie eene epen
107. Analog outputs adil Digital signals x Motor configuration 1 Aj Motor configuration 2 o Inverter o Inverter o O Analog OutO Speed actual value Y Output signal 0 000 10 000 V 0 000 100 000 Hz x29 6 Filter time Scaling 0 0 ms 10 000 y 100 000 Hz 1 Analog offset o 0 000 y x29 5 Analog Out 1 Power output stage temperature v Output signal 0 000 10 000 V 0 0 100 0 C X29 7 Filter time Scaling 0 0 ins 10 000 y 100 0 Analog offset 0 000 y x29 5 Fig 84 Parameter page Analog outputs The function to be parameterized is selected by the list box at the top The parameters below the list box you can configure for each output accordingly Analog Out FC2 Function The parameter indicates the function of the analog output The following target reference and actual values can be selected No function Target speed Speed actual value Slip Current actual value Motor load v Ww NW NW Y vV NON vV Vv y Load Inverter Speed reference value Power output stage temperature Power output stage load Power output stage voltage The parameter inverts the analog output when the check box is activated Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is set to 0 ms the low pass filter is
108. Current Reference Filter SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM eee nn 154 Current Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM ssseseeeeeee emnes 156 Startup SD2x HSBLEOGOK FEBAM i noa ats nata tera tnt cn sna eeu e cpu cra nna ERE erba Rex a Erg 157 Winding Detection SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM sse 158 Controller Parameters for HSPWM Operation seseeseeeeeeeennee 159 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPWM rine rn tn nece prt inris 159 Variable Ramps SD2x HSPWM ccrte ine ttn ie rn p e eh Ir eee be e Pe dn 163 Speed Controller SD2x AS PWM esis ieiunia teeth oe evene iere ER PEE E ERE Y o SER ENEUNER PORE P ER vias 164 Current Controller SD2x HSPWM sssseeeneeneeen nene nnne nennen nnns 166 Flux Controller SD2x HSPWNM 14 rir ttt net davies Snare eer uae phn exper ener coerente 167 Flux Reference Value SD2x HSPWM icti ettet tere tede d ddnde 168 Compensation SD2xXHS PWM t eie tes ester pr tern at Fer erger terea a meas RD er teas 169 Vibration Absorption SD2x HSPWM seseeeeenn nene 169 Winding Detection SD2X HSPMIM s ccc pact denne riter tpe caper nive pae ener nce rna rue cba 170 Controller Parameters for HSPAM VF Operation cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeaes 171 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPAM VF sssseeeneem emen 172 Variable Ramps SD2x HSPAM J VE sts icze coosteseera trece necne pret aE ine cbe E
109. Current Reference Filter SD2x SERVO VECTOR sseeeen emere 130 Current Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR orit pare rhe eren tener e gan erani 131 Speed Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR sirsenis ene dee herba dne oe 132 Position Controller SD2x SERVO VEG TOR ieri ie tr erret tec A 133 Winding Detection SD2x SERVO VECTOR ssssseseeeeee rennen nen 135 Controller Parameters for SVC Operation cccccceeceeeeeeseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 136 Speed Reference Values SD2x SVO iiie terere terere stack sta er den e d E PER dante ud 4137 Variable Ramps SD2x SVG ct iiic ament rb ep hanes pasts arees inse ei EE EEEa 140 Speed Controller SD2X SV vesica irrena Darn neve cuu thea Ep Reb 3T RES SERI E REY senses 141 Current Reference Filter SD2x SVO cerei edid d e eee inde edet dede ai 142 Current Controller SD2X SVO ieri otis eerte n Fares e eate cores eia RC re Dor ed EE edat 143 Startup SD2X SVG ide e OU UO fen oh Recte DO eu x Mr i Ferd utra Pep EE wee 144 Winding Detection SD2X SVC iiexecuse can sette eiut enr tor leder re php epe eue diu hea ndr ebur pag 146 Controller Parameters for HSBLOCK FPAM Operation ssssss 148 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM sseem mme 148 Variable Ramps SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM ssssseseeeeeeenn eene nennen 152 Speed Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM sssseee emen eene nennen 153
110. D2x gt Electronic gear The drive is controlled by the position control The reference value of the elec tronic gear can be set via the encoder 0 Drive control SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 4 4 The communication with the drive amplifier is divided into the groups configuration and control of the drive In the parameter group Control the control channel for the control of the drive is set For more information on the control of the drive refer to the document Drive System SD2 Device Control Control channel The parameter specifies the communication channel for the control of the drive The following entries can be set by a list box Digital inputs Serial interface RS485 USB SERVOLINK 4 only for devices of the series SD2 and SD2S CAN bus not for devices of the series SD2T DNC 8 Byte Telegram Start Stop keys only for devices of the series SD2T v Ww NW NW NN Setpoint channel The parameter indicates the channel to be used for sending reference values to the device The provided selection depends on the selected control channel The following entries can be set by a list box Control channel Digital inputs Serial inter SERVO CAN bus DNC 8 Byte face LINK 4 Telegram RS485 USB s 1 If you select the entry Internal setpoints the page Internal target values p 121 is provided additionally On this page you can set up to 16 target values 2 If you sele
111. D2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM E s This page provides the parameters for the reference current filter of the drive amplifier You can set up to 4 filters either as low pass filter or band stop filter drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Ef Device overview fy Parameters Ef POO HSBLOCK drive Reference current value filter 7 E f Configuration ic t Monitorings iv Analog signals E 2d Digital signals fl Encoder emulation Eid Controller Dr Speed controller Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4 k Ref current filter Ref Current va g irent conto Low pass 1 ord v Low pass 2 ord v No filter M Band stop filter v i Winding detection Frequency Frequency Frequency 12 Speed ref values 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 600 Hz E M Motor potentiometer Bandwidth Hz Fig 57 Parameter page Ref current filter Filter 1 4 The parameter specifies the type of the filter It is set by means of a list box The options No filter Low pass 1 order Low pass 2 order and Band stop filter are available Low pass 1 2 order A low pass is used to suppress noise in the reference current value This noise is created e g by noisy speed measurement By means of the low pass losses in the power output stage and in the motor can be reduced You can use a low pass 1 order or a low pass 2 order with Butterworth characteristic Set the desired filter
112. Doca Currently edited gt ni i P02 is3 arameter se eter P33 Doc Axis33 P Mg WM Poca Designation 036 21 40DC A Basic device Serial number 1 000 251 956 Parametersatz 3 lf Copy content 3 Delete id Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI E Fow 0 Drv 0A Online 10 10 1 2 Select Parameter Set Click on the drive in the tree type structure In the online mode the field Param eter set selection in the parameter group Parameter set is enabled In the offline mode this field is write protected Parametersatz Sh Add D 3 3 Parameter set selection Fixed selection EEPROM 1 O Digital inputs O Field bus 0 Apply Here you can define the way a parameter set of the device is selected Fixed selection EEPROM The number of the desired parameter set must be entered Digital inputs The desired parameter set is determined by the connection of the digital inputs drivemaster2 User Manual 63 Parameters of an SD2x FEE ES If you wish to select the different parameter sets via the digital inputs the control channel of all parameter sets must be set to Digital inputs see p 91 Pay attention that the digital inputs of all parameter sets of the device are parameterized identically for the parameter set selection Parameter set Bit x File bus The desired parameter set is selected via the
113. E t Monitorings M Analog signals cz ai Digital signals E Encoder emulation Gir Controller lc Speed ref values Ref val 1 Current ref val Amplification Kp 0 601 4 Ref current filter f Current controller Start up Integration time Tr 26 84 ms Filter time 5 000 ms Fig 56 Parameter page Speed controller Amplification Kp The parameter specifies the proportional amplification of the speed controller in dependance on the speed scaling and the peak current of the power output stage The reaction time of the speed control circuit is reduced when a high proportional amplifi cation is selected If the amplification value is set too high the speed control circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the speed controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the more accurate the speed control operates If the value is set too small the speed control circuit starts vibrating Filter time tacho filter The parameter indicates the filter time for the actual speed tachometer in millisec onds If the actual speed is noisy you can smooth it by means of the filter A typical filter time value is 1 ms You can increase the time constant if a more smooth actual speed is needed Current Reference Filter S
114. Electronic gear 126 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x Electronic Gear SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s Via this parameters you can set the control signals for the electronic gear Source of master measurement system The parameter defines the source of the control signals The following entries can be set by a list box gt Encoder 0 A Quad B gt Encoder 0 Pulse Direction gt Encoder 0 CW CCW Gear factor The parameter indicates the relation of motor pulses numerator and encoder pulses denominator Cut off frequency The measured speed of the master can be limited by a low pass filter The parameter is indicated in hertz Controller The node Controller provides different pages to set the parameter of the control systems The available pages depend on the used device and the drive function The following chapters are ordered by drive function 10 drivemaster2 User Manual 127 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 10 1 128 mi Controller Parameters for SERVO VECTOR Operation The page Controller displays a block diagram showing the functional principal of SERVO VECTOR operation Ef Device overview la Parameters zi m POO servo drive Controller 77 a Configuration Ramp generator E alg Monitorings Hy Analog signals al Digital signals iB Encoder emulation e Electronic gear
115. Enabled Fig 96 Diagnosis page Drive actual values for an FC2 Displayed actual values gt Ntarget Displays the set reference speed value in hertz revolutions per minute gt Nmax Displays the actual limitation of the reference speed value in hertz revolu tions per minute gt Nref Displays the actual reference speed value in hertz revolutions per minute Due to internal limiting functions this value may differ from the set reference speed Ntarget gt Umax Displays the maximum DC link voltage that is currently possible in vo fs This value depends on the amplitude of the mains voltage gt Uref Displays the actual reference voltage value in the DC link in volts gt UZW1 Displays the actual voltage in the first DC link DC link at the mains recti fier The voltage is indicated in vo fs gt UZW2 Displayes the current voltage in the second DC link DC link at the power stage The voltage is indicated in volts gt lact Displays the current reference voltage value in the second DC link The current is indicated in amperes gt Amp Temp Displays the current temperature of the power output stage in degree centigrade gt phase Displays the actual phase current in amperes In addition the page displays the status of the current limitation in the controller Status The status field displays the current state of the drive For this purpose the status word of the drive is analyzed If the
116. Errors and wamings Analog In 0 Speed reference value f Error memory Input voltage Ref value ES Position measurement system 25 Digital inputs 4 amp Digital outputs X18 3 HB Sine Cosine Display 4Z Delta Z Measurement gt BE ex Analog outputs 9 SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor 2 GE Object browser x RA 31000 mV v Version information Noise rejection om Filter time Analog offset Analog In 1 Current limiting Input voltage Ref value Filter time Noise rejection Analog offset Fig 105 D agnosis page Analog inputs The values Analog offset Filter time and Noise rejection are directly read out of the configured parameter values cS The drive can only operate according to the analog settings as shown in the figure when you have selected a suitable Operating mode p 90 e g Velocity mode 1 Input voltage The field displays the digitalized voltage at the analog input in vo fs Ref value The field displays the reference value resulting from the voltage at the analog input drivemaster2 User Manual 12 13 Diagnosis Analog offset The parameter serves for compensating a possibly existing analog offset The offset is entered in millivolts Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is
117. Found devices Online project g SD2 0 036 21 40DC g Drv OA 036 21 40DC Searching The found devices will be applied to the user interface by mouse click on the button Apply All selected drives are combined to form the online project ES All data required for the operation are summarized in a data structure the parameter set Initial operation of a device is only possible with a complete and correct parameter set 7 2 Creating a Parameter Set of a Drive A parameter set can be created manually or with the aid of a wizard Such a wizard is provided for each drive that can be parameterized with the software drivemaster2 In the following example an SD2 with the drive function SERVO VECTOR is parame terized via the wizard For parameterization and initial operation of an SD2S the following quick start guides are available depending on the required drive function FPAM operation SD2S Setup Instructions HSBLOCK FPAM Operation HSPWM opera SD2S Setup Instructions HSPWM Converter tion SVC operation SD2S Setup Instructions Sensorless Vector Control SVC V f operation SD2S Setup Instructions V f Operation 46 drivemaster2 User Manual First St m irst Steps 7 2 1 Selecting a drive Open the tab page Device overview and select the drive you want create a parameter for In the figure the axis A of a drive amplifier SD2 is selected H Eg Device overview 8 PS2 0 036
118. LOCK operation Either via Hall sensors or via TTL encoder Usually commutation and speed control are generated at the motor via Hall sensors Commutation via Hall sensors is advantageous because there is always an absolute commutation signal available Thus additional synchronization of the motor measuring system with the rotor is not necessary in contrast to using a TTL encoder for commu tation and tachometer However speed measurement via Hall sensors is restricted in drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x dynamics and accuracy at low speeds This can be improved considerably by the use of a TTL encoder for speed measurement Hall ABC 12 V or 5 V RS422 The Hall sensors are activated to provide the commutation and the actual speed value The parameter Connection indicates devices connector of the measuring system Incremental encoder TTL The Hall sensors are activated only for the commutation The speed is measured via TTL encoder The parameter Connection indicates devices connector of the measu ring system Below that the Signal periods per revolution of the motor are set If you activate the check box the sensor signals are monitored Angle Controller SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM s During sensorless vector control an angle controller is used to adapt the commutation Max angle error The parameter indicates the maximum angle error in degrees A typical maximum angle
119. M of Okay X Cancel The list box provides all drive functions possible with the current device Select the desired function and confirm with the button Okay Identification SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM v v v v This parameter group provides fields to enter individual information on the drive ampli fier for later identification Drive name In this field user can enter an individual name for the drive The maximum length is 32 characters drivemaster2 User Manual 67 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 2 68 ra Comment In this field the user can enter further information regarding this drive The maximum length is 64 characters Parameter set SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 v This field displayes information on the parameter set currently used in the drive ampli fier Date Time The field displays date and time of the last modification of the parameter set The parameters are updated automatically when the parameter set is modified ID In this field you can enter the parameter set ID The ID can be selected as desired by the user and can be used for identifying the drive version via the object dictionary For this purpose the object DEVICE_PARAMETER_IDENT_CODE is used The param eter set ID is a 32 bit value divided into a 16 bit part before the decimal point and a 16 bit decimal part Power supply unit This page is only displayed fo
120. New project The project was created with the function Create a new project and has not been saved under a new name yet My project name The name of an already saved project is displayed gt Host Name or IP address of the PC running the communication server that is connected with the software drivemaster2 Here localhost gt Server Name of the set communication server Here S amp M USB Server gt Status of communication Device address and communication status of the selected device Communication address Pow Address of the power supply unit Drv Address of the drive Communication status Green display Online The software is communicating with a device Red display Offline Communicating with a device is not possible under the selected type of communication Background without special coloring offline A project is edited file based without device connection Menu Description Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level Admin Cen mee A Ve 2 mT drivemaster2 User Manual 5 3 1 5 3 2 Description of the User Interface The program menu provides all project operations a loader function for loading new system software or parameter sets into the hardware optional settings of the program and the access to setup tools parameter code and help Menu Project Execute project wizard Opens the project wizard The project wizard allows creating Project Edit Loader Set
121. PAM v SD2 SD2S 1 Drive function 2 parameter group is available for the drive function drivemaster2 User Manual 61 P ters of an SD2 arameters oT an X nmm 10 1 10 1 1 10 62 3 parameter group is only available with the indicated devices for the drive func tion 4 parameter group is not available for the drive function Multi Parameters The function multi parameters allows assigning several parameter sets to one drive The parameter sets are saved in the memory of the drive For information on saving and managing several parameter sets in one project refer to chapter 14 Working with Projects p 261 Create Several Parameter Sets for One Device Switch to the tab page Device overview and click on the desired drive The page Summary on the right side displays the parameter group Parameter set Ir SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 V1 8 Build 60 29 01 2010 Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level User amp CEB 2 de 8 Wa m PS NGETDRISTSOE ug Device overview Bs Parameters Ad Tere n iJ SD2 0 038621 zy PUD Doc Axis1 Drive Basic device Designation 036 21 40DC A 1 000 251 356 Serial number Parametersatz ab Add D 3 arameter set Parameter set selection p 9 Fixed selection EEPROM 0 O Digital inputs Ei appl O Field bus gue Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI Pow
122. Parameters I fm P00 HSPAM drive E Winding detection 7 B Configuration 18 Monitorings fe Analog signals Type of identification Identification by voltage jump v a Digital signals N Motor potentiometer Identification voltage 8 0 V Encoder emulation dr Controller Identification current 0 60 Arms 12 Speed ref values Dr Speed controller Time constant 3 5 ms Current controller VF Characteristic curve b Compensation Winding detection Fig 78 Parameter page Winding detection om At present only special firmware supports the functions winding detection The motor winding can be detected via voltage jumps For this purpose select the entry Identification by voltage jump in the list box Type of identification The parameters drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Identification current and Time constant describe the reaction of the motor winding to a voltage jump with Identification voltage Set these parameters accordingly drivemaster2 User Manual 183 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 184 drivemaster2 User Manual 11 Parameters of an FC2 Parameters of an FC2 All parameters of a frequency converter FC2 are available on the tab page Parame ters For the sake of clarity the parameters are arranged in pages These parameter pages are structured via nodes and branches as final nodes leafs in a tree structure T SIEB amp
123. Ref current filter Filter 1 4 The parameter specifies the type of the filter It is set by means of a list box The options No filter Low pass 1 order Low pass 2 order and Band stop filter are available drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Low pass 1 2 order A low pass is used to suppress noise in the reference current value This noise is created e g by noisy speed measurement By means of the low pass losses in the power output stage and in the motor can be reduced You can use a low pass 1 order or a low pass 2 order with Butterworth characteristic Set the desired filter and enter the 3 dB cut off frequency of the filter The unit is hertz CS Please consider that a low pass in the reference current value reduces the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integration time Band stop filter A band stop filter is used to suppress resonance frequencies caused by the mechan ical construction of the driven machine Enter the center frequency of the band stop filter The bandwidth is set automatically The unit is hertz om Please consider that a band stop filter in the reference current value can reduce the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integr
124. SIEB amp MEYER drivemaster2 User Manual Project Edt Loader Settings Extras Help User Level User S Ss POM s SIEB amp MEYER Um i Uoc ii m Parameters 2 Diagnose Q k Drive Configuration deren Drive selection By Analog signals d Digtal signals nang Deedespeto 036 21 12EF A Voltage dass 481 Vac 680 Vdc Max rated current 10 00 A 7 07 Arms Peak current 40 00 A 28 28 Arms 2 000 5 Tie Ven Cariaion Heb EG HHEEE ELA T 502 gt Drive functon SERVO VECTOR CHF Velcon in eem our voa eee Drive function SERVO VECTOR 4 SIEB amp MEYER AG drive setup tool V1 8 Build 60 1 29 10 Pow ODrv O A E iata Fe Loader Settings WE BY Parameter Set P00 Docas SIEBA MEYER m g State Operation Enabled Actual Drive Values Velocty Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Ref Current 2 04 Aeff Act Current 2 11 Aeff Motor Load Ref Velocty 159 92 rpm Act Velocty 159 92 rpm Amplifier Load Ref Postion Act Position Amplifier Temp 168 C J Y Function Velocity absolute values Max Curent 28 Af DemendVeoy 160 00 pm EN 1 90 Aaff Actual Velociy 159 92 rpm B F5 Drive Setup Active B ire Enable Operation gl F7 Start Bl c9 Eror reset
125. TC the parameter defines the maximum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet A thermal contact behaves like a PTC NTC For a resistor with a negative temperature coefficient NTC the parameter defines the minimum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet C KTY83 130 For an approximately linear resistance with positive temperature coefficient of the KTY series the parameter indicates the switch off temperature in C For the switch off temperature refer to the data sheet of the motor Typically the temperature is about 155 C 1 According to the program setting of the units see p 32 the parameters of a rotary synchronous motor are indicated as peak values or RMS values Motor Parameters for Linear Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v ES When using voice coil motors the units of the parameters are indicated as sinus peak values and not as RMS values When you select a voice coil 10 motor as motor type the software automatically switches the units A note will appear in a window Rated current A Ams Specifies the rated current of the motor during continuous operation S1 operation The parameter is independent from the
126. Temperature Monitoring FC2 205 Motor File FC2 199 Motor File SD2x 75 Motor Measurement System FC2 202 17 Motor Measurement System SD2x 82 Motor Parameters for Linear Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x 78 Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors FC2 200 Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors SD2x 79 Motor Parameters for Rotary Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x 76 Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Edge Controlled 120 Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Time Controlled 119 Motor Potentiometer Setup 118 Motor Type FC2 200 Motor Type SD2x 76 O Operating Frequency SD2x 73 Operating Mode of the Drive FC2 192 9 Operating Mode of the Drive SD2x 90 p Parameter Set FC2 187 Parameter set PS2 58 Parameter set SD2x 68 PDO 0 PDO 1 SD2x CAN Bus 95 PDO 0 PDO 1 SD2x DNC 97 Position Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR 133 Position Factor SD2x 100 Power FC2 189 Power PS2 57 Power SD2x 69 Power supply PS2 58 Pulse Generator FC2 202 Pulse Generator SD2x 85 R Resolver SD2x 86 S Shutdown Temperatures FC2 191 Shutdown Temperatures SD2x 74 Speed Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM 1 Speed Controller SD2x HSPAM VF 180 Speed Controller SD2x HSPWM 164 Speed Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR 132 99 drivemaster2 User Manual 297 Index Parameters Speed Controller SD2x SVC 141 Speed Reference Values FC2 208 Spe
127. WM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM v 146 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x On this page you can set the winding detection during magnetic alignment Ef Device overview fs Parameters A Diagnosis Elf Device Winding detection 77 fj Configuration f g Monitorings fh Analog signals Type of identification Identification by magnetic alignment SA ad Digital signals damit de deaan 5 Nj Motor potentiometer Identification current 3 00 Arms 8 Target values Pr Controller Check resistance switch off at 50 difference Dr Speed controller 4 Ref current filter Check inductance switch off at 50 difference Current controller d Start up Adapt resistance vj i Winding detection 12 Speed ref values Adapt inductance Encoder emulation Fig 52 Parameter page Winding detection Identification current This parameter indicates the current in amperes that is impressed during identification of the motor winding additionally to the alignment current You can combine the following four configuration options as you like If you activate several options checking the identified values always comes first The values are not used for adaptation until the check was finished successfully Check resistance switch off at 50 96 difference The resistance identified by the winding detection is compared to the resistance set in the drivemaster2 software If the
128. WM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 4 This parameter group contains values and settings for the DC intermediate circuit of the drive amplifier All values are DC values and indicated in volts Voltage The parameter indicates the characteristic intermediate circuit voltage The AC voltage is rectified to supply DC voltage to the intermediate circuit Therefore the characteristic intermediate circuit voltage corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage Possible values are set by means of a list box If the intermediate circuit voltage of the current device is not variable the parameter is a read only value Undervoltage The parameter specifies the lower limit of the DC link voltage The value is preset and a read only value When the voltage is below this limit the output stage is switched off and the error message E43 Undervoltage in DC link appears The limit may be reached when the load of the DC link is too high e g when the motor accelerates too fast or after a mains failure Overvoltage The parameter specifies the upper limit of the DC link voltage The parameter is a read only value When the voltage is above this limit the output stage is switched off and the error message E42 Overvoltage in DC link appears The limit can be reached when the motor is decelerated too rapidly or through heavy variations in the mains supply Operating Frequency SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM v v v 4
129. a ae iee iee Sreet enne 192 drivemaster2 User Manual 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 2 11 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 11 4 5 11 4 6 11 4 7 12 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 14 12 15 12 16 12 16 1 12 16 2 12 16 3 Content COMMON 62 oe simis M LSU Lp LM ELE 192 Behavior iCase Oi FOZ EOD 193 Analog Signals diene ssw serveste seas vecasectsseinssarteatedudnecdcwseiatennseecksaen ncaa 194 Analog Inputs emend saine eter eterna ba E eaa daa eae a ee alias eue Fete 194 Analog It dors geisha LII Piet UE MD SEI 195 Analog OUPS 5 hese m 196 Analog Out FP G2 D A 196 Digital Signals iiooacorenicm or rdi nU ERE orc vu End E MR AE DER QUE FRA UR 197 renes 197 Digital IT usce A EE ET ech anette E cuui ea tudes PU aae 198 BIenciE9mmcem TM 198 Digital Out F2 Lei e ettet aansien ada ES DATE mene ues socle cud d 198 Motor Configuration 1 2 eeseeeeeeeeeseeeeee eene nennen 198 Motor Parameters ccccccececcececeseeeeceeceseseececceaueeseseeeceaueeeeeeeeaueaeeeseeseaeseeeeeees 199 Motor File FC2 sss tette tette tet tette enn 199 Motor Type E G2 o tbe acer t ale en gatch oh eel AME cei Le ia 200 Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors FC2 esseeri 200 Motor Measurement SySEIQGl uico oreert tob redeant ed aeuxs est osed aseo Possto
130. a single parameter set can be edited Switching to the Online Mode The offline mode does not allow writing a single parameter set into a special device as well as reading a single parameter set from a special device The menu items in the drivemaster2 User Manual 37 Description of the User Interface 5 6 38 menu Loader are not available The purpose of this function is to prevent that a wrong parameter set is loaded by mistake into a correctly parameterized device The user must select one of the following items from the menu Loader or the respec tive symbol in the tool bar to switch from the offline to the online mode Write project to drives 1 Loads all parameter sets of the offline project into the devices For this purpose the software switches into the online mode and writes the parameter sets one after the other into the devices Therefore it is necessary that the structure of the offline project is identical to that of the connected devices Searching for connected devices ag Switches the software to the online mode and searches for all addressable devices The previously loaded offline project is deleted and replaced by the new online project Download New System Software Via the software drivemaster2 you can write new device firmware and logic software into the connected drive When you install the software drivemaster2 all firmware and logic files currently avail able for the different drives are
131. a tree type structure To select an object click on it Double click on an object in the list to add it to the Object This field displays a list of the current objects in the object browser By click you can select an object The respective properties of the selected object are displayed in the field Object information By double click you can remove an object from the list Object selection Click on this button to add the object currently selected in the Object Click on this button to remove the object currently selected in the Object Click on this button to remove all objects currently displayed in the Comment 9 Help 1 Object dictionary selection 2 Object selection Operating Elements gt gt Add directory to the list gt Remove selection from the list Remove all Object selection 3 Object information This field displayes information on the selected object These are the object name the object index the data type the unit and a comment with a short description drivemaster2 User Manual Dia FH iagnosis 12 20 Type Plate PS2 This page displays all necessary version information on the hardware In addition the set parameters are displayed below EB Device overview fs Parameters az Diagnosis m POO Power Supply Power type plate 2 39i Actual values ae Inputs Outputs Power supply GE Object browser t3 ip Hardware version ma A 01 09 2004 User version Serial
132. able is displayed In this case you can exit the dialog via the button Close What s new Opens the changelog for the new software version Click the button Download to save the new software version on your PC Moving the mouse pointer over the button Download shows a tooltip with the target directory After the download the button Install is active Close all other program parts of the arivemaster2 software packages at first Then click Install 4 The new software version is installed on your PC now Follow the steps in the installation wizard until the install process is finished drivemaster2 User Manual 39 Description of the User Interface 40 drivemaster2 User Manual o s 6 1 Password Protection and User Rights Password Protection and User Rights Via password protection the OEM machine manufacturer can define passwords for different user groups and assign corresponding access rights Thus certain parameters and functions e g Write parameters to drive can be protected against unwanted access ES Currently password protection is not supported for devices of the series PS2 and FC2 These devices appear in the user level User in the menu bar The passwords are organized together with the parameter set of the device They are deposited in the data block in coded form Thus they are known by the device and the software drivemaster2 Via the page User Level Rights on the tab page Parameters
133. able the motor is kept in position by a mechanical motor brake gt Shutdown The motor is decelerated The motor is decelerated by the standard deceleration ramp whereas the deceler ation is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation As soon as the state Speed zero is reached the output stage is switched off Then the control of the drive is off If applicable it is kept in its position by means of a mechanical brake gt Shutdown Quick stop ramp The motor is decelerated by the quick stop ramp whereas the deceleration is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation As soon as the state Speed zero is reached the output stage is switched off Then the control of the drive is off If applicable it is kept in its position by means of a mechanical brake gt Stop The motor is decelerated 92 drivemaster2 User Manual 10 2 7 10 2 7 1 Parameters of an SD2x The motor is decelerated by the standard deceleration ramp whereas the deceler ation is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation Then the drive is kept in its position while the control is active All controllers remain active and the mechanical brake remains deactivated Stop Quick stop ramp The motor is decelerated by the quick stop ramp whereas the deceleration is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limitation Then the dri
134. act value Disabled Byte 4 5 Drive error Byte 6 7 Current act value drivemaster2 User Manual 95 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 7 2 96 Receive PDO The Receive PDO displays the received data The data can not be changed The Receive PDO is always active and does not need to be parameterized Transmit PDO The Transmit PDO displays the transmitted data Here you can set when and in which form the data are sent The following settings are available Disabled No data are sent Send cyclic The drive sends the adjacent data cyclically whereas the time interval can be set The interval is set via the additional parameter Cycle time in m iseconds At receive of RPDO 0 The drive sends the adjacent data when requested by a Receive PDO from the master At change of a marked value Via activating the check boxes you define which values must change so that a transmit cycle is triggered Via the additional parameter Minimum cycle time you define the time in milliseconds in which the data will be sent This setting prevents overloading the CAN bus due to frequently sending the PDO DNC 8 Byte Telegram When the drive communicates via DNC 8 Byte telegram it is able to receive and transmit data 8 byte telegrams via the serial interface Thus it is possible to operate the drive in the Profibus e g via Profibus gateway The page Bus system for the DNC 8 Byte telegram
135. ad Compensation Flux Control Settings Ref Flux Current Filter l 20 000 cJ ms Current Ref Filter 10 000 gt ms Motor Flux Delay Time 10 000 Y ms drivemaster2 User Manual 13 1 4 Tools Load compensation You can change the parameters of the load compensation online The new values are immediately active Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Max Flux Current 2 70 4 deff Min Flux Current 0 71 Aeff Start Threashold 0 00 Aeff Stop Threashold 6 37 Aeff Settings On this tab page you can set the heartbeat time of the drive If you set the parameter to zero the heartbeat monitoring is deactivated The default value for the heartbeat time is 1000 ms Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Heartbeat 1000 ms gt Heartbeat Monitoring By means of heartbeat monitoring the drive detects whether the tool arive setup too is still active or not When the drive does not receive heartbeat messages within the set heartbeat time from the arive setup too it stops with a quick stop and switches over to the corresponding error status This way damage can be avoided which might be caused when the motor moves and the communication between drive and drive setup foo is interrupted In this case the user has no access to the drive from the software anymore F
136. al signals Bg FN Motor configuration 1 Motor parameters Motor measurement system lj VF Characteristic curve Type of measurement system Field Plate 3 Wires B Messages Pulse generator 4t Holding function V Speed ref values Resolution Pulses Revolution Ke Compensation i 2 saat Eby Motor configuration 2 Speed monitoring with sensor signals J Motor parameters Motor measurement system Z VF Characteristic curve B Messages 42 Holding function lc Speed ref values be Compensation Error E31 Speed error slip Shutdown threshold constantinHz v E31 Shutdown threshold 10000 Hz E31 Window time 10 ms Fig 88 Parameter page Motor measurement system Motor Measurement System FC2 In this parameter group you select the motor measuring system to be used with the frequency converter and the speed scaling Type of measurement system The parameter specifies which measuring system will be used This is set via a list box Depending on the selected measuring system additional parameter group with additional parameters may be displayed The following table indicates the supported measuring systems and the parameter groups that appear additionally Measuring system Additional parameter group Sensorless gt None gt Pul t 202 Field plate 3 wires pulse generator 0 05 V 5 00 V Error E31 Spesd error slip p 203 Tab 2 Measuring system
137. alue zero is triggered M10 Reference value reached window The parameter indicates the frequency speed at which the Reference value reached window is reached As soon as the value entered here is reached the message Reference value reached is triggered Ref value reached at Speed zero If the check box is activated the message Reference value reached is triggered when Speed zero is reached Message Temperature Monitoring FC2 Via this parameter group the temperature sensor of the motor is configured Type of temperature monitoring The parameter specifies which type of temperature monitoring is used in the motor The parameter is set via a list box Depending on the selected type of temperature monitoring the parameter Limit of temperature monitoring appears Limit of temperature monitoring Depending on the type of temperature monitoring the parameter has the following meanings gt PTC thermal contact For a resistor with a positive temperature coefficient PTC the parameter defines the maximum admissible value of the resistor in ohms before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet A thermal contact behaves like a PTC gt NTC For a resistor with a negative temperature coefficient NTC the parameter defines the minimum admissible value of the resistor in ohms before the output stage is drivemaster2 User Manual 205
138. ameters P Diagnosis 2 ooo OO omm 2 Power Parameterset Device ID 362190F A Creation date 17 03 2006 SIEB amp MEYER Device name User version 0 01 Power supply Ballast resistor Mains phase Donee Voltage Value of resistance Power frequency Off time Time for max Power DC link capacity Switching off temperature Heat sink External Environment Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI 1 Power supply unit The root of the tree is the power supply unit selected in the Device overview 2 Parameter page All configurations of the power supply unit PS2 are made on the parameter page Setup Power PS2 This parameter group provides for general information of the current power supply unit Device ID Indicates the general designation type of the used drive electronics If the user inter face is not updated and thus can not recognize the drive question marks are displayed instead of the drive designation Device name The user can enter an individual name for the power supply unit in this field The maximum length of the name is 15 characters drivemaster2 User Manual 57 Parameters of a PS2 58 INI Parameter set PS2 This parameter group displays general information on the parameter set that is currently used in the power supply unit Creation date This field displays date and time of the last modification of the parameter
139. ameters are also used for the t calculator of the ballast resistor If too much power is converted in the ballast the I t calculator triggers the error E04 Ballast circuit load Chopper Pt and switches the device off Resistance The parameter indicates the nominal resistance of the resistor in ohms Rated power The parameter indicates the rated power of the resistor in waits Peak power 10 The parameter indicates the maximum possible power of the resistor in wafts Time for peak power The parameter indicates the maximum period of time in seconds in which the peak power can be supplied continuously drivemaster2 User Manual 71 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 3 72 FINI Power Output Stage On this page the parameters of the power output stage of a drive amplifier are config ured Eff Device overview fs Parameters S fa P00 drive Power output stage 9 m B g Configuration pr f Dive Currents DC link 13 Power supply peg over output stage Rated current 14 00 A Voltage 310 0 v gt vdc Motor S Motor measurement systel Maxratedcument MA A Undervoltage 40 0 vdc Sa Drive control MEN level ignes Peak current 40 00 2 000 A s Overvoltage 410 0 Vdc E gt Monitorings Q Analog signals m ag Digital signals Encoder emulation Operating frequen Shutdown temperatures Pp g frequency pel Dr Controller Nf Motor potentiometer Max heat sink temperature C Power output stage op frequency 16
140. amps already Thus the speed must have reached a constant reference value for suitable control Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the speed controller The parameter is without unit Example When the slip is 100 rpm and the amplification is 1 0 the reference value is increased by 100 rpm via the proportional component Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the speed controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds Typical values of the integral time constant are in the range of the filter time constant of the speed controller If the integral time constant value is too small especially for slow measuring system e g field plate the speed control circuit starts vibrating Filter time The parameter indicates the filter time for the correcting variable of the speed controller in milli seconds Take care that the value is in the range of the data transfer rate of the measuring system For less dynamic measuring systems field plate pulse generator or Hall sensor the filter time is usually approx 256 ms drivemaster2 User Manual 165 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 166 INI Current Controller SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s E On this page you can set the parameters of the current controller for a HSPWM converter These are the curr
141. are package setup tools Oscar and SDx Data logger Why is it possible for me to write parameters to the drive although am a user with restricted rights User Level and this function is protected by password The rights management takes only effect when the firmware of the drive supports this function If the firmware does not have the necessary objects for this function the rights management is ignored by the software When select the operating mode Electronic gear the corresponding node in the menu tree is not displayed There are many menu items that depend on several other settings in the user inter face The electronic gear mode depends on the settings on the page Configuration Units Here you must select the unit Counts for the parameter Internal position controller resolution Then the page Electronic gear is displayed on the tab page Parameters Why is the motor driving so irregular when I use the reversing function drive sefup tool The reversing operation is mapped to individual sequences in the PC These sequences communicate separately with the drive Due to the varying load of the PC the sequences can differ widely in time drivemaster2 User Manual 293 16 B Appendix B FAQ di mi When I use the operating terminal 0362150 or 0362153 with drives of the series SD2S the motor can not be started via the operating terminal 16 B The following conditions must be met for proper functionin
142. at is to be displayed on the corre sponding channel Depending on the connected device and set drive function there are different parameters available for the record Display On the right side of each selection box the curve value at the current cursor position is displayed The display color is the same as the curve color in the graphic window Cursor The current position and the time of the cursor concerning the currently selected channel is displayed in this window The channel can be selected by mouse click on the buttons CH1 to CH4 in the section Curves oo EENENEM ine TT Position The parameter indicates the coordinate of the cursor on the value axis y axis in the unit of the selected channel Time The parameter indicates the coordinate of the cursor on the time axis in milliseconds or seconds drivemaster2 User Manual Tools FEI 13 4 4 Trigger Parameter All settings in this section always refer to the first curve channel 0 Time 32 ms v Trigger condition CH1 Auto Trigger Threshold 0 0 A Trigger position Time The parameter indicates the recording time of the graphic Value and unit are set by means of list boxes Trigger condition The parameter indicates the condition for starting a record The following conditions can be selected gt Auto Trigger The recording is initiated immediately gt Edge The recording is initiated when a positive edge occurs gt
143. ate of the Service Channel Read Object Fig 110 Diagnosis page SERVOLINK 4 monitor reference values By means of the displayed information the SERVOLINK 4 reference values can be analyzed In the top section of the page the complete content of the receive buffer is displayed byte by byte in the hexadecimal format Below you find the reference values On the left side the drive control word is indicated and on the right side the actual reference values are displayed Besides the content of the service channel and the service control word are indicated The contents of the service channel and the service control word are displayed in the combined status display State of the service channel in the bottom section 12 drivemaster2 User Manual 229 12 Diagnosis 12 16 3 12 17 230 a IN Actual Values The tab page Actual values allows analyzing the content of the drive s send buffer kg Device overview fb Parameters A Diagnosis mm POO J ger_KS 2_10 80 SERVOLINK 4 monitor Q Dri tual val z ue bcati Configuration Reference values Actual values dl Errors and wamings e Error memory Send buffer Actual values Position measurement system 95 Digital inputs Bse o 2 s 4 s e z e s po n wm is fis hs 9 Digital outputs Value 0x50 0x76 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 OxOO 0x01 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 eae 27 a Velocity Mode 1 Actual Values E Analog in
144. ating an Online Project icinccs Genie rire saan pereant ebay den vas Eid arcu sb Ege 45 Creating a Parameter Set of a Drive ccccccccssssssseceeeeeeeesssssseeeeeeeeeeess 46 Selecting a drive M 47 Creating a parameter Set ecanet iiec nece xue encexined encase RN Ene da REN Race eR acad RR Ya 47 Download of Parameter Set cccccccccecseseecceeceeceeececeeaeeaseeceeeeaueeeseaseesaaeneeseneeaees 51 Positioning via Setup Tool cuxsnsicidissciios usce xeu E eL po Pad qu eR tueur DAD Hn asd 52 Analyzing a Drive via the Diagnosis Pages 54 Device Overview eeeeeeennrnenneemnennnnenn nnns 55 Parameters of a PS2 eseeseeeeeeenenn eene 57 xo iram ne anions 57 Parameter Set PS2 norisor a e E red dn sabe A E TERR E ANa 58 PowerSupply DP92 a needed N oped fan AA e n eeateeee 58 Ballast Resistor P 92 5 nete etit ceti eben resin tuse atop RANEE ner eura EEEE 59 pedi quendi 59 Switchitig off Temperature PS2 2 eite ne dane ches ene cop peter epa rece vena epus Eres Gees dees 59 Parameters OF dn 9 DX oscar adigi oo Ebo 61 M ll ParammelelS iouis Re UcIREFAPAS snapsin a RE Uc fS EOM FEATUC BON EA ENa 62 Create Several Parameter Sets for One Device ssesssssssssess 62 Select Parameter SOU 2 uarie ertet caueassen edutekun tds dtekkae eu agen qeacu ba pH RUF Rar MU
145. ation rotation Skip velocity 2 NMin Mode Max Quick stop ramp i Winding detection ctw v 0 00 RPM N Ref 0 X 6000 ms Skip range 2 Ramps based on 3 velo 0 00 RPM velocity scaling Variable ramps Type 2 4 D 10 Fig 72 Parameter page Speed ref values Direction of rotation The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt counterclockwise rotation CCW ES The direction of rotation set in the software should match the actual rotation direction of the motor If this is not the case two motor phases must be exchanged Direction lock If only one direction of the motor is permitted you can lock the other direction via this parameter The following settings are available gt None Both positive and negative speed values are passed to the motor gt Positive Positive speed values are not passed to the motor gt Negative Negative speed values are not passed to the motor 172 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Skip bandwidth By means of a skip bandwidth you can prevent that definite speeds are driven for a long time These speeds might be e g resonances of a machine Example gt Skip velocity 50000 rpm gt Skip range 10000 rpm gt max admissible speed below skip speed 40000 rpm gt min admissible speed above skip speed 60000 rpm Speed reference values w
146. ation time Current Controller SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM v m On this page you can set the parameters of the current controller for SVC operation These are the current limitation the holding current and the bandwidths 10 E Device overview fs Parameters B m PU SVC drive a Current controller Q G i Configuration E E Monitorings Eih Analog signals g ai Digital signals gm Encoder emulation Pr Controller lc Speed ref values Dr Speed controller Bandwidth current ctrl Limitation 10 00 Arms 1500 Hz 4 Ref current filter Current controller Holding function Bandwidth observer S Startup Holding current x 2000 Hz Holding current 1 00 Arms Actual current value Fig 50 Parameter page Current controller drivemaster2 User Manual 143 10 Parameters of an SD2x 144 ra Limitation The parameter indicates the limitation in the current controller for the reference value of the current The reference current and its limitation are indicated as peak value in ampere The maximum value of the Limitation are the peak currents of the motor and the power output stage Holding Function The parameter indicates whether a holding current is used The holding current is active when the controller is switched on and no reference value is set The holding current shall keep the motor in position at standstill The desired curre
147. aximum current of the power output stage as peak value as well as the corresponding RMS value in ampere The time period defined behind the effective value specifies the max time I t time the peak current is allowed to flow The load is monitored by an t calculator When the device is overloaded the l t calcu lator triggers the error E30 Power output stage load too high I t and switches the output stage off Drive Function FC2 In this field the drive function of the frequency converter is selected Drive function type The parameter indicates the selected drive function At present only the drive function HSPAM is available for FC2 Identification FC2 This parameter group provides fields to enter individual information on the frequency converter for later identification Drive name In this field user can enter an individual name for the drive The maximum length is 32 characters Comment In this field the user can enter further information regarding this drive The maximum length is 64 characters Parameter Set FC2 This field displayes information on the parameter set currently used in the frequency converter drivemaster2 User Manual 187 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 FEE 11 1 2 188 Date Time The field displays date and time of the last modification of the parameter set The parameters are updated automatically when the parameter set is modified ID In this field you can enter the parame
148. be reduced using the motor potentiometer The default value is determined by means of the set motor parameters gt Start value Indicates the speed value in revolutions per minute to which the MOP value is reset after a reset command With this reference value operation is started again The default value is zero gt Step size Indicates the speed value in revolutions per minute by which the speed is increased or reduced per edge 1 x push Ref value RPM Maximum value 1320 Start value 0 Minimum value 1320 1 MOP down 0 MOP up 10 7 Target Values The node Target values is only displayed when the following settings are made for the drive control see Drive control SD2x p 91 gt Control channel Digital inputs or Serial interface RS485 USB gt Setpoint channel Internal setpoints drivemaster2 User Manual 121 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 122 ri On the page Internal target values you can enter up to 16 reference values These reference value are saved in the memory of the drive and can be selected via the digital inputs s z 5 8 7 z EF Device overview 2 Parameters P Diagnosis m P00 Doc Axis 3 Internal target values 77 Configuration Jf Monitorings hy Analog signals ai Digital signals ETE G Target values Encoder emulation Dr Controller Internal target values Target value 0 100 000 Target
149. calculated until a definite minimum output voltage or speed is reached For this reason the motor must be accel erated to a minimum speed via open loop control at first Then it can be controlled by SVC The same applies for the braking process The motor is decelerated speed controlled as long as the commutation can be calculated In consequence there are two motor driving ranges Open loop range and Speed controlled range drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x The page Start up provides parameters to set the behavior of the drive in the open loop range Eff Device overview fla Parameters a f POO SVC drive 1 Start up e l Configuration H E Monitorings E p Analog signals DUE adi Digital signals Speed controlled range G Encoder emulation Er Controller lc Speed ref values Dr Speed controller Act Ref current filter ff Current controller EE Start up current 2 50 Arms f Holding current 1 00 Arms Breaking current 2 00 Arms Start threshold 1000 000 RPM Fig 51 Parameter page Start up Startup current The parameter indicates a constant current in amperes that is impressed on startup The starting current must be greater than the acceleration current of the drive at least 120 9 Start threshold The parameter indicates the speed in revo utions per minute at which the commutation is to be calculated and the control circuits are activated The value
150. ce ooo Sib 1 3 Drive actual values dl Errors and wamings No object selected Error memor 3 Position v MR systems E Ez B E V Show tooltips Uu Digital inputs Object name Value Unit Digital outputs POWER SUPPLY CHOPPER LOAD MAX 100 0 HF Sine Cosine Display POWER SUPPLY STATUS WORD 8 HE Deka Measurement POWER STAGE DC LINK VOLTAGE MAX 410 0 23 Analog inputs 4e Analog outputs 9 SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor POWER STAGE SWITCHING FREQUENCY 8000 MOTOR LOAD MAX 100 0 ite Object browser v Version information Fig 114 D agnosis page Object browser To get a clear overview the user can make an individual list of objects and organize them in files file extension Ose All objects shown in the object display are read out permanently and their values contents are displayed Reading out the objects is only terminated when the object browser is closed DANGER Use of object browser Manipulating certain objects can cause uncontrolled movements and may destroy the drive Never use the object browser without having consulted SIEB amp MEYER AG Show tooltips When the check box is activated the tooltip for each individual object is displayed The tooltip for an object appears when the mouse pointer is located on this object in the object display Buttons Load object file The button opens an already existing object list and displays the listed objects in
151. certain time Its only purpose is to decelerate the motor securely to standstill The desired holding time is indicated in seconds NOTICE Holding voltage too high If you set the value for the holding voltage too high the current flow in the motor will be too high and possibly causes device damage One of the following error messages appears gt E45 Short circuit in power output stage gt E29 Motor load too high Motor Pt gt E30 Power output stage load too high I t If you are not sure of the holding voltage value suitable for your motor use the function Holding current Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the holding current controller in volts per ampere The reaction time of the holding current control circuit is reduced if a high proportional gain is selected If the gain value is set too high the holding current circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the holding current controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The parameter is indicated in milliseconds The smaller the time constant the smaller the residual control deviation of the holding current control If the value is set too small the holding current circuit starts vibrating drivemaster2 User Manual 207 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 4 6 208 i Speed Reference Values On the page Speed ref values you
152. ching system softwares were found on your computer for the settings in the parameter set You can find more system softwares under http www sieb meyer de Valid firmware files f04001v03004 x36 Firmware 36 21 40 xx Servo Hardwareversion 3x 3 004 21 02 2008 f04001v03007 x36 Firmware 36 21 40 xx Servo Endat 3x 3 007 09 09 2008 f04001v03008 x36 Firmware 36 21 40 xx Servo Endat 3x 3 008 29 05 2009 v E Select another firmware L Show software catalog eg Do download X Cancel download drivemaster2 User Manual 51 i First Steps Ta The table lists all firmware and logic files that are available in the installation path of the software arivemaster2 for the current drive configuration Select the desired system software For assistance you can click the button Show software catalog to open a PDF file indicating the suitable logic and firmware needed for a particular drive function Click on the button Select another firmware to open the directory SM Sys in the installation path of the software drivemaster2 Here you find all firmware and logic files that were supplied with the software installation Click the button Do download to write the selected system software to the drive After the download of the system software is finished the parameter set is auto matically downloaded to the drive 7 3 Positioning via Setup Tool In the following the drive setup too is described as an example for all setup
153. ciaeeeeree ererecnttresterce eres tere ce ep err remn etre eet A err etree nt A ren fee ert 103 Warnings Power Output Stage SD2X seen ener 103 Warnings Motor S D2X cc coetu eer rbe epe davies taie entertain ndr exin tpa eder Doai kakaii eee 104 W24 Warning threshold current SD2x esse eem nennen 104 W26 Warning threshold overload current SD2x ssem 107 Bifterent Warnings SD2X re rite EE Er se e apap P ERR AD Petr Renee ERES 108 qo MM Up 109 Error E31 Speed enon Slip SD2X n caeteri Ir tecti p eser cos rer TERRE EER 109 Error E38 Overspeed SD2X eben tbe o EE ptr cm HERO Rb x Ee n eEM Snake epe 110 Error E39 Tracking error S J2X a3 ccce ctocc uoc p eterne eap ao puso e uerb cene eUe pear AEE eaa gu ege guid 110 Error E44 Commutation lost SD2X ceu iet nier nde at nnn den amp Analog Signals Y nU O 112 Analog pus ayeee RE E E EA O EAE EE 112 Analog MI gk CEIDA S EEE EEEE cux IM M EE E E renee nt rd 113 Analog OUPUTS I 114 Analog Out SD2X 3 2 i rroro resa suchas se e Eee Er ea evo re EXE SE sanssvavansbasdvaceevs nese ECEUR ER sae N 114 Digital Signals 3 iier ke repa d di an dp re ra d RR RR XR RR ERR E ean 115 ence cct 116 Digital In SD2X ioco cit cic eire eve cone rin Che mari rer eases e Pa a cie SOR E SER e bee eens 116 BIS
154. converter setup tool Attention The command source is changed to converter setup tool Vice versa the following dialog warns the user when deactivating that the control is now turned over from the PC again drivemaster2 User Manual 251 Tools s converter setup tool Attention e converter setup tool is no longer the command source Controller Via this button the output stage of the frequency converter is activated or deactivated If the controller is deactivated while a motor is running the motor can not be controlled by the frequency converter anymore and coasts to standstill uncontrolled Start Via this button the frequency converter is started and the selected motors are acceler ated to the set speed Stop Via this button the selected motors are decelerated to speed zero Reset Via this button a previous error message can be reset 13 4 Oscar Up to four measured variables can be entered simultaneously and represented graphi cally with the Oscar Basically the surface of the Oscar can be divided into 7 sections EJ SIEB amp MEYER AG Oscar V1 12 76 14 01 2010 File View Communication Help Main menu Ay GRE AS BER EE E L Q BE 502 gt Drive function High Speed PWM Converter with tool bar cmi iv Ret gt ER 0000 Curve selection e T anp aa EENEENN 00006 Cursor display Ime ES zi Trigger menu Trigger condition CH1 Edge Threshold 4 3 fro A
155. copied into the directory SM_Sys in the installation path of the drivemaster2 software The system software is filed according by device type logic or firmware and function You find the latest system software in the download directory of the SIEB amp MEYER web page under www sieb meyer com Please use the guest login For assistance refer to the software catalog SystemsoftwareCatalog pdf which indicates the suit able logic and firmware needed for a particular drive function Save the desired firm ware and or logic file in the directory SM_Sys in the installation path of the software arivemaster2 ES Make sure that the device version of the device corresponds to the software version Otherwise an error message will be displayed when you load the software The appropriate device version is indicated in the software designation as follows gt Device version 7 000 gt Software f01001v07014 x36 Proceed as follows to write a new system software to the drive gt Select the menu item Loader Write system software to drive A dialog window for selecting the firmware or logic file is opened Navigate to the directory SM Sys in the installation path of the software drive master2 drivemaster2 User Manual Description of the User Interface Select the desired system software and click Open Then the new system soft ware is downloaded to the drive In the dialog Write system software you can watch the
156. cs of the frequency converter This parameter group is write protected Drive designation The parameter indicates the general designation type of the used drive electronics If the user interface is not updated and thus can not recognize the drive question marks are displayed instead of the drive designation The button Edit project opens the project wizard to change the device or the entire project see section 14 5 1 2 Edit Devices p 265 When you edit an online project all parameter sets should be initialized in the project If this is not the case the message Uninitialized parameter sets appears Click OK to confirm the message drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Thus all parameter sets are read from the devices Afterwards the project wizard will open Voltage range The parameter specifies the electric strength of the power electronics The parameter is related to the maximum admissible supply voltage AC voltage as effective value and to the corresponding voltage in the rectified intermediate circuit DC link voltage in volts Max rated current The parameter specifies the maximum rated current of the power output stage during S1 operation continuous operation as peak value as well as the corresponding RMS value in ampere The proper rated current is limited by this parameter Moreover it depends on other parameters as for example the cooling Peak current The Parameter specifies the m
157. ct the entry CAN bus or DNC 8 Byte Telegram the page Bus system p 93 is provided to set the respective parameters drivemaster2 User Manual 91 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x Behavior in Case of SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 Vv With the aid of this parameter group you can set the behavior of the drive amplifier in different situations The parameterization in this parameter group depends on the complete system mechanical elements working area into which the drive is installed You can set the following reactions for the indicated events Reaction Communication Controller off Quick stop Main voltage drop failure SERVO command command Soft LINK a Noacton action Shutdown E motor coasts to standstill Shutdown The motor is decelerated Shutdown Quick stop ramp Shutdown Quick stop ramp stop ramp Stop The motor is deceler ated Stop Quick stop ramp Stop Maximum current Stop Maximum current current Shutdown Brake with external ref value Short circuit motor phases active Short circuit motor phases s not active Description of the reactions gt No action The operation is continued without reaction to the fault gt Shutdown The motor coasts to standstill The power output stage is switched off immediately All control circuits are deacti vated The motor coasts to standstill without control If applic
158. ction to be parameterized is selected by the list box at the top below the list box you can configure for each input accordingly drivemaster2 User Manual The parameters Parameters of an FC2 Analog In FC2 Function The parameter indicates the function of the analog input The following entries can be selected gt Nofunction gt Velocity reference value Analog InO gt Load Analog In1 Analog offset The parameter serves for compensating a possibly existing analog offset The offset is entered in millivolts Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is set to 0 ms the low pass filter is deactivated Inverter The parameter inverts the analog input when the check box is activated Scaling The parameter defines the relation of voltage at the analog input to the reference value or limiting value Noise rejection The parameter specifies a hysteresis threshold for noise rejection in percent 1 96 corresponds to a voltage of 0 1 V at the analog input drivemaster2 User Manual 195 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 2 2 Analog Outputs On this page you can configure the outputs Analog Out 0 and Analog Out 1 E Device overview fo Parameters F Diagnosis a POO pam converter g Configuration hv Analog signals Analog inputs 43
159. d you ay start a new search via this menu item gt Quit Terminates the USB communication server Still existing connections to applications are interrupted Menu Options This menu allows adaptation of the communication server s behavior gt A Allow remote access This option must be set to allow the applications to access the communication server via network This option is deactivated for safety reasons default setting gt Use command toggle bit The so called toggle bit increases the transmission security Therefore this option should always be activated Menu Logfile The communication server always creates a log file which can be evaluated for diag nosis purposes This log file called S36UsbBusDriver log is created at the start of the bus server It is saved in the same path as the communication server The options in the log file menu allow influencing how many entries can be made in the log file CS Consider that some options may cause a large size of the log file The complete memory of your hard disk may be filled In addition the performance of the bus server is reduced hereby If you add some options for diagnosis purposes you should remove them later As default only the options Thread ID Timestamp and Init Exit are activated These options create a log file of only a few Kilobytes drivemaster2 User Manual 271 15 15 Communication 15 1 1 3 272 gt Thread ID The Thread ID
160. d and can be used for identifying the drive version via the object directory Firmware Indicates the identification code of the firmware Logic coding This field displayes the identification code of the logic coding BIOS Indicates the identification code of the BIOS gt Date Time Parameter Indicates date and time of the last modification of the parameter set Firmware Indicates date and time of the firmware creation Logic coding Indicates date and time when the logic coding was created BIOS Indicates date and time when the BIOS was created gt Comment Parameter Displayes a comment on the parameter set and thus on the complete drive This comment can be entered by the user as desired Firmware Displayes a comment that contains general information on the firm ware Logic coding Displayes a comment that contains general information on the logic coding BIOS Displayes a comment that contains general information on the BIOS Functions Via the button Export as HTML File the software generates a file with all information displayed on this page In case of service requests for example you can send this file to the support drivemaster2 User Manual 237 12 12 Diagnosis 238 drivemaster2 User Manual Tools 13 Tools For the initial operation of a drive the software provides additional tools for parameteri zation and diagnosis These tools can be started via the menu Extras The availabl
161. d on A i t Parameter set Bit 0 5 Parameter set 3 Parameter set 22 A t DES ENERO t The parameter set bits depend on the number of parameter sets saved in the drive Fig 16 Timing diagram for parameter set change via the digital inputs Configuration k The node Configuration provides the parameter pages Drive Power output stage Motor Motor measurement system Drive control and User level rights Depending on the device and certain settings the pages Power supply Bus system and Units are displayed additionally ER Device overview fs Parameters Fm POO Drive Axis if Drive 8 Power supply i Power output stage hm Motor S Motor measurement systei Sa Drive control User level rights t Monitorings fy Analog signals zi Digital signals Encoder emulation Dy Controller The individual pages display all data required for the general configuration of the drive system drivemaster2 User Manual 65 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 1 66 z FINI Drive This parameter page serves for general configuration of the drive amplifier and provides information on the current parameter set Ef Device overview fla Parameters A Diagnosis F POO servo drive M406F B g Configuration p Drive selection 77 Units a Drive designation 03621 12EF A S Motor measurement syste Voltage dass 481 Vac 680 Vdc Afia Drive contro
162. d thus the number of magnetic pole pairs in the rotor Do not confuse the number of pole pairs Zp with the number of poles P The following applies Zp 72 x P Moment of inertia kgm 1000 Defines the moment of inertia of the motor considering the measuring System and the brake The moments of inertia of couplings are not consid ered in this parameter Stator resistance Ohm Indicates the resistance of the stator winding The indicated value is the Phase Phase value measured over two phases Maximum voltage V Vems Specifies the maximum possible voltage of the motor The voltage is meas ured between two phases Power factor cos phi Indicates the relation of active power P to apparent power S of the motor cos Q P S Rotor time constant Indicates the relation of rotor inductance leakage inductance Lg and main field inductance Ly to rotor resistance Rr Lg Lu RR Ohm Indicates the resistance of the rotor Rotor leakage inductance mH Indicates the part of inductivity that is generated by magnetic leakage flux of the rotor Main field inductance mH Indicates the combined inductance of stator and rotor Stator leakage inductance mH Indicates the part of inductivity that is generated by magnetic leakage flux of the stator Magnetizing current Al Ams Indicates the maximum rotor related magnetizing current Number of parallel motors Indicates the number of parallel operated motors of the same type External ind
163. data recording function You can display individual measuring values in the recorded curves by pushing left hand mouse button The first value indicates the interval counter X axis and the second value displayes the measured value Y axis Click on the button Stop to stop the data recording function Via the menu Plot monitor Print record you can print the current records drivemaster2 User Manual p all 14 1 Working with Projects Working with Projects All parameters required for operating a drive are combined in one parameter set The software arivemaster2 allows managing several parameter sets at the same time by combining several drive amplifiers and power supply units in one project Eu simplify the work with several devices by the following functions A project can be saved in a project file The project file contains the used devices and the corresponding device addresses The device addresses are required for the communication In addition the parameter files of all device are stored in the project directory gt The parameter files of a project can be downloaded into the designated devices in a single pass gt Already saved projects can be read from the project file and the parameter sets are read from the corresponding parameter files gt The online mode allows creating a project automatically by searching for connected devices gt In the offline mode a project can be created by means of
164. deactivated 196 drivemaster2 User Manual 11 3 11 3 1 Parameters of an FC2 Scaling The parameter indicates the relation of voltage at the analog output to target reference or actual value Analog offset The parameter serves for setting an analog offset The offset is entered in vo ts Digital Signals The node Digital signals provides the pages Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Efl Device overview 5 Parameters x POO pam converter f Configuration B Analog signals K a Digital inputs 01 Diaital 4e Digital outputs 38 Motor configuration 1 X Motor configuration 2 On these pages you can configure the functions of the digital inputs and outputs Digital Inputs This page provides the parameters of all digital inputs of the drive EE Device overview D Parameters Diagnosis fh POO pam converter a Digital inputs Q x BW Configuration hv Analog signals ad Digital signals oro 02190 101EC A LIS s amp Digital outputs QY Motor configuration 1 Motor configuration 2 Switch on Start Stop 11 Eror reset Speed direction Configuration 1 2 No function Fig 85 Parameter page Digital inputs Each input can have the state 0 or 1 and can be parameterized individually drivemaster2 User Manual 197 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 3 2 11 4 198 INI Digital In FC2 D INO D IN5 Here
165. difference between the two values is more than 50 96 of the set value the drive amplifier is switched off due to the error E41 2 Wrong motor connected Check inductance switch off at 50 difference The inductance identified by the winding detection is compared to the inductance set in the drivemaster2 software If the difference between the two values is more than 50 96 of the set value the drive amplifier is switched off due to the error E41 2 Wrong motor connected Adapt resistance The resistance identified by the winding detection is included in the calculation of the sensorless measuring system This compensates differences between the set resist ance and the real resistance and thus improves the control performance Adapt inductance The inductance identified by the winding detection is included in the calculation of the sensorless measuring system This compensates differences between the set induc tance and the real inductance and thus improves the control performance drivemaster2 User Manual 147 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x ES The software does not use the identified values for all control parameters Therefore you still need to indicate the correct winding data during param eter setting The adaptation only improves the performance of the measuring system 10 10 3 Controller Parameters for HSBLOCK FPAM 148 Operation The page Controller displays a block diagram showing the functional principa
166. dition for the warning Over current The other parameters depend on the setting made here Currently three modes for the warning Over current are available Monitoring off In this operating mode the over current monitoring is switched off The other parame ters have no meaning I Motor gt Threshold Before the message is generated the message M10 reference value reached must have been signaled The warning W26 is generated when the motor current exceeds the indicated warning threshold in amperes The warning message is triggered for at least 200 ms By means of the parameter Filter time the current to be monitored can be filtered It is the time of one PT1 filter drivemaster2 User Manual 107 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 108 ral Shutdown at I Motor gt Threshold Before the message is generated the message M10 reference value reached must have been signaled As soon as the warning W26 is triggered after the threshold was exceeded the controller is switched off The motor is stopped by the quick stop ramp Then the error E05 Error caused by warning is triggered The warning message is triggered for at least 200 ms By means of the parameter Filter time the current to be monitored can be filtered It is the time of one PT1 filter Different Warnings SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v 4 4 4 Via this parameter group further warnings can be configured The according limi
167. e The Motor ID is a 32 bit value divided into a 16 bit part before the decimal point and a 16 bit decimal part Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors FC2 This parameter group comprises all physical parameters of the motor Rated current Arms Specifies the rated current of the motor during continuous operation S1 operation The parameter is independent from the rated current of the power output stage and is not limited by it The rated current is also used in the P t calculator of the motor By means of the button t a dialog to set a variable rated current is opened see below Peak current Arms Specifies the peak current of the motor The parameter is independent from the peak current of the power output stage The peak current is also used in the P t calculator of the motor 200 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Indicates the maximum time during which the peak current is allowed to flow once out of the cold state This parameter is also used for the l t calculator When the device is overloaded the l t calculator triggers the error message E29 Motor load too high Motor I t and switches frequency converter off Minimum speed Hz RPM Specifies the minimum speed of the motor The parameter is used when an analog reference values is preset If the reference values are smaller than the minimum speed the motor is accelerated automatically to the minimum speed Maximum speed Hz RPM Spec
168. e Variable ramps Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax 10 The acceleration is limited relative to the maximum current Acceleration 96 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Current Current limit The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 drivemaster2 User Manual 163 10 Parameters of an SD2x s 164 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is limited via absolute current values c o z m I E E Jg x 30 40 Current Arms The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking
169. e Settings Help SIEB amp MEYER E 4 9 mi Speed tool p Motor configuration Cheracteristic line selection Motor connection WW 1822 01 1981 3 rpm J 12 6 Speed Speed parameters Speed O Invert sign dh d O Host localhost Fig 119 converter setup tool Besides the main menu and the tool bar the user interface is divided up into the sections status display motor selection actual values reference values and n control Menu Description File Mode Settings Help 4 9 The program menu of the converter setup tool provides the following functions gt File drivemaster2 User Manual 13 3 2 13 3 3 Tools Oscar Opens the application Oscar in a new window The Oscar is a diagnosis tool to be used for recording values and displaying these as graphs Exit The program is closed gt Operating Mode This menu item is not active at present Settings Language Selection of program language The languages German and English are provided The selected language is active immediately Communication Setting the heartbeat time If you set the parameter to zero the heartbeat monitoring is deactivated The default value for the heartbeat time is 1000 ms By means of heartbeat monitoring the drive detects whether the tool converter setup tool is still active or not When the dri
170. e connector and the supply voltage for the selected measuring system Velocity scaling The parameter indicates a reference speed to which all other speed values can be scaled Moving at speed values that are higher than the speed scaling is not possible Hall Sensor SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s s Via this parameter group the Hall sensors are analyzed All three Hall sensors are in use Adjustment of the Hall sensor The parameter specifies the orientation of the Hall sensors The parameter is set via a list box If the Hall sensors are rotated by 180 the Hall signals must be inverted 84 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Pulse Generator SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv s This parameter group is displayed for all pulse generator measuring systems for the drive amplifiers Resolution The parameter specifies the number of pulses per mechanical motor revolution Incremental Encoder TTL 12 V SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v m This parameter group contains parameters to configure the monitoring system of an incremental encoder Signal periods per revolution The parameter indicates the number of increments of one mechanical revolution 360 Refer to the encoder data sheet The parameter is indicated in signal periods per mechanical revolution Interpolation factor The parameter indicates the resolution pe
171. e parameter defines the maximum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet A thermal contact behaves like a PTC Temperature monitoring Specifies which type of temperature monitoring is used in the motor The parameter is set via list box Depending on the selected type of temperature monitoring the parameter Limit of temperature monitoring appears NTC For a resistor with a negative temperature coefficient NTC the parameter defines the minimum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet k KTY83 130 For an approximately linear resistance with positive temperature coefficient of the KTY series the parameter indicates the switch off temperature in C For the switch off temperature refer to the data sheet of the motor Typically the temperature is about 155 C 1 According to the program setting of the units see p 32 the parameters of a linear synchronous motor are indicated as peak values or RMS values Motor Parameters for Rotary Asynchronous Motors SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 Vv drivemaster2 User Manual 79 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x Rated current A Aq Specifies the rated current of the motor during continuous operation S1 operation The para
172. e provides the parameters for the flux controller of a HSPWM converter The flux current is proportional to the flux that is generated in the motor gap Eg Device overview Parameters la Diagnosis E i POO Doc Axis Flux controller Q g Configuration f Monitorings fh Analog signals id Digital signals Starting current f Encoder emulation 3 82 A Er Controller Dr Speed controller Curent controller y ERES Flux ref value EA Compensation Holding current he Vibration absorption 3 00 A Speed Braking current 1 00 A Start threshold flux control Stop threshold vibration absorption 750 RPM 500 RPM Flux I Ref Current ref value filter 10 000 ms Ref flux current filter 20 000 ms Flux I Act Motor flux delay time 10 000 ms Fig 66 Parameter page Flux controller Start and stop behavior In the top section of the page the profile of speed and current is illustrated The following parameters can be configured gt Startup current The parameter indicates the starting current of the motor in the range of open loop control in amperes gt Holding current The parameter indicates the holding current in amperes This parameter is only displayed when a holding current is activated on the page Current controller gt Start threshold flux control The parameter indicates the speed in revo utions per minute at which the control is activated gt Stop thres
173. e second page of the project wizard gt Cancel Exits the project wizard All input will be cleared 14 5 1 2 Edit Devices On the second page of the project wizard you can edit eter sets of the current project the devices drives and param om This dialog page is opened directly when you click on the button Edit project in the device overview of in the drive parameters SIEB amp MEYER AG d i Ft ef FC2 0 02190 101EC A rt Zf Add device ii 1 SD2 2 036 21 12EIF n 11 fh Drive 2A 036 21 12EF A tt By Copy device H a P00 servo drive 1 Efi Drive 2B 036 21 121F B tt X Delete device P00 Bautz M714 ff 502 3 036 21 12EIF Ei fA Drive 3 A 036 21 12EF A POO Elgi Drive 3B 036 21 12IF B Poo 1 Project tree BY Edit device ay Duplicate device Displays the created project Depending on the selected node project device drive or parameter set the possible actions are activated on the right side of the dialog If no devices have been assigned to the project yet select the first node in the tree 2 Select device action Here you can edit a device gt Add device Opens a dialog to add a device to the project Edit the type the number and the address of the new device As address the software sets automatically the first address available in the project tree Add device Exits the dialog and applies the new device in the project Cance
174. e tools depend on the device selected on the tab page Device overview For frequency converters the converter setup too is provided For drive amplifiers the tools arive setup tool and hiper enaat tool are available In addition the digital oscilloscope Oscar and the data recorder SDx Datalogger are available for all devices 13 1 arive setup tool The program arive setup foo allows initial operation of a drive amplifier SD2x without addressing it by a control system Via this page some functions can be tested All values set in the drive setup too are cleared in the device as soon as the logic voltage is switched off Cc When you position the drive via setup tool keep in mind that the drive receives its commands from the PC now That means in case of an unex pected malfunction of the setup software a movement started by the PC can not be stopped anymore if SIEB amp MEYER AG drive setup tool V1 8 Build 60 1 29 10 Pow ODrv 0A DEK Fie Loader Settings g ag Parameter Set POO Doc Axist SIEB amp MEYER State Operation Enabled _ Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Ref Current 2 04 Aeff Act Current 2 11 Aeff Motor Load 25 1 Ref Velocity 159 92 rpm Act Velocity 159 92 rpm Amplifier Load 7 9 95 Ref Position Act Position Amplifier Temp 16 8 C Velocity absolute values Velocity Sign 13 2 8 A
175. ected Devices In order to work in the online mode select the option Searching for connected devices after program start The corresponding dialog is displayed Later you can switch into the online mode via the menu Loader Searching for connected devices You can also click on the symbol ag in the tool bar e Searching for connected devices Found devices Online project g SD2 0 036 21 40DC Drv 0A 03621 40DC A Searching Fig 11 Dialog window Searching for connected devices When the dialog is opened the software starts immediately to search for addressable devices in the complete address range The software searches for every power supply address in the address range of the drive addresses from 0 to 31 During the search all addressable devices are already arranged in an online project and listed in a tree type structure in the window Found devices The progress bar below indicates the progress of the device address scan The following buttons can be selected gt Cancel New search This button has two functions A currently running search can be canceled Then the Cancel button is renamed in New search and the device search can be restarted gt Apply Closes the dialog All found devices are applied to the software and form a new online project A previously opened project will be overwritten gt A Close Closes the dialog and the search result is not applied The former project is kept
176. ed Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Time Controlled SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM z v 4 v In order to operate the motor potentiometer time controlled you must have selected the entry Additional speed ref value time controlled in the list box MOP function 10 Motor potentiometer parameters Maximum value 1320 000 RPM D IN MOP up Ramp up time 10000 ms Ramp down time 10000 ms Start value 0 000 D IN MOP on Minimim value 1320 000 RPM Motor potentiometer parameters The parameters below can be set for a time controlled motor potentiometer There are default values preset for all motor potentiometer parameters gt Maximum value Indicates the maximum speed in revolutions per minute by which the reference value can be increased using the motor potentiometer The default value is determined by means of the set motor parameters gt Minimum value Indicates the minimum speed in revolutions per minute by which the reference value can be reduced using the motor potentiometer The default value is determined by means of the set motor parameters drivemaster2 User Manual 119 Parameters of an SD2x 10 120 gt Start value Indicates the speed value in revolutions per minute to which the MOP value is reset after a reset command With this reference value operation is started again The default value is zero gt Ramp up time Indicates the time in milliseconds in which the spe
177. ed Reference Values SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM 148 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPAM VF 172 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPWM 159 Speed Reference Values SD2x SVC 137 Start up SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM 157 Start up SD2x SVC 144 Switching off Temperature PS2 59 T Tachometer SD2x 88 U Units SD2x 99 V V f Characteristic Curve FC2 204 V f Characteristic Curve SD2xHSPAM VF Variable Ramps SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM Variable Ramps SD2x HSPAM VF 175 Variable Ramps SD2x HSPWM 163 Variable Ramps SD2x SVC 140 Vibration Absorption SD2x HSPWM 169 179 152 W W24 Warning threshold current SD2x 104 W26 Warning threshold overload current SD2x 107 Warnings Motor SD2x 104 Warnings Power Output Stage SD2x 103 Winding Detection SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM 158 Winding Detection SD2x HSPAM VF 182 Winding Detection SD2x HSPWM 170 Winding Detection SD2x SERVO VECTOR Winding Detection SD2x SVC 146 le 93 298 drivemaster2 User Manual 18 Index A Actual values drive amplifier SD2x 215 frequency converter FC2 216 power supply unit PS2 214 Addressing 276 C CAN bus monitor 230 configuration 91 93 Communication server 269 serial 273 USB 270 converter setup tool 248 D Device overview 55 DNC bus monitor 231 configuration 91 96 drive setup tool 239 E EnDat initial operation 246 parameter setting 87 Errors 217 H hiper endat tool 246
178. ed can be pushed from 0 to the maximum value using the motor potentiometer The default value is 10000 ms gt Ramp down time Indicates the time in milliseconds in which the speed can be pushed from the maximum to 0 using the motor potentiometer The default value is 10000 ms Ref value RPM A 13200 d mmm Kortcememcueacueneireee cepa Maximum value Start value 0 t ms MOP down 1 MOP up 0 Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Edge Controlled SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 P4 4 In order to operate the motor potentiometer edge controlled you must have selected the entry Additional speed ref value edge controlled in the list box MOP function Motor potentiometer parameters Maximum value 1320 000 RPM Step size 132 000 RPM D INMOPup F D IN MOP down f Start value 0 000 M Minimim value 1320 000 RPM Motor potentiometer parameters The parameters below can be set for an edge controlled motor potentiometer There are default values preset for all motor potentiometer parameters drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x gt Maximum value Indicates the maximum speed in revolutions per minute by which the reference value can be increased using the motor potentiometer The default value is determined by means of the set motor parameters gt Minimum value Indicates the minimum speed in revolutions per minute by which the reference value can
179. ed forward You can change the parameters of the current feed forward online The new values are immediately active a Actual Drive Values Position Controller Velocity Controller Current Feed Forward Current Ref Filters Current Controller Settings Acceleration Pos Direction 0 000 A ms Acceleration Neg Direction 0 000 E A m s Deceleration Pos Direction 0 000 A m s Deceleration Neg Direction 0 000 x A m s Current ref filters On this tab you can select on the operation of the four reference current filters in the drive Select them to be active or not and if they should operate as low pass of the 1st or 2nd order or as band stop filter The set filters are immediately active Actual Drive Values Position Controller Velocity Controller CurrentFeedForward CurrentRef iters settings Fiter 1 Fiter 2 Lonrpass 2 7 Fiter 3 Fiter 4 Frequency 900 5 Hz Frequency 1500 Hz Frequency 1520 Hz Bandwidth 7600 Hz Current controller You can change the parameters of the current controller online The new values are immediately active Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings KpQ 10 000 V A Tn i 50 00 4 ms Flux controller You can change the parameters of the flux controller online The new values are imme diately active Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Lo
180. eed are displayed Function Velocity absolute values Z Max Curent 10 0 Aeff Demand Velocity 1000 00 t pm Mlodty sin F11 invert sign Actual Current 1 52Aeff Actual Velocity 776 90 rpm Velocity reversing function Risk of injury while working with the reversing function This function in particular needs to be handled carefully Since the PC writes the values cyclically into the device the actual time values may differ pretty much from the set time values and these may not be met Consider the risk of injury while standing near to the motor or other machine parts Keep clear from the machine while moving the axes via the setup tool Taking the maximum current into account the motor can be positioned with this func tion First the motor is driven with the speed V1 for t1 ms This is followed by a waiting period of the time tp with the speed 0 if tp 0 there is no waiting period Then the motor is driven with the speed V2 for t2 ms followed again by the waiting period tp This cycle is repeated continuously When the time periods are set smaller than 50 ms they will be treated like times of 0 ms i e not existent In addition the actual current and the actual speed are displayed Function Velocity reversing function V Max Current 10 0 Aeff tp 500 ms Vt 1000 rpm tl 1000 ms V2 1000 mm t2 2000 ms Actual Current 0 88 Aeff Actual Velocity 999 82 rpm Velocity pushing
181. eer O cates e aaeeea SEE IS 285 Software Configuration cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaeeeceeeeeeeesteeees 285 Communication with a Remote PC via RS232 RS485 sssseesseeses 286 Hardware Configuration sssssssssssssssssseee enne emere nennen 286 ooltware Configuratio ession a aiora iaai 287 Appendix ssennnooennnennoonnnnnnrennnnnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrennnnnnrrnnnnnnne 289 Troubleshooting secossa andan bat anaia eaaa aaaea 289 Installation and Security Programs sss 289 Using the Software with Restricted Rights 289 OMM tr MINE 293 Index Parameters 5 2 aoc trr ritui rni rre rore kde 295 UNOS SNR RE 299 drivemaster2 User Manual 11 Content drivemaster2 User Manual About this Manual About this Manual This chapter explains symbols signal words and abbreviations possibly used in this manual 1 1 Illustration of Warnings Depending on their degree of risk warnings are classified into different levels In the manual the different levels and types of dangers are represented as follows DANGER Description of the type and gravity of the risk Description of possible consequences Procedure of steps for avoiding the risk 1 Risk level signal word warning color Classification of the risk 2 Safety symbol Risk of injury 3 Risk symbol Graphic representation of the source of
182. eff Demand Velocity k 160 00 rpm Actual Current 1 90 Aeff Actual Velocity Action IBI F5 Drive Setup Active F6 Enable Operation BB F7 sten E F9 Eror Reset Host localhost Port 0x3600 Pow 0 Drv 0A Online Fig 117 drive setup tool Beside the main menu and the tool bar the user interface is separated into the sections status display actual values and parameters function and action drivemaster2 User Manual 239 13 Tools 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 1 3 240 Menu Description File Loader Settings Wt P Parameter Set P00 Doc Axis1 x The program menu of the converter setup tool provides the following functions gt File Oscar Opens the application Oscar in a new window The Oscar is a diagnosis tool to be used for recording values and displaying these as graphs Exit The program is closed gt Loader Write parameters to drive ag Writes the parameters set in the drive setup tool into the drive and saves them gt Settings Language Selection of program language The languages German and English are provided The selected language is active immediately Parameter Set Set the desired parameter set for the test only for devices with several parameter sets see Multi Parameters p 62 Status Display The status display consists of 2 lines State Operation Enabled The first line provides the following information hardware d
183. eleration ramp JA Variable ramps Positive v 50000 00 RPM 300000 00 RPM 3000 ms Dr Speed controller Skip range 1 Min Limit Max Deceleration ramp ET Ref current filter s i 10000 00 RPM 5000 00 RPM 3000 ms f Current controller Direction of positive Start up rotation Skip velocity 2 NMin Mode Max Quick stop ramp i Winding detection Cw v 0 00 RPM N Ref 0 Y 3000 ms Skip range 2 Ramps based on D velocity scak 0 00 RPM velocity scaling Variable ramps Type 2 T m J Fig 54 Parameter page Speed ref values Direction of rotation The parameter defines the direction of motor rotation for positive reference values viewed from the shaft end gt clockwise rotation CW gt counterclockwise rotation CCW ES The direction of rotation set in the software should match the actual rotation direction of the motor If this is not the case two motor phases must be exchanged 10 Direction lock If only one direction of the motor is permitted you can lock the other direction via this parameter The following settings are available gt None Both positive and negative speed values are passed to the motor gt Positive Positive speed values are not passed to the motor gt Negative Negative speed values are not passed to the motor Skip bandwidth By means of a skip bandwidth you can prevent that definite speeds are driven for a long time These speeds might be e g
184. emaster2 User Manual 281 15 Communication 15 4 2 282 The following requirements must be met for the address selection switches gt Up to 16 devices can be connected to the converter via the RS485 bus An indi vidual address 0 to F must be set for all devices via the address selection switch gt Since the converter has no proper address selection switch it behaves like a power supply unit with the address 0 during the communication The access to the serial communication server in the PC is shared between the different applications In the example above the applications arivemasfter2 and converter setup too are running Software Configuration After you have started the software arivemaster2 click the button Setup connec tion to the device to open the dialog for the communication Later you can also select the menu Settings Setup connection to the device to call the dialog t Setup connection to the device Setup communication interface Local connection O Network connection Select connection Type HRS232_R5485 M PC connection Kommunikationsanschluss COM1 F Keep project connect F Search devices connect X Cancel Make the following settings Communication interface Local connection Type RS232_RS485 PC connection Select the used serial interface COM port Click on the button Search devices connect to apply the settings and create an online project
185. ement 90 0 electr Current AC frequency This function allows to operate the connected motor with a preset current and frequency By pressing one of the buttons or also the corresponding keys on the keyboard are possible the frequency will be changed by 1 Hz accordingly In addition the actual current is displayed Function Current AC frequency M Frequency 10 Hz Frequency tuning Demand Current 2 4 Aeff Actual Current 1 40 Aeff 13 1 5 Action 13 This section contains the following buttons gt Initial operation activates the initial operation in the device gt Controller activated activates the controller gt Start starts the selected function and loads all current input values into the device gt Error reset resets all remedied errors Action I F5 Drive Setup Active B F6 Enable Operation RH F7 Stat E F9 Error Reset drivemaster2 User Manual 245 13 Tools 13 2 246 FNI Depending on the device status the buttons can have the following states gt blocked gray gt inactive yellow gt active green Drive Setup Active It is necessary to activate the setup in the device to use the drive setup too Thus the drive controller does not receive its commands by a control system or a field bus anymore but expects them from the software Before activating the initial operation the following dialog appears Its purpose
186. emulation Motor measurement system AB Quadrature signal 4 Motor revolution 4 Motor revolution Signal period 4096 Measuring steps Resolution M pe AG BUG G8 OA RN Index signal offset Measuring steps Measuring step Signal period 360 Resolution The parameter specifies the number of signal periods per mechanical motor revolution The value for the signal periods is defined by the settings of the motor measuring System see section 10 2 5 Motor measuring system p 82 The measuring steps per motor revolution are displayed automatically in the blue colored field behind drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Index signal offset This parameter is only active for the motor measuring systems Resolver and Linear Hall The value indicates the number of measuring steps by which the zero pulse is to be displaced default 0 Encoder Emulation Speed Pulse SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 v Via this parameter group the encoder emulation is configured for the selected measu ring system by speed pulses The speed pulses are made up of two rectangular signals A and B Encoder emulation Speed pulse 1024 Signal period mm Motor revolution Resolution Signal period 360 Resolution The parameter specifies the number of signal periods per mechanical motor revolution 10 Enc
187. en 0 15 but the CAN bus does not allow the value 0 the value 1 is automatically added Thus you can set node IDs between 1 and 16 via the ID switch Address selector switch programmable address 1 The node ID is calculated by the sum of the ID switch value and the value entered in the input field Programmable address In order to remain within the range of the node ID you must enter a value between 0 110 Since the number 0 is not allowed in the CAN bus 1 is automatically added to the result Programmable address 1 The address is entered in the input field Programmable address Here you can set a value in the range of 0 126 Since the number 0 is not allowed in the CAN bus 1 is automatically added Thus the node ID is in the range of 1 127 The ID switch on the front panel of the device has no function drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Node Guarding Node Life Time When the check box for node guarding is activated the communication via CAN bus is monitored During operation state operational the drive now expects to receive node guarding messages from the host at regular intervals Via the parameter Node Life Time you can enter the time interval between two node guarding messages in milli seconds If the drive does not receive a message within this time an error is triggered When node guarding is active heartbeat monitoring is not possible Heartbeat Producer Heartbeat Producer Time Whe
188. en selected Mode N Ref 0 n ref out n min n ref in min 138 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Mode N Ref N Min hysteresis ES It is not possible to reverse the direction of the motor rotation when the target value is below the determined minimum speed Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference speed value They are indicated in milliseconds The parameter displays the time required for reaching the speed scaling from standstill A ramp of e g 12000 ms together with a speed scaling of 120000 rpm 10000 1 min makes a maximum acceleration of 167 1 s or s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the acceleration from 0 to the speed limit v t At v 0 gt 0 gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a break application to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 Variable ramps By means of the function Variable ramps you can set a limit for the mean actual current For this purpose the acceleration is reduced depending on the actual current Typically variable ramps are applied during the start up of pumps or fans gt Off The function is not active the ramps are fix as specified above gt Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is relative to the maximum curren
189. ency the device power is reduced derating Derating tables for each device are embodied in the hard ware documentation Shutdown Temperatures SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 P4 P4 4 This parameter group displays the parameters for the monitoring of the thermal load of the output stage of a drive amplifier The parameters are read only values loaded from the connected hardware Max heat sink temperature The parameter indicates the maximum heat sink temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade If this temperature is exceeded the output stage will be switched off automatically and the error message E28 Power output stage temperature too high appears Max ambient temperature The parameter indicates the maximum ambient temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade If this temperature is exceeded the output stage will be switched off automatically and the error message E27 Ambient temperature too high appears Choke SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 s v s This parameter group displays information on the internal inductance drivemaster2 User Manual 10 2 4 Parameters of an SD2x Internal inductance The parameter indicates the internal inductance of the output stage choke in millihenry If there is no choke in the drive the inductance value is 0 mH Motor This page contains parameters for the motor that
190. ent in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is limited via absolute current values o 2 d 3 2 3 x 30 40 Current Arms The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Current Controller SD2x HSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM m 4 For HSPAM VF operation the Current controller only refers to the holding current Via this page the holding current controller is parameterized In addition you can acti vate the functions Current controlled startup braking and Flying restart Ef Device overview fi Parameters E gi POO
191. ent limitation the holding current and the proper control parameters ER Device overview H Parameters A Diagnosis fi P00 DocAxis MEN 25 bruencowoer Configuration t Monitorings On Analog signals ad Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller Dr Speed controller Current controller Output stage Limitation Amplification Kp 9 00 10 000 5 Flux controller ga Z Flux ref value Holding current function Integration time Ti Compensation Holding current Y 50 000 ms H Vibration absorption Holding current 3 00 Actual current value Fig 65 Parameter page Current controller For synchronous motors the amplification Kp and the integral time constant Tn read justment time of the current controller can be configured via the motor parameters For asynchronous motors it is necessary to align these parameters manually Limitation The parameter indicates the limitation in the current controller for the reference value of the current The reference current and its limitation are indicated as peak value in ampere The maximum value of the Limitation are the peak currents of the motor and the power output stage Holding Function The holding function is active when the controller is switched on and no reference speed value is set The holding current shall keep the motor in position at standstill You can select one of the following holding functions gt Holding c
192. ents of the frequency converter om The parameters are also used for the l t calculator of the power output stage When the device is overloaded the l t calculator triggers the error message E25 Power supply load too high and switches the device off Depending on the program configuration the currents are displayed as peak amplitude values or as RMS values in amperes Rated current The parameter specifies the rated current of the device during continuous operation S1 operation The rated current depends on the cooling and is limited by the param eter Max rated current Max rated current The parameter indicates the upper limit of the value range for the parameter Rated current The parameter depends on the used device and is a read only value drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Peak current The parameter specifies the peak current of the device The device can provide this current from the cold state once and not longer than the additionally defined time period The parameter is a read only value and depends on the used device DC Link FC2 This parameter group contains values and settings for the DC intermediate circuit of the frequency converter All values are DC values and indicated in vo ts Voltage The parameter indicates the characteristic intermediate circuit voltage The AC voltage is rectified to supply DC voltage to the intermediate circuit Therefore the characteristic intermediate circui
193. er E44 Over current threshold indicates the maximum current in amperes f this value is exceeded the error message E44 is triggered E44 EMF monitoring Via the check box the monitoring function for the electromotive force EMF is acti vated EMF monitoring is configured via the motor parameters voltage constant and stator resistance see Motor Parameters for Rotary Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x p 76 Analog Signals The node Analog signals provides the parameter page Analog inputs and possibly the page Analog outputs depending on the used hardware Ef Device overview 5 Parameters PO0 Doc Drive Configuration 18 Monitorings 2 Analog signals gt Analog inputs ex Analog outputs a Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller On these pages you can configure the functions of the analog inputs and outputs Analog Inputs On this page you can configure the inputs Analog In 0 and Analog In 1 1 n 5 a 3 j E Device overview 3 Parameters F Diagnosis g Configuration t Monitorings hv Analog signals MV Analog inputs Analog In 0 Velocity reference value X 4 Analog outputs ail Digital signals Encoder emulation Pr Controller Filter time CO Inverter Scaling 0 0 ms 100 000 E 10 000 Analog offset x18 7 704 my Analog In 1 Current reference value Filter time L Inverter Scaling 0 0 ms 40 000
194. er Limitation Amplification Kp 2 20 00 3 000 Pr Speed controller A V A Holding function Integration time Ti Holding current v 1 000 ms Holding current 1 00 Actual current value A Fig 58 Parameter page Current controller Limitation The parameter indicates the limitation in the current controller for the reference value of the current The reference current and its limitation are indicated as peak value in ampere The maximum value of the Limitation are the peak currents of the motor and the power output stage Holding Function The parameter indicates whether a holding current is used The holding current is active when the controller is switched on and no reference value is set The holding current shall keep the motor in position at standstill The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the current controller in volts per ampere The reaction time of the current control circuit is reduced if a high propor tional amplification is selected If the amplification value is set too high the current control circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the current controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the quicker the c
195. er Overview About this Manual 1 General Information 2 Installation 3 Device Connection to PC 4 Description of the User Interface 5 Password Protection and User Rights 6 First Steps n Device Overview 8 Parameters of a PS2 9 Parameters of an SD2x 10 Parameters of an FC2 11 Diagnosis 12 Tools 13 Working with Projects 14 Communication 15 Appendix 16 Index Parameters 17 Index 18 drivemaster2 User Manual 3 Chapter Overview drivemaster2 User Manual 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 3 4 1 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 4 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 1 1 5 5 1 2 5 5 1 3 5 5 1 4 5 5 2 5 5 2 1 5 6 5 7 6 1 6 2 Content About this Manual uero oia necne dcr een n no cnius 13 Illustration of Warnings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 13 Illustration of General Notices eene 14 Abbreviations eessseeeeesseeee eene nennen nennen nnne nennt nnns 14 General Information eere 15 drivemaster2 Applications citrus ris dai noo ip orte taba esa Frais Feb a P RR QE n ADR EYR ADS 15 Installation eeeeeeereerrnnn 17 PC Hardware Requirements eux ictentvasniuiaa Deu exer ew COn uou pUn ot wa e pon rao aatis 17 Install drivemaster2 eeeesesesesseseseseeeeeeee nennen nnne nnne nnn nnns 17 Uninstall d
196. er2 User Manual Installation INI The following dialog appears Click on the button Browse my computer for driver software B s amp Update Driver Software LibUsb Win32 SM2 Device 01 24 2005 0 1 8 1 How do you want to search for driver software Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device Browse my computer for driver software i Locate and install driver software manually i Inthe following dialog window click on the button Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer a Update Driver Software LibUsb Win32 SM2 Device 01 24 2005 0 1 8 1 Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location CAF5U103 T 7 Include subfolders Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device I O Select LibUsb Win32 SM2 TUSB1340 FirmwareLoader in the following dialog window and click Next drivemaster2 User Manual 21 Installation ty At this point error messages may appear but you can ignore these i Update Driver Software LibUsb Win32 SM2 D
197. error is 8 If the actual speed is very noisy you can allow a greater maximum angle error The maximum angle error indirectly determines the bandwidth of the angle controller Bandwidth The dynamics of sensorless commutation finding is determined by the bandwidth of the angle controller The unit is hertz The bandwidth is typically between 20 Hz and 80 Hz It is set indirectly via the maximum angle error drivemaster2 User Manual 89 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 6 90 Drive Control Via this page the parameters of the drive control are configured Ef Device overview ils Parameters B T Analog Agna Control channel Serial interface RS485 USB ai Digital signals Encoder emulation m P00 Doc Axis Drive control Q E g Configuration fj Drive Operating mode of the drive 3 Power supply I Power output stage Motor S Motor measurement syste E Arive contral User level rights Control gr Monitorings Operating mode Velocity mode 1 Ni Motor potentiometer Setpoint channel Serial interface RS485 USB Pr Controller Behavior in case of Communication failure SERVOLINK 4 CAN Shutdown The motor coasts to standst Controller off command Shutdown The motor is decelerated Quick stop command Software Stop Quick stop ramp Main voltage drop Shutdown Quick stop ramp Error response Short circuit motor phases Not active
198. erted accordingly Load compensation The standard load compensation allows reducing the V f characteristic curve during no load operation As soon as load is applied the V f curve is increased again The following parameters must be set gt Idle reduction to drivemaster2 User Manual 181 10 Parameters of an SD2x 182 The parameter indicates the percentage to which the V f characteristic curve is reduced during no load operation gt Load increase by The parameter indicates the percentage by which the V f characteristic curve is increased when the rated load is applied again gt Limit The parameter indicates the maximum percentage to which the V f characteristic curve can be increased on load ES If you have set an overcompensation via the load increase the output voltage is higher than the one set in the V f characteristic curve Slip compensation The slip compensation is an open loop control to compensate the slip of an asynchro nous motor At the rated load it is calculated from the actual speed value in revolutions per minute and the actual current in amperes The slip compensation is set automatically by the parameter wizard and depends on the entered motor data Compensate external inductance When the check box is activated the voltage drop at the filter choke is compensated Winding Detection SD2x HSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 Ef Device overview i
199. es the parameter indicates the switch off temperature in C For the switch off temperature refer to the data sheet of the motor Typically the temperature is about 155 C 1 According to the program setting of the units see p 32 the parameters of a rotary asynchronous motor are indicated as peak values or RMS values Variable Rated Current You can set limit values for the rated current in the low speed range to ensure smooth startup Open the following dialog window via the button and set the rated current according to the actual speed 10 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 300000 RPM Variable Rated Current On PO P1 P2 P3 10 00 11 50 A 13 00 A 14 81 A 0 00 90000 00 RPM 180000 00 RPM 300000 00 RPM 4f OK X Cancel Open the list box Variable rated current and select the entry On Then you can determine up to 4 speed levels within the speed range of the motor Click OK to apply the settings drivemaster2 User Manual 81 10 P ters of an SD2 arameters of an X nm 10 2 5 82 Motor measuring system This page provides the parameters of the measuring system the connected motor uses The page is divided into a fix and one or two variable parameter groups The settings made in the fixed parameter group Motor measurement system determine whether and which parameter group appears as variable parameter group E g Device overview T Parameters aA Diagnosis eI Pot Seve dre a g Config
200. esignation drive address here 0 A and the name of the current parameter set The colored status field in the second line indicates the current device status For this purpose the status word in the device is analyzed No error the actual operating mode is displayed dr ive setup toolis offline or the drive is not ready for operation Error the error of top priority is displayed Actual Values and Parameters The section for actual values and parameters is made up of several tab pages Depending on the drive function different tab pages are displayed Tab page SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Actual drive values INN Current feed forward Current ref filters NELEE GNE AN drivemaster2 User Manual Tools Tab page SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Current controller Load compensation 1 Not displayed for special function SVC If you change a parameter you must apply the new value with the ENTER key Then the new value is immediately active for operation In order to transfer the parameters changed in the drive seftup too to the drive parameter set you must write them into the m drive via the button 2g Actual drive values This tab page contains a selection of actual values of particular importance These values are read only values Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Ref Current 2 04 Aeff Act C
201. eter indicates the braking current in amperes This current is impressed during open loop controlled braking om When operating highly inductive motors the commutation can shift due to high braking torques In this case the braking rate is reduced automatically i e the deceleration time might be longer Winding Detection SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s m Ef Device overview il Parameters Egi POO HSBLOCK drive 2 g Configuration H alt Monitorings Gv Analog signals Type of identification Off X i Digital signals i Encoder emulation Identification voltage E Dr Controller z Dr Speed controller Identification current 0 00 Arms Ref current filter Current controller Time constant 1 0 ms H 12 Speed ref values M Motor potentiometer Fig 60 Parameter page Winding detection ES At present only special firmware supports the functions winding detection The motor winding can be detected via voltage jumps For this purpose select the entry Identification by voltage jump in the list box Type of identification The parameters Identification current and Time constant describe the reaction of the motor winding to a voltage jump with Identification voltage Set these parameters accordingly drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x 10 10 4 Controller Parameters for HSPWM Operation The page Controller displays a block diagram showing t
202. eter indicates the main voltage of a sine mains supply in vo fs RMS value gt Single phase operation Voltage is related to the neutral conductor gt Three phase operation Voltage is defined between two phases This parameter is used by the load monitoring In the event of an error the device is Switched off with the error E33 Power supply load monitoring gt mains voltage too high or E34 Power supply load monitoring gt mains voltage too low Mains frequency The parameter indicates the frequency of the sine mains supply in hertz or the supply of direct current DC The available variants are set by means of a list box Power FC2 This parameter group displays information on the maximum output power of the frequency converter The displayed values are read only values They are statically dependent on the used hardware as well as the parameters Mains phases and Voltage Rated power The parameter indicates the rated power of the power supply unit in kilowatts This is the maximum output power during continuous operation The indicated value is the apparent power of the device Peak power The parameter indicates the peak power of the power supply unit as apparent power in kilowatts Time for peak power The parameter specifies the period of time in seconds in which the device can provide the peak power once from the cold state Internal Ballast Resistor FC2 This parameter group displays the values of the i
203. evice 01 24 2005 0 1 8 1 Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware Select the manufacturer and model of your hardware device and then click Next If you P s have a disk that contains the driver you want to install click Have Disk bUsb 32 64 bit SM2 Devi This driver is not digitally signed Have Disk Tell me why driver signing is important Restart the drive now For that purpose you can simply unplug the USB connector for a few seconds The USB driver should be loaded properly now 22 drivemaster2 User Manual Device Connection to PC gt B Device Connection to PC The following instructions describe how to connect the different devices to the PC on which the software arivemasterZis installed ES Further information on serial and USB communication as well as the connec tion and addressing of several devices is to find in chapter 15 Communica tion p 269 4 1 Connection of PS2 and SD2 RS232 RS485 X Converter USB gt RS485 232 Converter 0 E 362101xxxR01 EEE E c etu Fig 3 Possible connections between PC PS2 and SD2 Connect the power supply unit PS2 to the PC Via USB cable Connect the USB cable between the female connector X13 of the PS2 and a USB port
204. evice overview With a double axis drive the diagnosis pages apply only to the selected axis Diagnosis pages The diagnosis pages display actual and saved values of the device drivemaster2 User Manual 213 12 12 Diagnosis 12 1 214 Actual Values PS2 This page displays all important data that describe the current status of the power supply unit ER Device overview 5 Parameters 2 Diagnosis m POO Power Supply Actual values Q Actual values ae Inputs Outputs E Object browser f Type plate Actual values DC link voltage Bao jv Heat sink temperature 1G Load Ambient temperature E Status message Power state Ready for operation Fig 94 Diagnosis page Actual values for PS2 Displayed actual values gt gt gt DC link voltage Displays the actual voltage in the DC link in vo ts Load Displays the current load of the brake chopper circuit in percent Heat sink temperature Displays the current temperature of the heat sink in degree centigrade Ambient temperature Displays the current ambient temperature in degree centi grade Status Messages gt Power state The status field displays the current state of the device For this purpose the status word of the device is analyzed If there are current errors the error of the highest priority is displayed If there is no current error the saved error of the highest priority is displayed Error sta
205. evices The displays have the following meaning gt Command count The value indicates the number of all executed commands gt Repeat count The value indicates how often a command was repeated The USB bus server does not repeat any commands Consequently the value 0 is always displayed here gt Error count The value indicates the number of errors that have already occurred Not every error displays a faulty connection Every nonexistent device produces an error during a device scan 15 1 2 Serial Communication Server The serial communication server is displayed with the symbol lu in the info area of the taskbar 15 1 2 1 Main Window The main window of the USB communication server is structured as follows S amp M Serial Server V2 0 ix E Serial Port Device BaudRate Status COMI 57600 Status E NONE UDP Serial Performance 0 0 Cmds sec Command count 0 1 5 CMD_NACK sent 0 Ee Repeat count 0 Command buffer 0 Error count fO Pot 0x3601 dients 0 Staus E NONE Fig 126 Serial communication server drivemaster2 User Manual 273 15 Communication 15 1 2 2 274 1 Menu bar The program menu provides all functions required for using the communica tion server 2 Diagnosis Display This section displays statistical values of the communication 3 Status bar Here the following values are displayed gt Port Indicates the UDP port number
206. f the speed controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in m sec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the more accurate the speed control operates If the value is set too small the speed control circuit starts vibrating Filter time tacho filter The parameter indicates the filter time for the actual speed tachometer in m isec onds If the actual speed is noisy you can smooth it by means of the filter A typical filter time value is 1 ms You can increase the time constant if a more smooth actual speed is needed Current Reference Filter SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM 4 z This page provides the parameters for the reference current filter of the drive amplifier You can set up to 4 filters either as low pass filter or band stop filter Ef Device overview fl Parameters E POO drive 1 4 Reference current value filter 7 5 g Configuration 1c t Monitorings i Analog signals E xd Digital signals Ref Current vd FN t Encoder emulation 3 ay ac pueri E Pr Controller j N I 1 Pr Speed controller Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4 b Ref current filter f Current controller Low pass 1 ord v Low pass 2 ord v No filter v Band stop filter v i Winding detection Frequency Frequency Frequency 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 600 Hz Bandwidth 300 Hz Fig 49 Parameter page
207. feed forward 4 Ref current filter ff Curent controller Amplification Kp Limitation Error weighting 50 0 100 000 curve 0 Ms one Holding gain Kp 50 0 is Readjustment time Tn 0 ms Type of positioning control Position control with Encoder 0 SA 10 0000 mm 10000 Counts Factor pos measurement system L Fig 42 Parameter page Position controller Velocity feed forward The parameter specifies the value of the velocity feed forward Using this parameter the speed required for the profile can be preset via the reference value generator Thus the position controller only needs to compensate for errors CS The velocity feed forward also allows realization of a PDF controller pseudo derivative feedback Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the position controller during positioning in 7 s The reaction time of the position control circuit is reduced if a high proportional amplification is selected If the amplification value is set too high the posi tion control circuit starts vibrating Holding gain Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the position controller when the message Position reached is received The unit is 7 s The reaction time of the position control circuit is reduced if a high proportional amplification is selected If the amplification value is set too high the position control circuit starts vibrating Integratio
208. following options are available gt Save changes The changes are saved in a job list Then the parameter set is loaded from the target device and applied to the user interface gt Do not save changes The changes are not saved Then the parameter set is loaded from the target device and applied to the user interface gt Cancel The changes are not saved but remain in the user interface of the target device The parameter set is not read from the target device Switching into the Offline Mode When you have finished all changes in the parameter sets of the project currently loaded in the drivemaster2 software you can switch into the offline mode for safety reasons Al By click on the offline symbol H the software switches into the offline mode Conse quently the online monitoring and the diagnosis pages are deactivated The Offline Mode In the offline mode you can create a project without device connection and prepare it for later use as online project To check or compare parameter sets an already existing project can be opened This way the user can access all devices and parameters whereas it does not matter whether the system is connected to a machine The software drivemaster2 works automatically in the offline mode when a project is created or opened after the program was started This status is displayed by a color less display in the status bar The online monitoring is not active in this mode The parameters of
209. for reaching the speed scaling from standstill A ramp of e g 12000 ms together with a speed scaling of 120000 rpm 10000 1 min makes a maximum acceleration of 167 1 s or s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the acceleration from O to the speed limit v t At v t gt 0 gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a break application to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop to speed 0 v t At v t 0 Variable ramps By means of the function Variable ramps you can set a limit for the mean actual current For this purpose the acceleration is reduced depending on the actual current Typically variable ramps are applied during the start up of pumps or fans gt Off The function is not active the ramps are fix as specified above gt Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is relative to the maximum current For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps gt Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is relative to a fix current value For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps Open loop range If a synchronous motor is connected you must set the times of acceleration and decel eration ramp in the open loop range in addition to the ramps in the speed c
210. for this quadrant The parameter must correspond to the output current value of the speed controller when the current feed forward is deactivated and the acceleration is 1 m s IFF VNEG DEC The parameter sets a negative speed and deceleration for the current feed forward If the parameter is set to 0 the current feed forward is deactivated for this quadrant The parameter must correspond to the output current value of the speed controller when the current feed forward is deactivated and the accelera tion is 1 m s drivemaster2 User Manual 129 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 130 Current Reference Filter SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 This page provides the parameters for the reference current filter of the drive amplifier You can set up to 4 filters either as low pass filter or band stop filter Ef Device overview i5 Parameters E fm P00 drive 1 Reference current value filter Q E Configuration E E Monitorings fh Analog signals Ej ad Digital signals Encoder emulation Pr Controller Pr Speed controller Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Fiter 4 4 Ref current filter Fu Ref Current vd H I Reference f Current controller Low pass 1 ord v Low pass 2 ord v No filter nd Band stop filter v i Winding detection Frequency Frequency Frequency 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 600 Hz Bandwidth 300 Hz Fig 39 Parameter page Ref current fil
211. fore the decimal point and a 16 bit decimal part Motor Parameters This parameter group comprises all physical parameters of the motor Different param eters are displayed for the different motors that can be selected The following parameter descriptions depend on the used motor type All motor data highlighted in bold in the user interface are required for the parameterization and must be adapted to the connected motor Motor Parameters for Rotary Synchronous and Voice Coil Motors SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 4 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x ES When using voice coil motors the units of the parameters are indicated as sinus peak values and not as RMS values When you select a voice coil motor as motor type the software automatically switches the units A note will appear in a window Rated current Ams th Specifies the rated current of the motor during continuous operation S1 operation The parameter is independent from the rated current of the power output stage and is not limited by it The rated current is also used in the l t calculator of the motor By means of the button t a dialog to set a variable rated current is opened see section Variable Rated Current p 81 Peak current A Ams Specifies the peak current of the motor The parameter is independent from the peak current of the power output stage but it is the top limit for the limi tation of the curren
212. formation on the set bits in the bytes 0 to 7 the address in the CAN bus COB ID and a cycle counter In the bottom section of the page the state of the NMT state machine is displayed For further information refer to the SIEB amp MEYER documentation Drive System SD2 CAN Bus Connection 12 18 DNC Bus Monitor This page is used to analyze the DNC communication DNC 8 Byte Telegram with a drive For this purpose the tab pages Receive and Transmit are available Since data are not read out in real time by the software arivemaster2 the data may be incon sistent 12 drivemaster2 User Manual 231 12 Diagnosis 12 19 232 Ef Device overview fil Parameters A Diagnosis 4 DNC Bus Monitor 7 COM1 9 COM2 USB Off O Receive Transmit mg Device 7 Drive actual values dl Errors and warnings dc Error memory 3 Position measurement system uN Digital inputs 1 Zero 2 Lenght 3 Dest 4 Src 5 Cmd 4 Digital outputs 0x00 0x0D 0x04 0x01 0x10 oh Sine Cosine Display amp Z Delta Z Measurement Analog inputs ex Analog outputs SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor 16 Chk 0x25 Byte 6 Byte 17 Byte 8 15 V Object browser V Bit 0 NMT Command Bit 0 Bit 0 Reserved 8 9 Ctrl Word Version information Bit 1 NMT Command Bit 1 Bit 1 Service Function Bit 0 V Bit 2 Togglebit Bit 2 Service Function Bit 1 10 11 Ref Speed E B
213. fs As soon as the voltage is dropped to this value the warning WOO is triggered Warnings Motor SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 v v v Via this parameter group the warnings for the motor can be configured The according limiting value to trigger an error is indicated below each parameter W05 Load The parameter indicates a threshold value for the motor load in percent As soon as the load has reached this value the warning WO5 is triggered The load is based on the t calculator for the motor WO7 Temp KTY84 130 This parameter is only active when the temperature is monitored by a KTY84 130 This must be selected in the parameter Temperature monitoring on the page Motor see section 10 2 4 1 Motor Parameters p 76 If the parameter is active it indicates a threshold value for the temperature of the motor in degree centigrade s soon as the temperature has reached this value the warning WO7 is triggered W24 Warning threshold current SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v 4 P4 4 Via this parameter group the warning of the current monitoring can be parameterized Via the warning Current the message W24 is generated It indicates that a tool pene trates the material e g when the material is in contact with a grinding wheel Due to the respective load the current increases If the current rises too high the warning drivemaster2 User Manual Parameter
214. g of the operating terminal i gt The drive function must be HSPWM or HSBLOCK FPAM gt On the parameter page Drive control you must select the entry Serial interface as control channel and setpoint channel gt On the parameter page Digital inputs you must select the entry No function for the input DIN O 294 drivemaster2 User Manual 17 Index Parameters A Analog In FC2 195 Analog In SD2x 113 Analog Out FC2 196 Analog Out SD2x 114 Angle Controller SD2x 9 B Ballast Resistor PS2 59 Behavior in Case of FC2 193 Behavior in Case of SD2x 92 C CAN SD2x 94 Choke FC2 192 Choke SD2x 74 Chopper SD2x 70 Commutation Controller SD2x 86 Compensation FC2 211 Compensation SD2xHSPAM VF 181 Compensation SD2xHSPWM 169 Control FC2 192 Current Controller SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM 156 Current Controller SD2x HSPAM VF 177 Current Controller SD2x HSPWM 166 Current Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR 131 Current Controller SD2x SVC 143 Current Feed Forward SD2x SERVO VECTOR 128 Current Reference Filter SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM Current Reference Filter SD2x SERVO VECTOR 1 Current Reference Filter SD2x SVC 142 Currents FC2 190 Currents SD2x 72 al AK w e D DC Link FC2 191 DC Link SD2x 73 DC link capacity PS2 59 Different Warnings SD2x 108 Digital In FC2 198 Digital In SD2x 116 Digital Out FC2 198 Digital Out SD
215. gged Large amounts of data may be created gt Log extreme debug events Additional information is logged even when no communication takes place Huge amounts of data are created This option should only be activated for a short time gt View logfile The log file is displayed with the editor notepad exe Consider that the editor does only display the current state when the file was opened and that it is not updated in the editor Menu DNC Trace The DNC Trace can be started in addition to the log file Recording the communication in the log file is possible but only the event with its timestamp s displayed The DNC Trace also records the contents of the communication That way you can see which object has been read and which was the content of this object The name of the trace file is S36UsbDncTrace log and it is saved in the same path as the communication server gt Start Stop DNC trace The DNC Trace is started with this option If a DNC Trace is running it can be stopped with it gt View DNC trace file The DNC trace file is displayed with the editor notepad exe Consider that the editor does only display the current state when the file was opened and that it is not updated in the editor Diagnosis The diagnosis display is divided into three groups USB Devices UDP and USB USB Devices This group displays a list of the detected USB devices The number of devices deter mines the selection of the symbol in t
216. gital signals amp Nj Motor potentiometer li Encoder emulation Pr Controller 12 Speed ref values Pr Speed controller E Current controller Flux controller Compensation Type of identification Identification voltage Identification current Time constant Winding detection 7 Identification by voltage jump vj hoo v 10 10 5 drivemaster2 User Manual Winding detection Le Flux ref value de Vibration absorption Fig 70 Parameter page Winding detection ES At present only special firmware supports the functions winding detection The motor winding can be detected via voltage jumps For this purpose select the entry Identification by voltage jump in the list box Type of identification The parameters Identification current and Time constant describe the reaction of the motor winding to a voltage jump with Identification voltage Set these parameters accordingly Controller Parameters for HSPAM VF Operation The page Controller displays a block diagram showing the functional principal of HSPAM VFoperation 10 Eg Device overview fs Parameters Elim POO HSPAM drive a Configuration E Monitorings ih Analog signals ag Digital signals Encoder emulation Controller 9 N Rot Field generator 2 8 2 Current controller lc Speed ref values iz VF Characteristic curve D Co
217. gs Messages 7 Warnings Errors gs Analog signals ep Analog inputs Analog outputs Acceleration E a Digital signals 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 tp Digital inputs Current Current limit 96 4 Digital outputs M Motor potentiometer N Motor potentiometer Ramp type Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax X 5 Encoder emulation i ii Encoder emulation El P2 a Dr Controller Normal acceleration 100 0 Minimum acceleration 100 0 96 E mEes Start threshold 75 0 Stop threshold i250 KEEA J L J Pr Speed controller e at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 6 0 Arms at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 10 0 Arms Fig 73 Parameter page Variable ramps drivemaster2 User Manual 175 10 Parameters of an SD2x Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is limited relative to the maximum current c o z 5 I E E o 20 4 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Current Current limit The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the curr
218. gt Disabled The motor potentiometer function is not used gt Additional speed ref value time controlled The reference value is increased or reduced as long as the corresponding digital input is set MOP up MOP down 1 See Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Time Controlled p 119 gt Additional speed ref value edge controlled The digital inputs only once have effect on the reference value when an edge change 0 1 takes place and drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x increase or reduce it by a preset value See Motor Potentiometer Parameters MOP Edge Controlled p 120 Reset MOP value This parameter indicates whether or when the motor potentiometer value is reset to the start value The following entries are available gt At start drive The MOP value is reset to the start value at each start of the drive as soon as the logic voltage is applied gt At D IN MOP up MOP down active The MOP value is reset to the start value when both digital inputs MOP up and MOP down are connected to 24 V at the same time Save MOP value This parameter indicates whether or when the actual motor potentiometer value is saved The following entries are available gt No save The MOP value is not saved gt At mains off The actual MOP value is saved when the mains supply is switched off gt At STOP command The actual MOP value is saved when the STOP command is trigger
219. he functional principal of HSPWM operation l Device overview f Parameters Lad B8 m POO HSPWM drive F Controller Q a E Configuration Speed controller Vibration Slip compensation absorption 8 Monitorings 4 LM Analog signals 2d Digital signals E Encoder emulation or Ramp generator Current controller ta Speed ref values Compensation A Flux controller Flux ref value e Vibration absorption Dr Speed controller 4 f Motor potentiometer lt m D L Fig 61 Parameter page Controller for HSPWM converters In the drive function HSPWM you set the control characteristics via the pages Current controller Speed reference values Compensation Flux controller Flux refer ence value Vibration absorption and Speed controller For sensorless operation the speed controller is turned off and the page Speed controller is not displayed 10 Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM zs 4 drivemaster2 User Manual 159 10 Parameters of an SD2x 160 On the page Speed ref values you can parameterize the reference value generator Ef Device overview fl Parameters P00 HSPWM drive 5 Speed ref values 7 g Configuration 18 Monitorings Analog signals dil Digital signals 1 NRef N Ref controller amp Nj Motor potentiometer a mrs Lie
220. he info area of the taskbar Each device is displayed in one table row The table rows have the following meaning gt Name Name of the USB device This name was internally defined by the USB device driver gt Ser No Directly connected devices serial number of the device for devices connected via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 firmware version of the converter drivemaster2 User Manual Communication LL gt Power Id Value of the address selection switch if existent gt State USB status any other status than USB OK indicates a malfunction of the device UDP This group displays small statistics on the network communication with the client appli cations The displays have the following meaning gt Performance The value indicates the number of commands that have been executed in the last second This value determines the sum of the commands from all clients The performance limit of the bus server is about 150 commands per second gt CMD NACK sent The value indicates the number of commands that have been rejected because the command buffer was full A rise of this value may indicate that too many client applications try to communicate at the same time gt Command Buffer The bar displays the filling level of the command buffer When the command buffer is full the next command is rejected with the command CMD_NACK USB This group displays statistics of the USB communication with the d
221. he operation of the software arivemaster2 corresponds to the Windows conventions The software can be operated with the keyboard but operation via the mouse is easier 5 1 General Operating Instructions for ar vemaster2 The following instructions shall help you using the software gt Input fields currently edited are displayed with a green background Press the enter key to apply your entries When you hold the mouse pointer over an input field for a short time the value range is displayed When you change a parameter the tab Parameters is highlighted in yellow color This is reset as soon as the parameter set is saved or written into a device ES When entering floating decimal numbers use points instead of commas 5 2 Screen Layout sp2 0 036 21 400C Drv 0A 03621400C A Pron ane Basic device Designation 036 21 400C A Serial number 1 000 251 956 Parameter set i Add D Copy content F Delete T Paste content Parameter set selection Fixed selection EEPROM 0 Digital inputs Field bus 1 Apply P Edit project Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUD Fig 9 Start page of the user interface 1 Title bar The title bar indicates the program name the version number and the creation date of the software 2 Menu bar The program menu looks similar to that of common Windows programs and provides all functions required for operati
222. he page Encoder emulation EG Device overview H Parameters F Diagnosis POO Doc Axis Encoder emulation Q g Configuration on Monitorings Function encoder emulation f Analog signals xi Digital signals Function Motor measurement system AB Quadrature signal v Encoder emulation Dr Controller Encoder emulation Motor measurement system AB Quadrature signal Dr Speed controller Ref current filter Signal period 4096 Measuring steps f Current controller Resolution o 4 Motor revolution 4 Motor revolution Index signal offset Measuring steps Measuring step oe E a Signal period 360 Fig 35 Parameter page Encoder emulation On this page you configure whether the encoder emulation actual position values is passed over to the drive amplifier and in which way Function Encoder Emulation SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 4 4 This parameter defines whether the encoder emulation is provided and what function for Function The parameter specifies the function of the encoder emulation and is set by means of a list box Depending on the selection here maybe a second parameter group is displayed drivemaster2 User Manual 123 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 124 The following options are available gt No encoder emulation The encoder emulation is deactivated and there is
223. he positioning process all relevant data is displayed in the setup tool Actual Drive Values Ref Current 0 30 Aeff Act Current 0 22 Aeff Motor Load 1 3 Ref Velocity 999 82 rpm Act Velocity 999 82rpm Amplifier Load 0 1 Act Position Amplifier Temp 26 8 C drivemaster2 User Manual 53 First St irst Steps 7 4 Analyzing a Drive via the Diagnosis Pages The data of the drive are also displayed on the diagnosis pages of the software drive master2 The pages are available via the tab page Diagnosis The page Actual Drive Values may be of special interest during initial operation SIEB amp MEYER AG drive Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level Admin me EEE 54M na Eg Device overview fs Parameters P Diagnosis im POO drive Drive actual values Drive actual value dl Errors and wamings f Error memory E Position measurement system Nref imes het Digital inputs 4 Digital outputs 3938 pm 398 ms 029 Jams Sine Cosine Display OZ Delta Z Measurement Amp Pt c s gt Analog inputs em zx Analog outputs G SERVOLINK 4 monitor Amp Power CAN bus monitor Object browser Version information Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI The setup is finished when the drive positions without error 54 drivemaster2 User Manual Device Overview a LT 8 Device Overview Via the tab
224. he software drivemaster2 from the Internet This is located in the download directory of the SIEB amp MEYER web page under www sieb meyer de Please use the guest login Start the installation Windows 2000 XP Vista Double click on the executable file drive master2 V x x xxx exe Windows 7 Right click on the executable file drivemaster2 V x x xxx exe and select the item Run as administrator c Choose a destination directory folder drivemaster2 User Manual 17 Installation 3 3 3 4 ES In Windows 7 you should not select the default path C Programs because this can cause problems with user rights Click on the button Install to start the installation 4X When the installation was successful the installation program has created the program group SIEB amp MEYER AG in the start menu Uninstall drivemaster2 ES Before uninstalling the software close all applications from the software package drivemaster2 Proceed as follows to uninstall the software arivemasterZ n the start menu of your PC select Programs gt SIEB amp MEYER AG gt drive master2 Click on the entry Uninstall drivemaster2 to start the uninstall wizard Follow the steps in the wizard until the uninstall process is finished ES Additional files that have been saved after installation in the directories of the software are also deleted by the uninstall program i e these files become lost If additional files have been
225. his example shows 2 power supply units and 4 devices that are connected to the PC via 2 USB cables PS2 SD2 SD2 FC2 0362190 03621xx 03621xx 02190xxx X4 RS485 x3 Power 0 Pow 0 Drv 0A Pow 0 Drv 1A i Pow 0 Drv 0B Pow 0 Drv 1B Pow 0 Div 2 PS2 SD2 UDP Port 0x3600 0362190 03621xx x14 B X4 RS 485 X3 X4 Power 1 Pow 1 Drv 2A Pow 1 Drv 2B Fig 127 USB communication via power supply unit PS2 This configuration requires the following connections gt The individual devices are connected with each other via the X3 X4 bus RS485 gt The PC is connected directly to the power supply unit via USB The following requirements must be met for the address selection switches gt Up to 16 devices can be connected to a power supply unit via the RS485 bus An individual address 0 to F must be set for all devices via the address selection Switch gt Up to 8 power supply units can be connected to a PC An individual address 0 to 7 must be set for each power supply unit via the address selection switch gt Devices that are connected to different power supply units can have the same address In this example the FC2 at power 0 and the SD2 at power 1 have the device address 2 The access to the USB communication server in the PC is shared between the different applications In the example above the app
226. hold vibration absorption drivemaster2 User Manual 167 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 168 The parameter indicates the speed in revolutions per minute at which the vibra tion absorption is deactivated when the motor is decelerated gt Braking current The parameter indicates the average braking current in amperes Flux controller In the bottom section of the page a block diagram of the flux controller is displayed The following parameters can be configured gt Reference flux current filter The parameter indicates the filter time of the reference flux current in milliseconds gt Current reference value filter The parameter indicates the filter time of the reference current in milliseconds gt Motor flux delay time The parameter indicates the total delay of the current effect on the flux in milli seconds e g bandwidth of the current controller etc The motor flux delay time is only displayed for synchronous motors Flux Reference Value SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM m Vv On this page you set the parameters of the load and flux compensation for a HSPWM converter H z a x Eg Device overview 2 Parameters F Diagnosis H POO Doc Axis E Flux ref value Qf g Configuration If Monitorings h Analog signals LFlux Load compensation 5x Digital signals Max Flux current fi Encoder emulation 3 82 A Dr Controller Dr Speed controller
227. ialog returns to the first page of the project wizard Finish Exits the project wizard and applies the changed project to the user interface Cancel The project wizard dialog is closed without applying the project 267 14 14 Working with Projects 268 drivemaster2 User Manual 15 15 1 Communication Communication Applications and Server The software drivemaster2 involves several independent applications drivemaster2 arive setup tool hiper endat tool converter setup tool Oscar and SDx Datalogger All these applications do not communicate directly with the devices but they use inde pendent communication programs These are called communication servers One indi vidual communication server is provided for each communication interface At the moment communication servers are implemented for the serial interface RS232 RS485 and for the USB interface The individual applications are communication clients to the communication servers The client applications and the communication servers are connected to each other via the network protocol UDP Thus the client application and the communication server do not need to be installed on the same PC They also can communicate via the network Status Bar The following fields are displayed in the status bar of the application Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI S Fig 123 Status bar at the bottom of the software drivemas
228. ich can be evaluated for diag nosis purposes This log file called S36SerialBusDriver log is created at the start of the bus server It is saved in the same path as the communication server The options in the Logfile menu allow influencing how many entries can be made in the log file drivemaster2 User Manual Communication ES Consider that some options may cause a large size of the log file The complete memory of your hard disk may be filled In addition the performance of the bus server is reduced hereby If you add some options for diagnosis purposes you should remove them later As default only the options Thread ID Timestamp and Init Exit are activated These options create a log file of only a few Kilobytes gt Thread ID The Thread ID is included in every debug output This way the log file provides information on the thread in which the errors occur This setting does not create individual outputs and increases the size of the log file only a little gt Timestamp Every debug output contains a timestamp This way information on the time flow in the bus server are provided This setting does not create individual outputs and increases the size of the log file only a little gt nit Exit Output is generated for initialization and exit of the bus server and new devices This setting creates only a small number of debug outputs which are independent from the amount of communication gt More details The o
229. ifies the maximum possible mechanical speed of the motor This value is also not exceeded by the slip compensation Maximum voltage Vac Specifies the maximum possible motor voltage as RMS value The maximum voltage is even not exceeded during the linearization of the char acteristic curve Number of motor poles DEN Specifies the number of poles in the stator Variable Rated Current You can set limit values for the rated current in the low frequency speed range to ensure smooth startup Open the following dialog window via the button and set the rated current according to the actual frequency speed Variable Rated Current 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 nz Variable Rated Current On PO P1 1 00 2 00 0 300 Open the list box Variable rated current and select the entry On Then you can determine up to 4 levels within the frequency speed range of the motor Click OK to apply the settings 11 4 2 Motor Measurement System This page provides the parameters of the measuring system the connected motor uses The page is divided into a fix and two variable parameter group The settings drivemaster2 User Manual 201 11 P ters of an FC2 arameters of an nmm 202 made in the fixed parameter group Motor measurement system determine whether the variable parameter groups appear Ef Device overview fl Parameters Eg P00 pam converter E f Configuration FP Analog signals Motor measurement system af Digit
230. ing filter The parameter indicates the bandwidth of the measuring system in hertz The system of 2nd order works with a fix damping of D 0 7 Magnetic Alignment Current SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v F4 s B This parameter group is used to configure the alignment for motors with pulse measu ring system or without any measuring system The phasing of the motor is also referred to as magnetic alignment Magnetic alignment current The parameter indicates the current in ampere which is admissible when the motor is phased in The magnetic alignment current should not be higher than the rated current of the motor 10 DANGER Phasing of the motor Some drive configurations do not allow phasing in a motor The reason is that in some cases the brakes must be released and torques are effective If the motor is not able to phase in the commutation is incorrect and thus the control does not work Set up time The parameter indicates the phasing time in milliseconds SineCosine Encoder SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v SD2 SD2S Via this parameter the sine cosine encoder with magnetic alignment EnDat and Hiper face is configured drivemaster2 User Manual 87 10 Parameters of an SD2x 88 INI Lines The parameter indicates the number of signal periods of one mechanical revolution 360 Refer to the encoder data sheet The parameter is indicated in sig
231. ink Displays the actual voltage in the second DC link DC link at the power output stage in volts Amp Temp Displays the current temperature of the power output stage in degree centigrade Amp t Displays the current load of the power output stage in percent Amp Power Displays the current power of the power output stage in kilowatts Motor t Displays the current load of the motor in percent Status The status field displays the current state of the drive For this purpose the status word of the drive is analyzed If there are current errors the error of the highest priority is displayed If there is no current error the saved error of the highest priority is displayed If the drive has been stopped via the quick stop command the event that triggered the quick stop is also displayed drivemaster2 User Manual 215 12 12 Diagnosis 12 3 216 L Drive Actual Values FC2 This page displays all important data that describe the current status of the frequency converter Motor Control 7 Ntarget Nmax Nref Umax Uref UZW1 f Enor memory 0 jHz 2667 Hz 99 jHz 3177 V 266 V 3235 V US Digital inputs y x Digital outputs Analog inputs Uzw2 Analog outputs 287 l Spindle select MSV A Spindle actual values list Servolink 4 monitor 1 3 Aeff WE Object browser Amp Temp Version information 285 c Iphase Current limitation Off 3 329 Aeff State Operation
232. int Acti Ek Set only new time measurement point Ctrl vates a function which allows to set Clear user zero point Ctrl R a measurement point with the Long cursor Ctrl C crosspointer The difference from E View grid Coleg this measurement point to the E current position of the crosspointer id Show tooltips 8 is detected and displayed in the display area Cursor The meas urement point is cleared by deacti vating the menu item gt Set new zero point Moves the zero point of the value and time axis in order to e g detect simple differences quickly By mouse click on the menu item Set new zero point a new zero point can be defined By a second click with the crosspointer on the graphic display the new zero point is determined Then all values refer to the new zero point gt Set only new value measurement point Moves the zero point of the value axis in order to e g detect simple differences quickly By mouse click on the menu item Set only new value measurement point a new zero point can be defined By a second click with the crosspointer on the graphic display the new zero point is determined Then all values refer to the new zero point gt Set only new time measurement point Moves the zero point of the time axis in order to e g detect simple differences quickly By mouse click on the menu item Set only new time measurement point a new zero point can be defined By a second click with the crosspointer on the graphic d
233. ion from 0 to the speed limit v t At v 0 gt 0 gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a break application to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 Variable ramps By means of the function Variable ramps you can set a limit for the mean actual current For this purpose the acceleration is reduced depending on the actual current Typically variable ramps are applied during the start up of pumps or fans gt Off The function is not active the ramps are fix as specified above gt Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is relative to the maximum current For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps gt Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is relative to a fix current value For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps drivemaster2 User Manual 151 10 Parameters of an SD2x Variable Ramps SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 On the page Variable ramps you can parameterize a limit for the mean current Ef Device overview ils Parameters f Configuration Z OO i Drive 3 Power supply l Acceleration 1 Acceleration 2 i Power output stage Motor S Moto
234. iperface and EnDat are registered trademarks gt Hiperface Sick Stegmann Germany gt EnDat Heidenhain Germany NOTICE Wiring of the measuring systems Hiperface or EnDat Incorrect wiring of the measuring system may cause damage and destroy the measuring system Before configuring the Hiperface or the EnDat encoder ensure that the motor and the measuring system are wired correctly For this purpose select a sine cosine encoder with magnetic alignment without Hiperface or EnDat under Parameters Motor measuring system in the arivemaster2 software If the motor moves with this setting you can select the corresponding absolute value encoder Hiperface or EnDat Setup of a sine cosine encoder with Hiperface EnDat When you operate a motor with absolute value encoder for the first time some data that are important for the drive must be read from the Hiperface or EnDat encoder and saved once KJ SIEB amp MEYER AG hiper endat tool V1 6 Build 51 2 9 09 Pow ODrv 0A File Settings SIEB amp MEYER m State Switch On Disabled Serial Number and Program Version Type Label Serial Number Ident Number EnDat Version Type 0xe001 Multi Turn Rotary Transmitter a 20 797 450 538 234 01 2 Supported Alarms 0x0006 Signal Amplitude Position Fault Supported Warnings 0x0004 Control Reserve Illumination Actual Values Clock Count 25 Sig Periods Rev 2048 Actual Position Steps Revolutions
235. ired to operate the communication servers on a remote PC 1 Allow network access in the communication server 2 Start communication server manually Allow Network Access For safety reasons the network access is deactivated as a default and must be acti vated on purpose In order to activate the network access take the following steps Start the communication server and open its main window by mouse click on the symbol in the info area of the taskbar uss S amp M USB Server V2 0 Logfile DNC Trace USB Allow remote access v Use command toggle bit y Tee Status 0 USB Ok USB Performance 0 0 Cmds sec Command count 0 CMD NACKsent 0 Repeat count 0 1 5 Commandbuffer 0 Error count o Port 0x3600 Clients 0 Status E NOME gt Activate the menu item Allow remote access in the menu item Options drivemaster2 User Manual 283 15 Communication 15 5 1 2 15 5 2 15 5 3 284 ty Start the Communication Server Contrary to the local operation the communication servers are not automatically started and terminated during network operation gt Start the required communication server manually on the remote PC via Start Programs SIEB amp MEYER AG gt xxx server sv You can create a shortcut to the respective communication server in the p Startup folder of the remote PC Thus the communication server is started automatically when the PC is started
236. is connected to the drive amplifier 3 Device overview f Parameters 3 Diagnosis g E BE rin sica z g Configuration Drive Motor file Motor type Mi Dower sunt Manufacturer Type Bj Power output stage x T E Open Bautz Synchronous rotative v S Motor measurement syste e secs Designation Motor ID Bs Drive control M406F TT User level rights E Monitorings amp D Analog signals E a Digital signals ffi Encoder emulation Rated current 4 Dr Controller Pakom Motor parameters Pt time Minimum speed Maximum speed Pole pairs Moment of inertia kgm 1000 Voltage constant Phase Phase M Vrms 1000 RPM Torque constant Nm Arms Stator resistance Phase Phase Ohm Fig 20 Parameter page Motor Motor File SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v v s v This parameter group provides different methods to save all motor parameters of a drive amplifier in one motor file mot Later this motor file can be reloaded Open O Open M Via this button you can open an existing motor file Then the parameters contained in that file are displayed on the page Motor For this purpose the dialog Chose your motor file appears The arrow button located on the right of the button allows to open one of the last four used motor files directly The dialog does not appear Save as Save as Via this button all parameters of the page Moto
237. is included in every debug output This way the log file provides information on the thread in which the errors occur This setting does not create individual outputs and increases the size of the log file only a little gt Timestamp Every debug output contains a timestamp This way information on the time flow in the bus server are provided This setting does not create individual outputs and increases the size of the log file only a little gt nit Exit Output is generated for initialization and exit of the bus server and new devices This setting creates only a small number of debug outputs which are independent from the amount of communication gt More details The other log file options create more information and cause larger data amounts Especially in combination with communication records this may result in large data amounts gt Client lt gt Server communication Any communication between the application and the communication server is logged The amount of data depends on the amount of communication and may increase especially during long operating times of the communication server gt Server lt gt Device communication Any communication between the devices and the communication server is logged The amount of data depends on the amount of communication and may increase especially during long operating times of the communication server gt Log debug events Additional information on internal processes is lo
238. is indi cated in revolutions per minute the speed of linear motors in millimeters per second E38 Shutdown threshold The parameter indicates the threshold value of the speed at which the error E38 is trig gered E38 Window time The parameter indicates the time of the E38 window in milliseconds If the speed is within the E38 window for the total window time the error E38 Actual speed value greater than overspeed threshold is triggered and the drive amplifier is switched off Error E39 Tracking error SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v Via this parameter group the warning and error messages for a tracking error can be configured E39 Shutdown threshold The parameter indicates the threshold value for the tracking error in millimeters at which the tracking error window is left E39 Window time The parameter indicates the time of the tracking error window in milliseconds f the tracking error is outside of the tracking error window for the total tracking error window time the error E39 Tracking error monitoring and motor slowdown is triggered and the drive amplifier is switched off drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x tracking error window tame no tracking error tracking error W11 Window The parameter indicates the maximum tracking error before the tracking error window is left and a warning message is triggered If the tracking error is out of
239. is to warn the user saying that the control is now turned over to the PC in order to prevent that this action is carried out unintentionally 3 drive setup tool 9 Attention drive setup tool is the command source now wu Vice versa the following dialog warns the user when deactivating that the control is now turned over from the PC again 3 drive setup tool 9 Attention drive setup tool is no longer the command source J Enable Operation Enable operation means that current is applied to the connected motor You can switch on the controller via this button as soon as the drive setup is activated and no error occurred Start This button starts the selected function and loads all current input values into the device The Start button can not be used until the controller is switched on Error Reset This button can only be used when there is an error in the device As soon as this error is removed it is saved and can be reset by click on the button Error Reset hiper endat tool The tool Aiper endat too is used to display and set a sine cosine encoder with Hiper face or EnDat interface This type of encoder provides a digital channel in addition to the analog sine cosine channel Via the digital channel the absolute value of the encoder can be read Furthermore the product data resolution serial number etc of the encoder are displayed in the Aiper endat tool drivemaster2 User Manual Tools ES H
240. isplay the new zero point is determined Then all values refer to the new zero point gt A Clear user zero point Resets the user defined zero points of the value and time axis gt Long cursor Switches the extended crosspointer of the cursor on or off If the extended crosspointer is active the graphic display may be delayed gt View grid Activates or deactivates the grid of the graphic display gt Colors Opens a submenu with elements of the user interface to change their indi vidual color gt Show tooltips Activates or deactivates the pop up window that displays the func tion of each button as soon as you pass the mouse pointer over it In the graphic display the tooltip indicates the actual position of the cursor drivemaster2 User Manual 13 4 1 3 13 4 1 4 13 4 2 Menu Communication gt Normal mode The curves are perma nently recorded and displayed gt Normal mode settings Indicates the amount of data to be transmitted and thus the speed of screen layout The smaller the amount of data to be transmitted the lower the resolution of the display The following settings are available 12 37 87 100 gt Single shot The curves are recorded and displayed once Communication Help Mormal mode Mormal Mode Settings Single shot Tools F8 b F9 Get settings from the servo Get graphic data from the servo Select communication address gt Get setting
241. it 3 PDO Selection Bit 0 Bit3 LastvalidByte IndexBitO 12 13 Reserved Bit 4 PDO Selection Bit 1 Bit 4 Last valid Byte Index Bit 1 Bit 5 PDO Selection Bit 2 Bit 5 Reserved 14 15 Reserved Byte 18 19 Byte 20 23 Info Service Index 0x020D Service Data 0x00011001 Cyde counter NMT Status Process monitoring data active Fig 113 Diagnosis page DNC bus monitor At the top of the page you select the physical interface for the DNC communication If you select the option Off the DNC communication is not monitored The two tab pages display the received and the transmitted data The tab pages are structured likewise In the top section of the tab page the content of the received or the transmitted telegram is displayed byte by byte in the hexadecimal format Below that you find information on the set bits in the several bytes In the bottom section of the page the state of the NMT state machine is displayed For further information refer to the SIEB amp MEYER documentation Drive System SD2 DNC 8 Byte Telegram Object Browser The object browser is a debug and diagnosis tool with access to the device internal display of selected parameters and states in the drive These individual objects are drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis combined and saved in a device dependent object directory and are subject to different access rights Eg Device overview g 3 Parameters Diagnosis Simi Devi
242. ithin the skip bandwidth 40000 60000 rpm are suppressed Skip bandwidth 60000 50000 40000 N Ref controller Max limit The parameter indicates the maximum possible reference speed in revo utions per minute Min limit The parameter indicates the minimum possible reference speed in revolutions per minute NMin mode Via this parameter you can select the reference speed to be driven in case a target 10 value below the minimum speed has been selected Mode N Ref 0 n ref out M nin n ref in min drivemaster2 User Manual 173 10 Parameters of an SD2x 174 Mode N Ref N Min hysteresis ES It is not possible to reverse the direction of the motor rotation when the target value is below the determined minimum speed Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference speed value They are indicated in milliseconds The parameter displays the time required for reaching the speed scaling from standstill A ramp of e g 12000 ms together with a speed scaling of 120000 rpm 10000 1 min makes a maximum acceleration of 167 1 s or s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the acceleration from O to the speed limit v t At v t gt 0 gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a break application to speed 0 v t At v t lt 0 gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop to speed
243. itorings Messages Warnings Errors fly Analog signals 1 Digital signals ay Encoder emulation Dr Controller On the individual pages you can parameterize the monitoring functions drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2 TH arameters oT an X 10 3 1 Messages On this page the windows to trigger drive messages are parameterized Ef Device overview E Parameters 2 Diagnosis Faq POO DocAris g Configuration 1 Monitorings Message M12 Speed zero Message M10 Position reached I MI2 Window 10 00 RPM MIO Window 0 0100 mm tors af Analog signals M12 Window time 10 ms M10 Window time 1 ms xi Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller Message M10 Ref value reached Ref value reached Window constant in RPM v M10 Window 100 00 RPM M10 Window time 10 ms Ref value reached at Speed zero Fig 26 Parameter page Messages Message M12 Speed zero SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v 4 4 P4 Via this parameter group the window for the message Speed zero can be set 10 M12 Window The parameter indicates the maximum speed at which the Speed zero window is reached M12 Window time The parameter indicates the width of the Speed zero window If the speed is within the window for the total window time the message M12 Speed zero is triggered
244. ive function SERVO VECTOR when a measuring system is connected and parameterized M10 Window The parameter indicates the maximum position tolerance at which the Position reached window is reached drivemaster2 User Manual 10 3 2 Parameters of an SD2x M10 Window time The parameter indicates the width of the Position reached window If the position error is within the window for the total window time the message Position reached is trig gered position Window time Position reached gt Ref position window Reference position Ref position window Message 0 Warnings On this page the thresholds to trigger warning messages are parameterized The hard ware documentation of the device provides a list of all warning messages possible EF Device overview 5 Parameters F Diagnosis E POO Doc Axisl E Warnings 2 g Configuration 1 Monitorings Warnings power output stage W24 Warning Current Messages n meem E WO4 Load 90 0 W24 Mode I Motor gt Threshold no load current v Errors 100 96 7 07 Arms uu V Analog signals WO6 Temperature 60 W24 Warning threshold i Arms adj Digital signals Shutdown temperature 75 C Encoder emulation WO8 Over voltage 380 0 W24 Window time Dr Controller Over voltage limit 410 0 Vd WO9 Under voltage 50 0 W24 Filter time Under voltage limit 40 0 Vd
245. izard This wizard helps you install software for LibUsb Win32 SM2 Device 01 24 2005 0 1 8 1 If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended O Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Fig 2 Dialog window Found New Hardware Wizard Select Install the software automatically Recommended and click Next The driver is now installed Click Finish to finish the installation cS The installation process must be repeated for every USB port Besides the driver must be installed again if you modify the structure of the USB tree e g by using a USB hub drivemaster2 User Manual 19 Installation 3 4 1 3 4 1 1 3 4 1 2 20 INI USB Driver Troubleshooting If the USB connection to the drive can not be established the USB driver installation was possibly not successful In order to check the driver installation start Device Manger on your PC e g execute the file devmgmt msc When the installation was successful the Device Manager tool of the Windows opera ting system displays the drive as LibUSB device as shown in the figure 4 LibUSB Win32 Devices LibUsb 32 64 bit SM2 Device LibUSB Device Not Detected If the drive is not indicated in Device Manager as shown in the figure above but appears by means of a que
246. l Exits the dialog without applying the new device drivemaster2 User Manual Add device s02 drive 036 21 10DDC Address switch 3 of Add device X Cancel 14 265 14 Working with Projects 266 3 4 5 gt Edit device Opens a dialog to edit the selected device or device address Edit device You can change the type the number and the address of the Device type 502 drive selected device ee 036 21 40DC Apply changes Exits the dialog and applies the changes in the project v Apply changes x Cancel Cancel Exits the dialog without applying the changes gt Copy device Copies the selected device including all drives and parameter sets into the clipboard 5 gt Duplicate device Copies the selected device including all drives and parameter sets and pastes it to the next vacant place in the project tree gt Delete device Deletes the selected device Address switch 1 Select drive action Here you can edit a drive gt Copy drive Copies the selected drive including all parameter sets into the clipboard 5 Select parameter set action Here you can edit a parameter set gt Add parameter set Opens a dialog to add a parameter set to the selected drive Edit the name and the number of the new parameter set As parameter set number the soft ware sets automatically the first number available X Cancel Add Exits the dialog and applies
247. l Maxrated current 10 00 A 7 07 Arms User level rights gr Mocitoriage Peak current 40 00 A 28 28 Arms 2 000 s EM Analog signals E Digital signals 8 Target values Encoder emulation Dr Controller Drive function type SERVO VECTOR Identification Parameter set Drive name servo drive M406F 06 05 2015 Drive function E E B1 E RH 10 00 45 Comment parameter set for test motor 1 001 4 Wy D Fig 17 Parameter page Drive Drive Selection SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 y P4 v This field displays the characteristics of the selected power electronics of the drive amplifier This parameter group is write protected Drive designation The parameter indicates the general designation type of the used drive electronics If the user interface is not updated and thus can not recognize the drive question marks are displayed instead of the drive designation The button Edit project opens the project wizard to change the device or the entire project see section 14 5 1 2 Edit Devices p 265 When you edit an online project all parameter sets should be initialized in the project If this is not the case the message Uninitialized parameter sets appears Click OK to confirm the message Thus all parameter sets are read from the devices Afterwards the project wizard will open Voltage range The parameter specifies the electric
248. l of HSBLOCK FPAM operation Eg Device overview fa Parameters im mn POO FPAM drive i Controller 2 t g Configuration E F Monitorings fr Analog signals t 2d Digital signals H Encoder emulation amp 3r Controller 4c Ref current filter f Current controller lc Speed ref values Dr Speed controller Start up M Motor potentiometer Current reference filter Ramp generator Speed controller Fig 53 Parameter page Controller for HSBLOCK FPAM operation In the drive function HSBLOCK FPAMyou set the control characteristics via the pages Reference current filter Current controller Speed reference values and Speed controller For FPAM operation sensorless with EMF voltage measurement the page Start up is provided additionally Speed Reference Values SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x On the page Speed ref values you can parameterize the reference value generator Efi Device overview ils Parameters POO FPAM drive Speed ref values 7 f Configuration ag Monitorings h Analog signals ad Digital signals N Ref N Ref controller NY Motor potentiometer s zE pP m y fl Encoder emulation AZ N r Controller i Direction lock Skip velocity 1 Max Limit Max Acc
249. lications drivemaster2 and drive setup too are running 278 drivemaster2 User Manual Communication Connection example with USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 In the example 3 devices are connected to the PC via the converter PC SD2 SD2 03621xx 03621xx USB gt RS232 485 9 Converter 050201 Power 0 USB UDP Port 0x3600 Pow 0 Drv 0A Pow 0 Drv 1A Pow 0 Drv 0B Pow 0 Drv 1B Pow 0 Drv 2A Fig 128 USB communication via USB RS232 485 Converter 050201 This configuration requires the following connections gt The individual devices are connected to the converter via the X3 X4 bus RS485 connection gt The PC is connected directly to the converter via USB The following requirements must be met for the address selection switches gt Up to 16 devices can be connected to the converter via the RS485 bus An indi vidual address 0 to F must be set for all devices via the address selection switch gt Since the converter has no proper address selection switch it behaves like a power supply unit with the address 0 during the communication Thus only one converter can be connected to the PC In addition to the converter you can not connect a power supply unit with the address 0 to the PC The access to the USB communication server in the PC is shared between the different applications In the example above the applications drive
250. logger Opens the application SDx Datalogger in a new window Using the application SDx Datalogger up to four parameters can be recorded over a longer period of time Parameter Code Opens a dialog window indicating the encrypted parameter code A parameter code is provided for each parameter set Via this code the SIEB amp MEYER service staff can read the according parameter set out or decode the passwords in case of an emergency e g password loss Oscar Fiz drive setup tool Fil hiper endat tool F10 SDx Datalogger w T Parameter Code ES When one of the applications except Parameter Code is started it commu nicates with the device currently selected in the device overview If another device is selected in the device overview the new address will not be sent to the application In this case the application must be closed and restarted Menu Help drivemaster2 Manual Opens the user manual for the software drivemaster2 as PDF file Help User Level Setup instruction Displays the available setup D duemssted Moral instructions for the different drive functions These E are stored as PDF files You can open the desired manual with one click Hardware Description gt Setup instruction y Hardware description Displays the available hard D info ware descriptions for the different devices These i are stored as PDF files You can open the desired amp Check for updates manual with one click Info Di
251. lue Zero data telegrams displays the number of zero data telegrams which occurred since the communication was started After zero data telegram number 65535 there will be an overflow By click on the button Error reset the two counters are reset to the value O SERVOLINK 4 State The field displays the SERVOLINK 4 status word 228 drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis 12 16 2 Reference values The tab page Reference values allows analyzing the content of the drive s receive buffer E Device mm ds Parameters 4 Diagnosis E m POO J ger KS 2 10 80 SERVOLINK 4 monitor 77 Tea Dave actis values Configuration Reference values Actual values dl Errors and wamings E Error memory Receive buffer Reference values Position measurement system 95 Digital inputs Bse o fo s s e 7 8 3 wo n f o w s e Digital outputs Value 0x02 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x90 0x00 OxB7 0x05 0x00 0x00 0x31 02x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 FE Sine Cosine Display Velocity Mode 1 Demand Values 4Z Delta Z Measurement E 23 Analog inputs FS Reference values S cus PT nonito v Enable Voltage P L CAN basman C Quick Stop Current Torque Limit incr iE Object browser C Enable Operation Version information CI Mode 0 C Mode 1 C Mode 2 Service Channel ota ne al O res O res Service Control Word a i C Toggle FunctO Functi Last value 0 o Ea S O Last value 1 res O res O res vl 17 Telegr Sion St
252. ly applied from the measuring system Thus no time is lost by searching for the actual speed value ES The spindle only coasts to standstill on controller switch off when this reac tion is configured on the parameter page Drive control in Behaviors in case of Controller off command Select the entry Shutdown The motor coasts to standstill in the list box After controller switch off please do not deactivate the motor relays until the message M01 Message power output stage ready is reset V f Characteristic Curve SD2xHSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v This page provides up to 8 bending points to edit the V f characteristic curve For checking the characteristic curve is displayed graphically in the top of the window The maximum output voltage of the motor and the power output stage are displayed in the figure to provide assistance during parameterization EG Device overview js Parameters A TTE Ee g Configuration 1 0 E F Monitorings Characteristic curve Ey Analog signals m add Digital signals Motor max voltage 230 Vac Max powerstage output voltage 230 Vac Ej Encoder emulation Er Controller f Current controller i Winding detection ts Variable ramps Dr Speed controller lex Speed ref values ic Characteraic arve b Compensation E t Motor potentiometer 0 300 400 500 600 700 800 Frequency Hz a gt Copy af Check J Bending point 1
253. ly unit restarts with pre loading of the intermediate circuit drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of a PS2 Ballast Resistor PS2 This parameter group provides parameters to enter the technical data of the ballast resistor that must be connected to the power supply unit For the values of the ballast resistor refer to the respective data sheet of the manufac turer Power The parameter indicates the rated power of the used ballast resistor in watts Refer to the data sheet of the manufacturer for this value Value of resistance The parameter indicates the nominal resistance of the resistor in ohms Depending on the device the resistance can be set within a preset range If the entered value is not in that range the parameter is reset to the previous value Time for max power The parameter indicates the maximum period of time in seconds in which the peak power can be supplied continuously om The parameters are also used for the t calculator of the ballast resistor If the power converted in the ballast resistor is too much the I t calculator trig gers the error E04 Ballast circuit load Chopper I t DC link capacity PS2 This parameter serves to indicate possible external capacities at a power supply unit These result from devices or separate capacitors which are connected to the DC link External The parameter indicates the additional electrical capacity in ufarads and is used for the pre load monitoring
254. master2 and drive setup tool are running 15 3 2 Software Configuration After you have started the software drivemaster2 click the button Setup connec tion to the device to open the dialog for the communication Later you can also select the menu Settings Setup connection to the device to call the dialog t Setup connection to the device Setup communication interface 9 Local connection O Network connection Select connection Type IGNES F Keep project connect F O Search devices connect X Cancel drivemaster2 User Manual 279 15 15 Communication 15 4 15 4 1 280 Select the settings as shown in the screen shot Click on the button Search devices connect to apply the settings and create an online project 4 Then the corresponding communication server is started and the result is displayed in the status bar If successful the following entries should appear Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 rA The created project Connection example with power supply unit p 278 is structure as follows Eg Device overview 3 PS2 0 036 21 90F oH SD2 0 036 21 12E1F fh Div OA 036 21 12EF A Bi Drv 0B 03621 12IF B SD2 1 03621 10EEF fh Div 14 036 21 10EF A Bi Drv 1B 03621 10EF B lj FC2 2 021 90 100IF A PS2 1 036 21 91C SD2 0 036 21 10DDC fh Drv 04 036 211000 A Bi Drv 0B 036 21 10DC B The created project C
255. me The parameter indicates the maximum length of time in milliseconds in which a heart beat message must be sent to the drive during operation If the drive does not receive a message within this time an error is triggered PDO 0 PDO 1 SD2x DNC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 4 drivemaster2 User Manual 97 Parameters of an SD2x INI The tab pages PDO 0 and PDO 1 display the assignment of the individual drive objects functions in the DNC telegram PDO 0 Receive PDO COB ID 0x200 Node ID Byte 0 1 Control word Byte 2 3 Speed ref value Byte 4 5 Free Byte 6 7 Free Transmit PDO COB ID 0x180 Node ID Byte 0 1 Status word Transmission type Byte2 3 Speed act value Disabled Byte 4 5 Drive error Byte 6 7 Current act value There is only this one PDO in the DNC 8 Byte Telegram Receive PDO The Receive PDO displays the received data The data can not be changed Transmit PDO The Transmit PDO displays the transmitted data Here you can set when and in which form the data are sent The following settings are available gt Disabled No data are sent 10 gt At receive of RPDO 0 The drive sends the adjacent data when requested by a Receive PDO from the master 10 2 8 User Level Rights On this page you define the access rights of the different users Detailed information on the user level
256. meter is independent from the rated current of the power output stage and is not limited by it The rated current is also used in the P t calculator of the motor By means of the button t a dialog to set a variable rated current is opened see section Variable Rated Current p 81 Peak current A Ams Specifies the peak current of the motor The parameter is independent from the peak current of the power output stage but it is the top limit for the limi tation of the current controller The peak current is also used in the l t calcu lator of the motor lt time S Indicates the maximum time during which the peak current is allowed to flow once out of the cold state This parameter is also used for the l t calculator When the device is overloaded the t calculator triggers the error message E29 Motor load too high Motor I t and switches the drive amplifier off Minimum speed RPM Specifies the minimum possible reference speed of the motor The param eter limits indirectly the reference value of the speed control Maximum speed Specifies the maximum possible mechanical speed of the motor The parameter is the top limit for the limitation of the speed controller Rated speed RPM Specifies rated speed of the motor during continuous operation S1 opera tion Rated frequency Hz Specifies rated frequency of the motor during continuous operation S1 operation Pole pairs Indicates the number of pole pairs in the stator winding an
257. meter set is opened in the lowest user level drivemaster2 User Manual 41 Password Protection and User Rights 6 2 6 3 42 ES In order to write a parameter set to the device you must enter the password of the Admin or the OEM level depending on the assigned rights for param eter download before you start the download After writing the parameter is finished the password saved in the new parameter set is valid Switch User Level In order to switch to another user level you must log in using the password of the according user level For this purpose open the dialog Login via the menu Settings gt User gt Log in Password S Login X Cancel Fig 14 Log n dialog Enter the password of the desired user level Jv Ifthe password is correct the software switches to the according user level Via the menu Settings User gt Log out you can leave the current user level Then the software switches to the lowest user level Assigning User Rights You can assign passwords and user rights on the parameter page User Level Rights When you are logged in as Admin you can change the rights and passwords of all users When you are logged in as OEM you can change the rights of the User level and your password if the corresponding right is assigned For the level User this page is write protected drivemaster2 User Manual T SIEB amp MEYER AG d Password Protection and User Rights Project Edi
258. mp Parameter set Parameter set Parameter set Power supply unit Drive 1A Drive 1B i36 36 136 Motor data Motor data BH mot mot Fig 122 File types and their relation to each another drivemaster2 User Manual Working with Project TH orKing WI rojects 14 2 Saving a Project gt To save a project select the menu Project Save project Save project as The dialog window Save project is opened SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 Save project Project base folder C Programme SM_AG drivemaster2 SM_Smp E Project name Projekt 1 Project file C drivemaster2 SM_Smp Projekt 1 Projekt 1 smp Help f Ok X Cancel Select the Project default folder If the path does not exist yet it will be gener ated Use the button E to select an existing path n the list box Project name you can select an existing project or enter a new project name The complete file name of the project is generated automatically on the basis of the default path for the projects and the project name in the corresponding project directory If the project directory does not exist yet it will be generated Click on the button OK The project selection dialog will be terminated and the project is saved If you click on the button Cancel the project selection dialog will be terminated and the project is not saved 14 3 Reading a Project gt To read a project select the men
259. mpensation Dr Speed controller NM Motor potentiometer V f curve Speed controller Slip compensation Current monitoring Load compensation Fig 71 Parameter page Controller for HSPAM VF converters 171 P ters of an SD2 s arameters oft an X nm In the drive function HSPAM VF you set the control characteristics via the pages Current controller Speed reference values VF Characteristic curve Compensa tion and Speed controller For sensorless operation the speed controller is turned off and the page Speed controller is not displayed Speed Reference Values SD2x HSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM E s On the page Speed ref values you can parameterize the reference value generator Ef Device overview I5 Parameters E FA P00 HSPAM drive Speed ref values Q a G Bj Configuration t Monitorings iv Analog signals ad Digital signals 1 NRef N Ref controller amp Nj Motor potentiometer a m yn x Encoder emulation g JN Pr Controller Rm d 5 Pm A i Speed ref values Direction lock Skip velocity 1 Max Limit Max Acceleration ramp ts Variable ramps Positive 10000 00 RPM 60000 00 RPM 6000 ms Dr Speed controller Skip range 1 Min Limit Max Deceleration ramp Current controller 1000 00 RPM 0 00 RPM 6000 ms jz VF Characteristic curve Direction of positive E Compens
260. n percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below Speed Controller SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM v On this page you can set the parameters of the speed controller for SVC operation 10 Ef Device overview fl Parameters E i Pon tea ive E fl Configuration E E Monitorings iv Analog signals 2d Digital signals gm Encoder emulation Dr Controller lc Speed ref values Ref val 1 Current ref val Amplification Kp 0 601 Speed controller 4 Ref current filter ff Current controller Start up Integration time Tr 26 84 ms Fig 48 Parameter page Speed controller drivemaster2 User Manual 141 10 Parameters of an SD2x 142 INI Amplification Kp The parameter specifies the proportional amplification of the speed controller in dependance on the speed scaling and the peak current of the power output stage The reaction time of the speed control circuit is reduced when a high proportional amplifi cation is selected If the amplification value is set too high the speed control circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification o
261. n the check box for heartbeat producer is activated the communication via CAN bus is monitored After the drive has finished booting the drive transmits heartbeat protocols containing its node ID to the host at regular intervals Via the parameter Heartbeat Producer Time you can enter the time interval between two heartbeat protocols in milliseconds When heartbeat monitoring is active node guarding is not possible Heartbeat Consumer Heartbeat Consumer Time When the check box for heartbeat consumer is activated the communication via CAN bus is monitored During operation state operational the drive now expects to receive heartbeat protocols from the host at regular intervals Via the parameter Heartbeat Consumer Time you can enter the time interval between two heartbeat protocols in milliseconds If the drive does not receive a heartbeat protocol within this time an error is triggered When heartbeat monitoring is active node guarding is not possible PDO 0 PDO 1 SD2x CAN Bus SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 SD2S y SD2 SD2B SD2S The tab pages PDO 0 and PDO 1 display the assignment of the individual drive objects functions in the CAN bus PDO 0 Receive PDO COB ID 0x200 Node ID Byte 0 1 Control word Byte 2 3 Speed ref value Byte 4 5 Free Byte 6 7 Free Transmit PDO COB ID 0x180 Node ID Byte 0 1 Status word Transmission type Byte 2 3 Speed
262. n time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the position controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The value is the integral action component of the position controller The integration time Ti is indicated in milliseconds The smaller the integration time the smaller the residual control deviation of the position control If the amplification value is set too small the position control circuit starts vibrating Limitation The parameter indicates the maximum value the position controller can generate This is used to limit the portion of the position control at the reference speed The reference speed and its limitation are indicated in counts per second drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Type of position control The parameter activates the position control and specifies the measuring system to be used for position feedback The following entries can be selected in the list box gt No position control gt Position control with motor measuring system gt Position control with encoder 0 position measured by external measuring system The parameter Factor pos measurement system is displayed For the operating mode Electronic gear you must select the entry Position control with encoder 0 Factor pos measurement system This parameter defines the relation between the position unit of the position control and the position control of an external position measuri
263. na periods per mechanical revolution Interpolation factor The parameter indicates the resolution per signal period The unit of the interpolation factor is ncrements per signal period ES The total resolution of the measuring system is indicated additionally to the parameter and is calculated as follows Resolution signal periods per revolution x interpolation factor The total resolution of the measuring system is calculated from the parameters Lines and Interpolation factor It is indicated additionally to the parameter The unit of the interpolation factor is ncrements per signal period om The parameters Magnetic alignment current and Set up time must be set only for synchronous motors Magnetic alignment current The parameter indicates the current in ampere which is admissible when the motor is phased in The magnetic alignment current should not be higher than the rated current of the motor DANGER Phasing of the motor Some drive configurations do not allow phasing in a motor The reason is that in some cases the brakes must be released and torques are effective If the motor is not able to phase in the commutation is incorrect and thus the control does not work Set up time The parameter indicates the phasing time in milliseconds Tachometer SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s In the parameter group Tachometer you can determine the speed measuring system for HSB
264. ndling the communication server is not necessary The server runs inde pendently in the background Open the main window for the display of an error diag nosis The operation of the bus server is always controlled via the symbol in the info area The context menu of the communication server is displayed by right click on the symbol The following entries can be selected gt Show Normal Displays the hidden main window gt Quit Terminates the communication server The main window is displayed by left mouse click on the symbol It is hidden by another mouse click USB Communication Server The symbol of the USB communication server in the info area of the taskbar changes with the number of detected USB devices Devices with direct USB connection as well as devices connected via USB gt RS232 485 Converter 050201 are detected as USB devices The following symbols are displayed The communication server has not detected a USB device E The communication server has detected one USB device B The communication server has detected two USB devices The communication server has detected more than two USB devices Main Window The main window of the USB communication server is structured as follows vss S amp M USB Server V2 0 File Options Logfile DNC Trace USB Devices Name Ser No M MibusbO 0001 0x6100 0x3410 v1 01 MibusbO 0000 0x6100 0x3410 00000051 UDP USB Performance 54 0 Cmds sec Command count 22
265. ng system The position of the external position measuring system is measured in increments Posftion contrgller esolution drivemaster2 Displays and Configuration X Position unit Speed unit Acceleration unit Position controller Position controller Position controller esolution resolution resolution Drive Ref value Position generator ref value Position control Speed control current control Speed Position ref value actual value Voltage uorfnjosas I Ja onugo uonisog Position controller Inverter resqlution Type of position control Increments 0 No positon control 1 Position control with motor measurement system 2 Position control with encoder 0 Fig 43 Principle of the position control Winding Detection SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 m drivemaster2 User Manual 135 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x Ef Device overview i Parameters z m P00 servo drive i Winding detection 77 a Configuration FY Monitorings k Analog signals Type of identification Identification by voltage jump x af Digital signals L isi J i Encoder emulation Identification voltage 10 0 v 4G Electronic gear Dr Controller Identification curre
266. ng the software User Level Indicates the current user level see p 41 drivemaster2 User Manual 29 Description of the User Interface 5 3 30 3 4 5 6 gt New version available Opens the update dialog see p 39 This button is only displayed when a new software version of arivemaster2 is available Tool bar Using the buttons here you can directly access frequently used functions of the program menu When you move the mouse pointer over a button of the tool bar a note indicating the function of this tool button is displayed for a short time The field to the right of the symbols indicates the parameter set currently in process Tab pages The tab pages structure the operating functions of the software for the used hardware thematically There is a directory tree in the tab page The directory tree structures the content of the selected tab page in nodes and sub branches When you select a branch the respective page is displayed in the display area 5 gt Edit project Opens the project wizard There you can edit the devices in the project see p 265 Display area Here the page selected on the tab page is displayed Status bar The status bar displays information on the program and project status gt Project Name of the current project Online Project The project was created with the function Searching for connected devices and has not been saved under a new name yet
267. ngs Hardware f Eror memory Position measurement systems Device Name 036 21 40DC Drive Name 036 21 40DC A BE eaii wx Digital inputs Serial Number 1 000 251 956 Voltage Class 325 Vdc A Digital outputs HE Sine Cosine Display Delivery Date 23 06 2009 Peak Current 7 Time 14 14 Aims 5 sec AZ Delta Z Measurement Device Version p Analog inputs 4ex Analog outputs SERVOLINK 4 monitor Software CAN bus monitor BFE Object browser Parameter Firmware Logic Coding BIOS Version information Name Version Date Time 220320107105315 Comment ISD2S Test Functions Export As HTML File Fig 116 Diagnosis page Version Information Hardware In this field the following version information and performance data of the hardware are displayed gt Device Name Indicates the general designation of the device gt Serial Number Indicates the SIEB amp MEYER serial number of the device The serial number is always related to the device and not to the drive gt Delivery Date Indicates the date of delivery by SIEB amp MEYER AG gt Device Version Indicates the version of the hardware gt Drive name Specifies the general designation type of the used electronics of the drive If a version of arivemaster2 is not updated and can not detect the drive question marks are displayed instead of the drive designation gt Voltage range Specifies the electric strength
268. nstallation Installation This chapter contains the following information gt list with the hardware requirements to be met by the PC gt information on how to install and uninstall the software drivemaster2 gt information on how to install the USB driver ES Install the software drivemaster2 before connecting a device to the PC PC Hardware Requirements The PC hardware to which the software will be installed must meet the following requirements Processor Pentium 3 or higher 1 GHz Operating system Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 32 64 bit Windows 8 32 64 bit Graphics card Windows compatible SVGA resolution Color Drive CD drive Hard disc free memory size at least 500 Mbyte Main storage at least 1 GByte Interfaces a free serial interface COM or a USB port Install orivemasterZ2 CS If there are any applications from the software package drivemaster2 installed on the PC you must close these before starting the installation These are the applications drivemaster2 communication server drive setup tool converter setup tool hiper endat tool SDx Datalogger and Oscar ES You need administrator rights to install the software Take the following steps to install orivemaster2 Installation from CD ROM Insert the CD ROM with the software arivemaster2 in the CD ROM drive of your computer Change to the CD ROM drive and open the folder PCSOFTWARE Installation from Internet Download the latest version of t
269. nt 2 00 Arms 4I Position controller 1 8 9 Dr Speed controller Time constant 1 0 ms le Current feed forward EF Ref current filter f Current controller 5 Winding detection Fig 44 Parameter page Winding detection ES At present only special firmware supports the functions winding detection The motor winding can be detected via voltage jumps For this purpose select the entry Identification by voltage jump in the list box Type of identification The parameters Identification current and Time constant describe the reaction of the motor winding to a voltage jump with Identification voltage Set these parameters accordingly 10 10 2 Controller Parameters for SVC Operation The page Controller displays a block diagram showing the functional principal of SVC operation El Device overview fl Parameters Bg POO SVC drive E Controller Q t g Configuration Current Speed controller anis a Monitorings 4 4 Analog signals 2d Digital signals Encoder emulation a v ETE 12 Speed ref values Dr Speed controller 42 Ref current filter ff Curent controller df Startup Current reference filter Current measurement Motor measurement system Fig 45 Parameter page Controller for SVC operation 136 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x
270. nt is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes Bandwidth current controller The current is controlled via a status controller The dynamics of the status controller are determined via its bandwidth in hertz If the bandwidth is set too small the current controller dynamics are too low i e the current control works rather slowly If the bandwidth is set too great the current controller may become unstable In this case the drive is switched off due to the error E45 Short circuit in power output stage A typical bandwidth is 1500 Hz CS If the error E45 is triggered the bandwidth must be reduced to 1100 Hz or possibly to 800 Hz Bandwidth observer A voltage observer is used to determine the commutation The dynamics of the voltage observer are determined via its bandwidth in hertz If the bandwidth is set too small the observer dynamics are too low i e the voltage observer works rather slowly If the bandwidth is set too great the observer may become unstable In this case the drive is switched off due to the error E45 Short circuit in power output stage A typical bandwidth is 2000 Hz om If the error E45 is triggered the bandwidth must be reduced to 1500 Hz or possibly to 1100 Hz Start up SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM s In the low speed range it is not possible to determine the commutation for sensorless vector control That means the commutation can not be
271. nterclockwise rotation CCW The direction of rotation set in the software should match the actual rotation direction of the motor If this is not the case two motor phases must be exchanged Direction lock If only one direction of the motor is permitted you can lock the other direction via this parameter The following settings are available gt None Both positive and negative speed values are passed to the motor gt Positive Positive speed values are not passed to the motor gt Negative Negative speed values are not passed to the motor Skip bandwidth By means of a skip bandwidth you can prevent that definite speeds are driven for a long time These speeds might be e g resonances of a machine drivemaster2 User Manual 137 Parameters of an SD2x FE Example gt Skip velocity 50000 rpm gt Skip range 10000 rpm gt max admissible speed below skip speed 40000 rpm gt min admissible speed above skip speed 60000 rpm Speed reference values within the skip bandwidth 40000 60000 rpm are suppressed Skip bandwidth 60000 50000 40000 N Ref controller Mex limit The parameter indicates the maximum possible reference speed in revo utions per minute Min limit The parameter indicates the minimum possible reference speed in revolutions per minute NMin mode Via this parameter you can select the reference speed to be driven in case a target value below the minimum speed has be
272. nternal ballast resistor of the frequency converter The values of the internal ballast resistor are read from the device and write protected Resistance The parameter indicates the nominal resistance of the resistor in ohms Rated power The parameter indicates the rated power of the resistor in waits Peak power The parameter indicates the maximum possible power of the resistor in wafts drivemaster2 User Manual 189 11 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 1 3 190 INI Time for peak power The parameter indicates the maximum period of time in seconds in which the peak power can be supplied continuously Power Output Stage On this page the parameters of the power output stage of a frequency converter are configured El Device overview fs Parameters B POO pam converter 5 Power output stage Q B g Configuration QD Drive Currents DC link E Power supply Power output stage E Rated current 12 00 A Voltage Ly Drive control E poii Max rated current A Undervoltage tz x Digital signals tz Motor configuration 1 18 00 15 000_ Peak current 18 00 15 000 A s Overvoltage x Motor configuration 2 mg Shutdown temperatures Max heat sink temperature C Max ambient temperature ac Choke Internal inductance 0 000 mH Fig 81 Parameter page Power output stage Currents FC2 This parameter group provides parameters to configure the maximum admissible curr
273. ntroller again Enable zero pulse The button Enable zero pulse enables the zero pulse for one revolution or motor period When the mark is reached the zero pulse is displayed in the field Zero Pulse Position The fields of the positive and negative limit switch indicate the positions of the point in time when the negative edge occurred at the corresponding input Pos Neg limit switch position The fields of the positive and negative limit switch indicate the positions of the point in time when the positive or negative edge occurred at the corresponding input drivemaster2 User Manual 219 12 12 Diagnosis 12 7 220 INI Inputs Outputs PS2 This page displays the states of the inputs and outputs of a power supply unit PS2 E Device overview fs Parameters A Diagnosis a POO Power Supply Inputs Outputs L24 85 Actual values ae Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs G Object browser t Type plate IN 1 Supply available y Q OUT 1 Power available x1213 IN 2 Synchronisation in Y W OUT 2 Synchronisation out X124 x12 4 IN 3 Chopper active q Q OUT 3 Error 0 e9 o 1 2 X213 IN 4 Overvoltage Y WW OUT 4 Ermor1 X1 1 x2 4 W OUT 5 Preload active Q QUT amp Power off Q OUT 7 Chopper enable Fig 100 Diagnosis page Inputs outputs Each indicator can have the value 0 light bulb off or the value 1 light bulb on For each signal transmitted via the inputs and out
274. nual 115 10 10 P ters of an SD2 arameters of an X nmm 10 5 1 116 Digital Inputs This page provides the parameters of all digital inputs of the drive EB Device overview H Parameters A Diagnosis Fm POO DocAris Configuration t Monitorings js Analog signals 036 21 40DC A xi Digital signals 35 Digital inputs Vil Digital outputs Encoder emulation Dr Controller Inversion Ready type 1 L1 M02 Message operation enabled M12 Speed zero L1 L1 M10 Ref value reached o 0 M02 Message operation enabled Fig 31 Parameter page Digital inputs Each input can have the state 0 or 1 and can be parameterized individually Digital In SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v v v v D INO D IN8 Depending on the device you can configure up to nine digital inputs The possible func tions of each input depend on the current device and are set by means of a list box Refer to the hardware documentation of the device for an overview of the configurable input functions for each drive function The respective connector and pin of the used device are indicated left hand to the parameter Via the check box Inversion you can invert the digital input drivemaster2 User Manual 10 5 2 Digital Outputs Parameters of an SD2x This page provides the parameters of all digital outputs of the drive El Device overvie
275. number Firmware version Phase current Input voltage Rated curent Maximum voltage Peak current DC link current Preload resistor Rated current Resistor value Peak current Chopper current DC link capacity Rated current Internal Peak current Fig 115 Diagnosis page Power type plate Power supply This section provides the following information on the hardware Device ID Indicates the general designation type of the used drive electronics Delivery date Indicates the date of delivery by SIEB amp MEYER AG Serial number Indicates the SIEB amp MEYER serial number of the device Hardware version Indicates the version of the hardware User version Indicates the version of the parameter set Firmware Indicates the version of the firmware v Ww NW NN ON Type Plate gt Read Via this button all parameters are read from the device and loaded into the software gt Write Via this button all parameters set in the software are written into the device 12 drivemaster2 User Manual 235 12 Diagnosis 12 21 236 ra Version Information This diagnosis page displays general version information on the hardware and soft ware of the current drive This information you can export as HTML file by use of the button in the bottom Eg Device overview fla Parameters a Diagnosis igi POO Doc xis 20 o Veiscninfomation CC 17 Drive actual values a Errors and warni
276. o load current Before the warning is generated the message M10 reference value reached must have been signaled The warning W24 is generated when the motor current exceeds the indicated warning threshold in amperes The parameter W24 Warning threshold is either a fixed value or set via an analog input drivemaster2 User Manual 105 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 106 The no load current is the current to which the warning threshold refers The no load current serves as default value and is usually calibrated during operation via the func tion Teach no load current For this reason you must select the function Teach no load current for one digital input When the no load current has been reached during operation the input must be set for at least 200 ms Then the default value of the no load current is overwritten by the actual current The warning message is triggered for at least 200 ms The Window time is the period of time during which the event must be known internally When this time is passed the warning message is generated By means of the parameter Filter time the current to be monitored can be filtered It is the time of one PT1 filter Nmotor Message M10 Ref value reached Imotor Warning threshold AE pen MC CE n Measurement of no load current W24 Enable W24 W24 window time W24 window time om Current monitoring is not enabled until the message
277. oad compensation voltage actual current__ y 100 inputvalue U f motor peak current drivemaster2 User Manual 12 Diagnosis Diagnosis The tab page Diagnosis contains all displays required for the operation of the complete drive or power supply unit ES The tab page Diagnosis is only displayed in the online mode Using the diagnosis pages requires a permanent connection between the PC and the selected drive With the aid of the diagnosis pages all important displays of the drive can be analyzed To provide a clear representation the displays are combined in pages whereas these pages are arranged as final nodes leafs in a tree type structure J SIE amp MEYER AG 1 2 Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help New e i M lt bom POO drive 14 Drive actual values d Errors and warnings f Eror memory E Position measurement system Lin Digital inputs amp Digital outputs Sine Cosine Display AZ Delta Z Measurement gt Analog inputs 4e Analog outputs Object browser SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor Version information n Projekt Online Projekt Device qu em EJ Device overview Bs Parameters A Diagnosis Host localhost User Level Admin Nref 3888 Jom Drive actual values lef Imax 388 Jame 038 Jams Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI The root of the tree is the device selected in the D
278. oder Emulation Trigger Signals SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 E drivemaster2 User Manual 125 10 Parameters of an SD2x Via this parameter group the encoder emulation is configured for the selected measu ring system by trigger signals Encoder emulation Trigger signals Signal period Measuring steps n Motor revolution Motor revolution Resolution Resolution The parameter specifies the number of signal periods per mechanical motor revolution The measuring steps per motor revolution are displayed automatically in the blue colored field behind 10 9 Electronic Gear The node Electronic gear is only displayed when the operating mode Electronic gear see Operating mode of the drive p 90 is selected and the unit of the internal position controller resolution is set to counts see Units p 99 It provides only one page Electronic gear Eg Device overview 3 Parameters A Diagnosis P00 M405H Electronic gear 2 g Configuration e Dive Electronic gear 77 Units 8 Power output stage m amp Motor S Motor measurement systei S Drive control User level rights t Monitorings Pmaster Pref hv Analog signals ax Digital signals Encoder emulation Source of master measurement system Encoder 0 A Quad B Gear factor s 1000 Counts Electronic gear Dr Controller Cut off frequency Hz Fig 36 Parameter page
279. oject wizard or the symbol in the tool bar Changing the project is necessary if e g the device address of the used hardware has changed compared with the address set in the project A project is created changed in two steps Select Project M SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 DER Step 1 select project Project base folder Give a name to the project i C Programme SM_AG drivemaster2 SM_Smp and select the file path 1 Project name N ew Project x Project file C drivemaster2 SM_Smp New Projecti New Project smp Comment Cancel X 1 Select project Edit the basic data of your project here gt Project base folder Indicates the default path for projects The new project will be saved in this path The default folder is sm smp in the installation path of the software drivemaster2 gt Project name Indicates the project name gt Project file Indicates the directory path of the project file The complete file name of the project is generated automatically on the basis of the default path for the projects and the project name in the corresponding project directory gt Comment Enter a note regarding the current project in this field if you like This comment is saved with the project file and serves for identifying the project later 2 Project Actions drivemaster2 User Manual Working with Projects gt Next Applies the entered project data and switches to th
280. ometer p 88 Hall ABC 5 V RS422 Commutation Controller p 86 Magnetic alignment current Phase Voltage Measurement p 87 Commutation Controller p 86 SD2 Sensorless Field plate 3 wires SD2S SineCosine encoder Field plate 3 wires HSPAM VF Field plate 2 wires Pulse generator NAMUR Pulse generator p 85 Pulse generator 24V drivemaster2 User Manual 83 10 Parameters of an SD2x Measuring system Additional parameter group Pulse generator 5V Digital field plate GMR Field plate 3 wires Field plate 2 wires Pulse generator NAMUR gt Pulse generator p 85 Pulse generator 24V Pulse generator 5V Digital field plate GMR 1 When this measuring system is parameterized VCC is switched to 5 3 V 2 When this measuring system is parameterized VCC is switched to 12 V 3 This parameter group is displayed when a synchronous motor is used 4 This measuring system is available only for devices with controlled intermediate circuit Tab 1 Measuring systems of the drive amplifiers NOTICE Type of the measuring system Sensorless If the measuring system type Sensorless was selected no measuring system is connected and the motor is operated with maximum current To avoid property damage we recommend to operate the motor without sensor for a short moment for testing Connection This parameter indicates the devic
281. onnection example with converter p 279 is structure as follows E al H H V Device overview t SD2 0 036 21 30DDC Hw Drv OA 036 21 30DC A Bi Drv 0B 036 21 30DC B amp SD2 1 036 21 30DDF ta Drv 14 036 21 30DF A pi Drv 1B 036 21 30DF B lj Fc2 2 02190101EC A Since the converter itself is no communication target it does not appear in the project Communication with a Local PC via RS232 RS485 In the following the hardware and software configuration is described for assemblies in which the hardware is connected to a local PC via RS232 RS485 serial communica tion Hardware Configuration Most of the PCs only provide an RS232 interface only a few industrial PCs feature a RS485 interface The RS232 connection is a point to point connection For this reason there is always only one RS232 connection with the PC in contrast to USB connec tions Thus the software can only communicate with an individual device or with several devices that are connected to each other via a bus The following connection examples describe the direct RS232 connection with one device and the connection via RS232 to RS485 converter to several devices that communicate via RS485 bus to each other drivemaster2 User Manual Communication Connection example with one device This example illustrates a frequency converter FC2 that is connected via RS232 cable to the PC The serial interface X3 of an FC2 can be an RS2
282. ontinue SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaste 2 Base Data You can enter a name and a comment for your drive These two designations are free to choose and they should help you to identify your drive later Drive function 1 Drive Hardware 3 Motor Selection Drive function type SERVO VECTOR Identification Drive name Doc Axis Comment SD2S Test Parameter set ID Help Back Next d X Cancel Select the required drive function on the page Base Data and enter identifying information for the drive This identification takes no effect on the function of the drive It is only used for your administration Click Next to continue Vm SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 DER Setup a new drive 2 Base Data 3 Motor Selection 4 Motor Data You can read the motor data from an existing motor file or you can enter the motor data values for a new motor Origin of motor data f O Read motor data from file Motor type Manufacturer Type Manufacturer Designation Motorname Synchronous rotative v Motor ID 1 001 Back Next d XX Cancel Enter the parameters of the used motor type This can be done manually or by loading an already existing motor file mot When you work for the first time with the software drivemaster2 no motor file will be available Hence you must enter the motor data manually In this example a SIEB amp MEYER motor is used 48 d
283. ontrolled range drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x If an asynchronous motor is connected you must set the times of acceleration and deceleration ramp in the field weakening range in addition to the ramps in the speed controlled range Variable Ramps SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM m s a On the page Variable ramps you can parameterize a limit for the mean current Ef Device overview fl Parameters S g Configuration B Variable ramps 7 i Drive H Power supply Acceleration 1 Acceleration 2 Power output stage Motor S Motor measurement s As Drive control Gl Bus system User level rights 5 gr Monitorings Messages Warnings Errors 3 La Analog signals ep Analog inputs Analog outputs B zd Digital signals 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 Mie 4 Digital inputs Current Current limit 4 Digital outputs Acceleration M Motor potentiometer N Motor potentiometer Ramp type Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax Y Encoder emulation ii Encoder emulation zu ie Pr Controller Normal acceleration 100 0 96 Minimum acceleration 100 0 E mEes Start threshold 75 0 Stop threshold 125 0 EEE L Pr Speed controller S at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 6 0 Arms at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 10 0 Arms Fh EA Fig 63 Parameter pag
284. overview gs Parameters EB POO pam converter g Configuration hy Analog signals f Digital signals B Motor configuration 1 Motor parameters S Motor measurement system iz VF Characteristic curve e Messages 42 Holding function lc Speed ref values hx Compensation Motor configuration 2 All motor specific data are configured via these pages The configurations 1 and 2 comprise the same pages but these are independent from each other Motor Parameters This page contains parameters for the motor that is connected to the frequency converter Ef Device overview flh Parameters Ii m POO pam converter Motor parameters 1 Q a Configuration a Analog signals Motor file Motor type x 5 mies 1 Manufacturer Type lor configu Motor parameter e Open Maridoctuer Asynchronous rotative _v S Motor measurement system g Smas Designation Motor ID IZ VF Characteristic curve Motomame 1 001 1 Messages AZ Holding function 1d Speed ref values Motor parameters D Compensation Motor configuration 2 Rated current Aiii Peak current Arms Ft time s Minimum speed Hz Maximum speed Hz Maximum voltage 43 Vac Number of motor poles 1 1 4 m D Fig 87 Parameter page Motor parameters Motor File FC2 This parameter group provides different methods to save all motor parameters of a frequency converter in one motor file
285. ovided Since data are not read out in real time by the software drivemaster2 the data may be inconsistent drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis EW Device overview DI Parameters Ad Diagnosis m P00 M406D E CAN Busmonitor 2 1 3 Drive actual values SDO Or SDO 0 tx PDO Ore PDO 0 tx dl Errors and wamings i eny Receive buffer SDO 0 rx S Postion measurement systems 24 Digital inputs Byte xe Es EESTI 7 4 Digital outputs Value 0x2B 0x99 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 Sine Cosine Display az Delta Z Measurement Byte 0 Byte 1 7 gt Analog inputs E 4e Analog outputs v Bit 0 size indicator Index Byte 1 2 SERVOLINK 4 monitor 2 CAN bus monitor v Bit 1 expedited transfer Subindex Byte 3 HE Object browser ersion information it 2 number of bytes lue 0x00000001 yte 4 Version inf i O Bit 2 ber of byl Val Byte 4 5 v Bit 3 number of bytes O Bit 4 not used a Information v Bit 5 client cmd aun ceo LL Bit 6 client cmd spec Gda count a O Bit client cmd spec NMT State Operational lt gt Fig 112 Diagnosis page CAN bus monitor The tab pages display the received data rx and the transmitted data tx of the service data objects SDO and of the process data objects PDO All tab pages are structured likewise In the top section of the page the complete content of the receive buffer is displayed byte by byte in the hexadecimal format Below you find in
286. ows E T Eg Device overview t SD2 0 036 21 30DDC L Bi Drv 0B 036 21 30DC B 5 SD2 1 036 21 30DDF in Drv 1 A 036 21 30DF Bi Drv 1 B 036 21 30DF B i FC2 2 021 90 101EC Since the converter itself is no communication target it does not appear in the project 288 drivemaster2 User Manual 16 16 A 16 A 1 16 A 2 Appendix Appendix Troubleshooting Installation and Security Programs Spybot Search amp Destroy DOS Exploit Security programs like Spybot Search amp Destroy are used for closing security gaps in Windows by manipulating entries in the Registry If you use the tool Spybot Search amp Destroy consider the following As long as the protection with the name DOS Exploit is active no device driver can be installed First the protection must be deactivated Using the Software with Restricted Rights ES You need administrator rights to install the software Standard users can also use the software arivemaster2 with restricted rights According to the operating system certain presetting may be necessary Windows 2000 Under the software Windows 2000 drivemaster2 can also be used by users with restricted rights But only users with administrator rights are permitted to modify any parameters of the device drivers Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Under Windows XP Vista 7 the software arivemaster2 can also be used by users with restricted rights
287. page Device overview you select the drive parameter set to be parame terized SIEB amp MEYER AG Project Edit Loader Settings Extras Help User Level Admin TEJ b i04 Wa ae Div 2 i Device overview jJ Parameters 2 Diagnosis j PS2 0 036 21 90F i Summary W FC2 0 02190 101EC A Ef SD2 2 036 21 12EIF G fA Drv 2A 036 21 12EF A NI Basic device p Drv 2B 036 21 12IF B poo 7141 1 0 servo drive M Designation 036 21 12EF A Serial number 1 000 000 000 D a Edit project lt j Project Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI 1 Project tree The project tree displayes all devices of a project in a tree structure SD2x devices are subdivided into their drives a drive A amp t drive B only available with double axis drive amplifiers You can create several parameter sets for SD2x devices see Multi Parame ters p 62 Therefore the available parameter sets are displayed in the project tree as follows parameter set gt B parameter set that is currently active in the device only visible when the drive is online parameter set that is not written into the device yet only visible when the drive is online gt j empty parameter set 2 Device page This page displays a brief description of the selected device 3 Edit project This button opens the project wizard There you can edit the devices of the project see p 2
288. parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the current controller in volts per ampere The reaction time of the current control circuit is reduced if a high propor tional amplification is selected If the amplification value is set too high the current control circuit starts vibrating drivemaster2 User Manual 131 10 Parameters of an SD2x 132 FNI Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the current controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the quicker the current control circuit will react If the value is set too small the current control circuit starts vibrating Speed Controller SD2x SERVO VECTOR SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM s m On this page you can set the parameters of the speed controller for SERVO VECTOR operation These are speed limitation ramps reversion of rotation and the actual control parameters x EA EB Device overview Parameters 2 Diagnosis E Fa P00 Docs g Configuration Jf Monitorings hv Analog signals ail Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller Tai Ref val 1 Current ref val Limitation Acceleration ramp 4000 00 RPM 100 ms Amplification Kp cj 2 Ref current filter Te ff Curent controller Deceleration ramp Integration time Tr
289. pen oscar configuration which allows to load a stored configuration from a file The configuration files are usually stored in the directory SM Data in the installation path The file extension is ocf Oscar config gt Save settings Opens the dialog OscarSave oscar configuration in order to save the current settings curve selection and trigger condition The dialog asks for file name and storage location of the file Usually the file is stored in the directory SM Data in the installation path gt Reset settings Reset of made settings to the settings before A dialog is opened asking if all individual settings shall be reset Confirm with Yes to reset the settings gt History Provides quick access to the last four graphics which were used gt Configuration software Switches back to the software drivemaster2 gt Exit program Closes the Oscar 13 drivemaster2 User Manual 253 13 Tools 13 4 1 2 254 Menu View gt Select actual channel Opens a submenu in which the current View Communication Help channel CH1 CH4 can be Select actual channel gt defined gt Digital analyzer This menu item has no function An empty window Digital analyzer is displayed below the curve bx Setjclear measurement point Ctrl M window Eis Set new zero point Ctr N Analyzer signals This menu item E Set only new value measurement point Ctrl H has no function gt Set clear measurement po
290. pplicable it is kept in its position by means of a mechanical brake gt Stop The motor is decelerated The motor is decelerated by the slow down ramp whereas the deceleration is as fast as possible considering the parameterization current limitation The controller remains active and the mechanical brake remains deactivated Analog Signals The node Analog signals provides the parameter pages Analog inputs and Analog outputs El Device overview l Parameters l4 m POO pam converter g Configuration Analog signals Analog inputs A adil Digital signals amp 4e Analog outputs Motor configuration 1 Motor configuration 2 On these pages you can configure the functions of the analog inputs and outputs Analog Inputs On this page you can configure the inputs Analog In 0 and Analog In 1 Ef Device overview Qs Parameters l2 Diagnosis POO pam converter g Configuration fh Analog signals Analog inputs 4e Analog outputs dl Digital signals x Motor configuration 1 4 Motor configuration 2 Analog inputs Q Analog In 0 velocity reference value Filter time O Inverter Scaling Noise rejection 100 0 ms 0 000 Hz 0 02 10 000 y e Analog offset x29 1 o mY Analog In 1 Load Filter time O Inverter Scaling Noise rejection 0 0 ms 0 000 0 00 10 000 e Analog offset x29 3 0 my Fig 83 Parameter page Analog inputs The fun
291. provides the tab pages DNC PDO 0 and PDO 1 EM Device overview fl Parameters E Pontes ave B g Configuration D Drive ONC Ppo0 Ppo 27 Units f Power output stage Motor DNC S Motor measurement syste By Drive control Baud rate User level rights Heartbeat 2 t Monitorings El M Analog signals Heartbeat time ic E Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller Fig 24 Parameter page Bus system for DNC 8 Byte telegram Further information on the DNC 8 Byte Telegram is to find in the documentation Drive System SD2 DNC 8 Byte Telegram drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x DNC SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv v v s Via this tab page the DNC telegram is parameterized DNC DNC Baud rate 57600 kBaud Heartbeat o Baud rate The baud rate of the DNC 8 byte telegram has a fixed value of 57 600 kBaud Heartbeat When the check box is activated the communication via the DNC 8 Byte telegram is monitored During operation the drive now expects to receive prompt telegrams heart beat messages from the host periodically Via the parameter Heartbeat time you can enter the time interval between two prompt telegrams 10 Heartbeat monitoring is only active when the communication state machine is in the state operational see documentation Drive System SD2 DNC 8 Byte Telegram Heartbeat ti
292. puts Actual Values ex Analog outputs C Ready To Switch On Position M1 abs incr SERVOLINK 4 monitor C Switched On A 2 CAN bus monitor C Operation Enabled poe C nen Object browser O Faut Current BE incr y Version information v Voltage Enabled C Quick Stop 3 3 V Switched On Disabled Service Channel a Warning Parameter Value res v Remote v Target Reached C Int Limit Active Service State d Md dedi O Toggle O Fault O res O res v 1 Telegr Sign O res O res O res O res C 0 Teleg Sign State of the drive State Switch On Disabled Software Function Quickstop Fig 111 Diagnosis page SERVOLINK 4 monitor actual values By means of the displayed information the SERVOLINK 4 actual values can be analyzed In the top section of the page the complete content of the receive buffer is displayed byte by byte in the hexadecimal format Below you find the reference values On the left side the drive control word is indicated and on the right side the actual reference values are displayed Besides the content of the service channel and the service control word are indicated The contents of the service channel and the service status word are displayed in the combined status display State of the drive in the bottom section CAN Bus Monitor This page is used to analyze the communication of the drive via the CAN bus For this purpose the tab pages SDO 0 rx PDO 0 rx and SDO 0 tx PDO 0 tx are pr
293. puts of the device the according device connector and pin are indicated The other signals can be used for a more accurate error diagnosis drivemaster2 User Manual 12 8 Digital Inputs EF Device overview fs Parameters y Diagnosis Diagnosis This page displays the states of the digital inputs of the drive zt Elim POO dive 1 3 Drive actual values d Errors and warnings f Error memory E Position measurement systems S Disisi inou o Digital outputs Sine Cosine Display 4Z Delta Z Measurement ep Analog inputs ex Analog outputs SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor TS Object browser v Version information n Fig 101 Diagnosis page Digital inputs 036 21 40DC A Depending on the hardware up to 9 digital inputs D INO to D IN8 may be configured The parameters display the set functions of the digital inputs Each input can have the value 0 not active or 1 active In addition the corresponding connector and pin of the device are indicated for each input drivemaster2 User Manual 12 221 Diagnosis 12 9 12 222 Digital Outputs This page displays the states of the digital outputs of the drive Ef Device overview fi Parameters 9 Diagnosis io E POO drive 1 3 Drive actual values dl Etrors and warnings f Error memory Position measurement system Lim Digital inputs Faf Digia ouput Sine Cosine
294. r are saved in one motor file For this purpose the dialog Chose your motor file appears drivemaster2 User Manual 75 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 2 4 1 76 Motor Type SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 s v 4 This parameter group provides parameters for the general identification of the connected motor Manufacturer The parameter indicates identification data of the motor manufacturer The user can enter the manufacturer and information on the series of the motor here The maximum length is 32 characters Designation This parameter is provided for the exact designation of the motor The maximum length is 32 characters Type The parameter indicates the type of the motor This is set via a list box The settings made here affect the motor and control parameters The following motor types can be selected for the drive functions Drive type SERVO VECTOR HSPWM HSBLOCK FPAM HSPAM VF Motor type Synchronous gt Synchronous gt Synchronous Asynchronous rotative rotative rotative rotative Synchronous gt Asynchronous linear rotative Voice Coil rota tive Voice Coil linear Motor ID This parameter saves a motor specific ID The ID can be selected as desired by the user and can be used for identifying the motor version via the object dictionary The object MOTOR USER IDENT CODE is used for this purpose The Motor ID is a 32 bit value divided into a 16 bit part be
295. r devices with integrated power supply unit Besides the parameters of the power supply unit the page provides parameters to set the external ballast resistor if applicable For devices with internal ballast resistor the respective parameters are displayed as read only values EF Device overview fl Parameters E Ri POD dive B g Configuration Mains Power 8 Power output stage Motor S Motor measurement systei By Drive control User level rights t5 t Monitorings rv Analog signals Zi Digital signals Mains phases Rated power Voltage 230 0 Peak power Mains frequency 50 Hz Time for peak power W Encoder emulation Chopper Pr Controller m NM Motor potentiometer Chopper level 380 Vde External ballast resistor Internal ballast resistor Resistor 22 Resistor Rated power 50 Rated power Peak power 250 Peak power 5 000 Time for peak power 5 000 Time for peak power Fig 18 Parameter page Power supply drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Mains SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 s 4 4 This parameter group serves to enter general data of the mains supply that is connected to the drive amplifier Mains phases This parameter specifies the number of mains phases The user can select between single phase and three phase current via radio buttons The parameter depends on the provided supply system type ES For further information refer to the hardware
296. r in position at standstill 0 Hz You can select one of the following holding functions Holding current A PI current controller induces a voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes Holding current with time limit A PI current controller induces a voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes After the reference value zero is reached the holding current is limited to a certain time Its only purpose is to decelerate the motor securely to standstill The desired holding time is indicated in seconds Holding voltage A current is generated by means of a fix voltage value The holding current controller is not active in this mode i e there is no current limitation not even drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 indirect The holding voltage can hold the position of the motor permanently The desired DC voltage is defined in the parameter Holding voltage in vo fs gt Holding voltage with time limit A current is generated by means of a fix voltage value The holding current controller is not active in this mode i e there is no current limitation not even indi rect The desired DC voltage is defined in the parameter Holding voltage in volts After the reference value zero is reached the holding voltage is limited to a
297. r measurement s By Drive control Bus system User level rights gr Monitorings 1 Messages Warnings Errors gl i La Analog signals p Analog inputs Analog outputs H EJ d Digital signals 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 2 Digital inputs Current Current limit 96 amp Digital outputs AN Motor potentiometer M Motor potentiometer Ramp type Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax Y Encoder emulation ii Encoder emulation Hi p2 Pr Controller Normal acceleration 100 0 Minimum acceleration 100 0 ley Speed ref values Start threshold 75 0 Stop threshold 125 0 es Dr Speed controller A at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 6 0 Arms at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 10 0 Arms i44 na a Acceleration 96 Fig 55 Parameter page Variable ramps Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is limited relative to the maximum current Acceleration 96 40 60 80 100 120 140 Current Current limit The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P
298. r signal period For this measuring system the parameter is write protected because it has the fixed value 4 The unit of the interpolation factor is ncrements per signal period ES The total resolution of the measuring system is indicated additionally to the 10 parameter and is calculated as follows Resolution signal periods per revolution x interpolation factor Magnetic alignment current The parameter indicates the current in ampere which is admissible when the motor is phased in The magnetic alignment current should not be higher than the rated current of the motor DANGER Phasing of the motor Some drive configurations do not allow phasing in a motor The reason is that in some cases the brakes must be released and torques are effective If the motor is not able to phase in the commutation is incorrect and thus the control does not work drivemaster2 User Manual 85 10 Parameters of an SD2x 86 Commutation Controller SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM SD2S Via this parameter group you can set the commutation controller Mode Via the parameter Mode you can switch on off the commutation controller For FPAM operation measuring system Phase Voltage Measurement this parameter is always set to On i e the commutation controller is always active For HSBLOCK operation with Hall sensors you should activate the commutation controller as well since the synchronization i
299. rated current of the power output stage and is not limited by it The rated current is also used in the P t calculator of the motor By means of the button t a dialog to set a variable rated current is opened see section Variable Rated Current p 81 Peak current A Ams f Specifies the peak current of the motor The parameter is independent from the peak current of the power output stage but it is the top limit for the limi tation of the current controller The peak current is also used in the l t calcu lator of the motor lt time Indicates the maximum time during which the peak current is allowed to flow once out of the cold state This parameter is also used for the l t calculator When the device is overloaded the t calculator triggers the error message E29 Motor load too high Motor I t and switches the drive amplifier off Maximum speed mm s Specifies the maximum possible speed of the motor The parameter is the top limit for the limitation of the speed controller Pole distance 180 elec Indicates the distance between the permanently excited magnetic poles in trically the secondary part of the motor The pole distance is the distance between the north pole and the south pole Thus it is a half period of the 78 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x permanently excited magnetic field 7 180 electric The distance between two north and two south poles is the double pole distance 360 electric
300. re are current errors the error of the highest priority is displayed If there is no current error the saved error of the highest priority is displayed If the drive has been stopped via the quick stop command the event that triggered the quick stop is also displayed drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosis 12 4 Errors and Warnings This page displayes all important data on current and saved errors as well as warning and error messages of the selected drive Ef Device overview ffs Parameters 42 Diagnosis E rA Ol 1 3 Drive actual values 5 Errors and wamings Overview f Error memory ES Position measurement system Actual Error E40 B Motor feedback 2 Digital inputs amp Digital outputs Actual Error E40 B Motor feedback 0x0528 Sine Cosine Display AZ Delta Z Measurement Latched Error E40 B Motor feedback 040528 22 Analog inputs 9 SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor Actual Errors UE Object browser E40 B Motor feedback Version information Actual Warnings Actual Messages W01 Digital Input Pos limit switch W02 Digital Input Neg limit switch W17 No commutation M12 Speed zero M13 Target value current limit reached lt gt Fig 97 Diagnosis page Errors and warnings In the section Overview you can see the status and errors at a glance Status The status field displays the current state of the drive For this purpose the status word
301. rivemaster2 eeeesseeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnns 18 USB Driver Installation eeeeeceeeeeeeeeennn nnn 18 USB Driver Troubleshooting near terme nnne n nee ener tees 20 LIDUSB Device Not Detected eere etn ara ko eo iot na apod sn da phas 20 Wrong USB Driver Eoad6ed 2 5 etuer rte inmane tu Ra Eire exe nter kb deas Puxnu tuse Pb aa 20 Device Connection to PC eeeeeeeeeeeenee 23 Connection of PS2 and SD2 ccccccccccssssssssneeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeessssenees 23 Connection of Double axis Compact Device SD2 24 Connection of SD2B seseeeeeessseseeeeeeenee nennen nnne nennen nnn 25 Connection SD2S Er 26 Connection of SD2T eeseeeseeeneeee nennen nennen nnn nnn r nnns nnne r nnn nnn 26 COMME CUO NTE ieosensacdiiparhdoReida be anane uito aciei ndn cae H M M dioc 27 Description of the User Interface 29 General Operating Instructions for drivemaster2 29 Screen Layout au cac atn iuam rand darasacaiieswtavannudetdniagnsd ns EC Hi DS uUi reb ME 29 Men DeSCMIPUON UR 30 Menu nd rers e Mc 31 Ni salo sro pn 21 Menu Loader essssssesesssssseeeee nennen nnnenn nenne e ses e inen s sess nnn nn esas enne sn nen 32 MT
302. rivemaster2 User Manual First Steps Click Next to continue SIEB amp MEYER A G drive SIEB amp MEYER na Setup a new drive 3 Motor Selection 4 Motor Data 5 Motor Feedback Enter the single motor parameters Every parameter ist necessary for the operation of the drive and must be set Motor parameters Rated current Peak current TPt time Minimum speed Maximum speed Pole pairs Moment of inertia 0 1 kgm 1000 Voltage constant Phase Phase Vrms 1000 RPM Help M Back Next gt X Cancel Enter the technical data of the connected motor All input fields must be filled with the correct motor data otherwise the parameterization of the motor can not be finished correctly The highlighted motor data in bold are necessary and must be adapted to the connected motor gt Click Next to continue SIEB amp MEYER na EEENE 70 c0 o 3 Motor Selection 5 Motor Feedback 6 Controller Select the type of the motor feedback t this time resolver hall sensors incremental encoders SineCosine encoders and sensorless are supported Motor feedback Type of measurement system Velocity scaling 60000 000 RPM gt 100 000 Reference value Number of pole pairs n Help 48 Back Next gt X Cancel On this page you must enter the parameters of the measuring system connected to the motor drivemaster2 User Manual 49 First Steps Click Next to contin
303. roller Q Motor configuration 2 W Motor parameters S Motor measurement system Z UA Characteristic curve B Messages ta Traveling profile 4t Holding current controller Message reference value M12 Reference value zero window M10 Reference value reached window Ref value reached at Speed zero Message temperature monitoring Type of temperature monitoring Limit of temperature monitoring Fig 90 Parameter page Messages Message Load Limit FC2 The load message is parameterized via this parameter group drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Type of load limit The parameter indicates the source of the load limit The list box offers the two options Internal reference value and Analog input Parameterizing the analog input is explained in the corresponding subchapter Load reference value This parameter is only displayed when Internal reference value is selected above It indicates the switching threshold of the load message in percent The value can be modified by steps of 0 1 96 Message Reference Value FC2 This parameter group contains parameters to set switching thresholds of the digital outputs Reference value zero and Reference value reached M12 Reference value zero window The parameter indicates the frequency speed at which the Reference value zero window is reached As soon as the value entered here is reached the message Reference v
304. rs Reference values Speed Speed parameters Positive ramp 2000 ms Max current Negative ramp 2000 ms gt Positive ramp The parameter indicates the acceleration of the motor spindle in milliseconds during increasement of the actual speed gt Negative ramp The parameter indicates the deceleration of the motor spindle in milliseconds during reduction of the actual speed gt Max current The parameter indicates the current limitation for speed operation in amperes Control This section contains the following buttons gt PC activates the initial operation in the device Controller activates the controller Start starts the device with the set reference values Stop stops the device Reset resets all remedied errors v Ww NN Control 0 PC F5 Controller F6 Start F7 Stop F8 Reset F9 Depending on the device status the buttons can have the following states gt blocked gray gt inactive yellow gt active green PC It is necessary to activate the setup in the device to use the converter setup too Thus the frequency converter does not receive its commands by a control system or a field bus anymore but expects them from the software Before activating the initial operation the following dialog appears Its purpose is to 13 warn the user saying that the control is now turned over to the PC in order to prevent that this action is carried out unintentionally Ss
305. rve The drive organizes two motor configurations which can be selected via a list box The list box contains the names defined in the parameters Motor selection Motor configuration Cheracteristic line selection Motor connection WW 1722 Motor selection The FC2 allows the operation of 12 spindles at the same time The spindles are selected and deselected by selection and deselection of the corresponding number Motor selection n Motor configuration Cheracteristic line selection Motor connection Mi 02 Ms O4 Os Os M Oes O9 Mio Ou O12 Actual Values The section Actual values displays the actual Speed and the actual Load graphi cally and numerically Actual values Speed COC 499 9 rpm Load T 6 1 Reference values The section Reference values is divided into the tabs Speed and Speed parame ters If you change a reference value you must apply the new value with the ENTER key Then the new value is immediately active for operation Speed The speed of the motor can be modified via the adjusting button or by entering the value into the text box behind the adjusting button In order to change the direction of rotation click the button Invert sign Reference values Speed Speed parameters Speed i 500 rpm O Invert sign drivemaster2 User Manual 13 3 6 Tools Speed parameters This tab page allows to set the speed paramete
306. s Integration time Tt 512 00 ms Fig 76 Parameter page Speed controller Speed controller active You must activate the check box to switch on the speed control Speed control only at constant ref value Activate the check box for less dynamic measuring systems field plate pulse gener ator or Hall sensor The dynamics of these measuring systems are often not sufficient to control the speed in the ramps already Thus the speed must have reached a constant reference value for suitable control Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the speed controller The parameter is without unit Example When the slip is 100 rpm and the amplification is 1 0 the reference value is increased by 100 rpm via the proportional component Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the speed controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x milliseconds Typical values of the integral time constant are in the range of the filter time constant of the speed controller If the integral time constant value is too small especially for slow measuring system e g field plate the speed control circuit starts vibrating Filter time The parameter indicates the filter time for the correcting variable of the speed controller in milli seconds Take care that the
307. s gt Acceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for the acceleration from O to the maximum frequency speed gt Deceleration ramp The parameter indicates the time for a brake application to frequency speed 0 gt Quick stop ramp The parameter indicates the time for a quick stop from the maximum frequency speed to frequency speed 0 ES The ramps can only be met when the supplied current is sufficient If the current limiting function becomes active the ramp time is extended corre spondingly drivemaster2 User Manual P ters of an FC2 TT arameters oft an 11 4 7 Compensation Via this page you set the FC2 load compensation EF Device overview f Parameters fa POO pam converter E Compensation 77 E f Configuration fy Analog signals Ax Digital signals Compensation mode C2 Load compensation X t s Motor configuration 1 B Motor configuration 2 amp Motor parameters S Motor measurement syste Z VF Characteristic curve B Messages 42 Holding function lcs Speed ref values Voltage reduction 1 00 Compensation Load compensation V V Slip compensation Compensation Hz compensation 30 0 A A Fig 93 Parameter page Compensation Compensation FC2 This parameter group contains functions used to optimize the operating characteristics of the frequency converter Voltage reduction The parameter indicates
308. s Sine Cosine Display AZ Delta Z Measurement 23 Analog inputs D IN4 Delta Z Actual Position v 4e Analog outputs incr SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor gt Object browser 1 Delta Z Counter Version information incr Encoder 0 Positive Edge DIN4 Fig 104 Diagnosis page Delta Z measurement drivemaster2 User Manual 223 12 12 Diagnosis 12 12 224 The source of the delta Z positions can either be the encoder inputs ENCO and ENC1 of the drive or the encoder emulation of the motor measuring system This can be set via the left list box By means of the right list box you can set whether the delta Z counter is enabled permanently or just when the edge at the digital input D IN4 increases If you decide to use the internal input D IN4 this input must be parameterized correspondingly For this purpose switch to the tab page Parameters gt Digital inputs and set D IN4 to Enable difference measuring system The two delta Z counters displayed only differ in the scalings The Delta Z actual posi tion is not scaled and indicates the absolute value of the delta Z counter The value of the Delta Z counter is scaled to 16 bit with sign Analog Inputs This page displayes the applied analog voltages and the hence resulting reference values Eg Device overview fla Parameters a Diagnosis m POO Doku amp xis Analog inputs 77 173 Drive actual values d
309. s a parameter file of a drive that is already saved in the file system of the PC Then this file can be edited offline Load an existing project An already existing project is loaded and can be edited in the offline mode Create a new project Creates a new project by means of the project wizard that can be edited in the offline mode Setup connection to the device Opens the dialog for setting the communication server After the program installation the USB server is set as default server for the communication Exit the program Closes the software drivemaster2 5 5 Online Offline Mode The software arivemaster2 offers two operating modes online and offline mode When the online mode is active the software is permanently connected to the device selected in the device overview Changed parameter sets can be loaded directly into the connected devices In the online mode the tab page Diagnosis offers assistance for analyzing the behavior of the device The offline mode however only works on the basis of files The tab page Diagnosis is not provided in the offline mode 34 drivemaster2 User Manual e BN o 5 5 1 1 5 5 1 2 Description of the User Interface The Online Mode The online mode is probably the most commonly used working mode for the software arivemaster2 When the user activates the function Searching for connected devices the software automatically works in the online mode Searching for Conn
310. s at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 10 0 Arms p PM arm Fig 47 Parameter page Variable ramps Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax The acceleration is limited relative to the maximum current Acceleration 96 40 60 80 100 120 140 Current Current limit The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration in percent A negative value corresponds to braking gt Stop threshold P2 Indicates the current in percent at which the reduction of the acceleration is stopped and the minimum acceleration is kept For assistance the corresponding current value is displayed in gray color below 140 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is limited via absolute current values E o z m5 E E 2 g 30 40 Current Arms The following parameters must be set gt Start threshold P1 Indicates the current in amperes at which the reduction of the acceleration is started For assistance the corresponding percent value of the maximum current is displayed in gray color below gt Minimum acceleration P2 Indicates the minimum acceleration i
311. s from the servo Configures the Oscar with the data stored in the drive gt Get graphic date from the servo Calls measured values from the last measuring cycle stored in the drive gt Select communication address Opens the dialog Select communication address In the field New communica tion address you can select Actual communication address Power Drive New communication address E ive 0 p Drive Heb J tay another drive without switching to the software drivemaster2 Power Menu Help v Ww NN contact address of SIEB amp MEYER Curve Selection Content Opens the online help on the tab page Content Index Opens the online help on the tab page Index Search Opens the online help on the tab page Search Info Displays version information of the software and the Hi ieu EEEENN 0500 ocnv ev NNNM 75 E CH1 CH4 Select communication address X Cancel Help ju Content Index Search Info 13 You can determine the current channel by mouse click on the buttons CH1 to CH4 The scaling of the value axis is determined by the selected channel drivemaster2 User Manual 255 13 Tools 13 4 3 256 LL Check box Using the check boxes on the right side of the tool buttons CH1 to CH4 you can select the channel which is to be displayed in the graphic window List box By means of the list box you select the curve th
312. s much more accurate then Bandwidth The parameter indicates the bandwidth of the controlled commutation correction in hertz A typical bandwidth is 30 Hz Offset The parameter indicates the manual offset of the commutation controller in degrees For the measuring system Phase Voltage Measurement this parameter is always 0 Linear Hall SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v This parameter group contains parameters to configure and analyze a linear Hall sensor Number of pole pairs The parameter indicates the number of pole pairs Zp of the linear Hall sensor Do not confuse the number of pole pairs with the number of poles P The following applies Zp xP Mechanical offset zero position This parameter is not used at present Bandwidth tracking filter The parameter indicates the bandwidth of the measuring system in hertz The system of 2nd order works with a fix damping of D 0 7 Resolver SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 E drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x This parameter group contains parameters for resolver configuration and resolver eval uation Number of pole pairs The parameter indicates the number of pole pairs Zp of the resolver Do not confuse the number of pole pairs with the number of poles P The following applies Zp 72 x P Mechanical offset zero position This parameter is not used at present Bandwidth track
313. s not transmitted to the device the following dialog will appear in the moment another device is selected in the device overview Parameterset has been changed 18 Save changes The parameter set of drive is changed Do you want to save the parameters into a file or download them into the AF Download parameters into drive X Do not save changes Fig 12 Dialog window Save changes The following options are available gt Save parameters into file Saves modifications in the parameter set in a file Then the device is changed gt Download parameters into drive Loads the changed parameter set into the corre sponding drive Then the device is changed gt Do not save changes The changes are not saved and not written into the device They remain however in the user interface Then the device is changed If the user selects another device in the device overview whose parameter set has been modified in the software but not saved the software will detect inconsistencies with the online device drivemaster2 User Manual 5 5 1 4 5 5 2 5 5 2 1 Description of the User Interface The following dialog appears Parameter set has been changed L Upload new parameters The online drive contains new parameters that can be uploaded But the actual parameter set has been changed manually How do you want to proceed Discard Changes Q9 Help X Cancel Fig 13 Dialog window Upload new parameters The
314. s of a frequency converter Pulse Generator FC2 This parameter group is displayed for a pulse generator measuring system used with the frequency converter Resolution The parameter specifies the number of pulses per mechanical motor revolution Sensors with up to 36 pulses can be processed The speed that results from the pulses is displayed in the corresponding actual values drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Speed monitoring with sensor signals The parameter indicates whether the speed detected by the pulses is to be used for monitoring purposes If the check box is activated the messages Reference value reached and Reference value zero are transmitted respectively Error E31 Speed error Slip FC2 Via this parameter group the warning and error message for a speed error or slip of the frequency converter can be configured Shutdown threshold Via this parameter you can define whether the Slip window is indicated by a fix frequency speed or depending on the reference value in percent E31 Shutdown threshold The parameter indicates the threshold value of the frequency speed in hertz or revolu tions per minute at which the E31 window is reached E31 Window time The parameter indicates the time of the E31 window in milliseconds If the speed error is within the E31 window for the total window time the error E31 Speed error or slip too great is triggered and the device is switched off 11
315. s of an SD2x Current is triggered You can make the generated warning message available by setting a digital output accordingly The sampling rate of the motor current for generation of the warning Current is 250 us Via the list box W24 Mode you can set the desired trigger condition for the warning Current The other parameters depend on the setting made here Currently three modes for the warning Current are available I Motor gt Threshold Before the warning is generated the message M10 reference value reached must have been signaled The warning W24 is generated when the motor current exceeds the indicated warning threshold in amperes The parameter W24 Warning threshold is either a fixed value or set via an analog input The warning message is triggered for at least 200 ms The Window time is the period of time during which the event must be known internally When this time is passed the warning message is generated By means of the parameter Filter time the current to be monitored can be filtered It is the time of one PT1 filter Nmotor Message M10 Ref Value reached Imotor Warning threshold So AEN cemr ema metes see ced E e Ede W24 Enable W24 W24 window time W24 window time om Current monitoring is not enabled until the message M10 Ref value reached was triggered Thus peak loads in the acceleration and deceleration ramps are avoided I Motor gt Threshold n
316. seconds NOTICE Holding voltage too high If you set the value for the holding voltage too high the current flow in the motor will be too high and possibly causes device damage One of the following error messages appears gt E45 Short circuit in power output stage gt E29 Motor load too high Motor Pt gt E30 Power output stage load too high lt If you are not sure of the holding voltage value suitable for your motor use the function Holding current Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the holding current controller in volts per ampere The reaction time of the holding current control circuit is reduced if a high proportional gain is selected If the gain value is set too high the holding current circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the holding current controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The parameter is indicated in milliseconds The smaller the time constant the smaller the residual control deviation of the holding current control If the value is set too small the holding current circuit starts vibrating Current controlled startup braking At lower speeds the voltage generated by means of V f characteristic curve is often not sufficient to impress full magnetizing current If the startup function is activated a fix starting or braking current is impressed in the low speed
317. set The crea tion date is updated automatically when the parameter set is modified User version The field indicates the version of the parameter set The user can freely select this number Power supply PS2 This parameter group serves to enter general data of the mains supply that is connected to the power supply unit Mains phases This parameter specifies the number of mains phases The user can select between single phase and three phase current via radio buttons The parameter depends on the provided supply system type ES For further information refer to the hardware documentation Voltage The parameter indicates the main voltage of a sine mains supply in vo fs RMS value gt Single phase operation Voltage is related to the neutral conductor gt Three phase operation Voltage is defined between two phases This parameter is used by the load monitoring In the event of an error the power supply unit is switched off with the errorE01 Preloading error DC link voltage or E02 Overvoltage in DC link Mains frequency The parameter indicates the frequency of the sine mains supply in hertz or the supply of direct current DC The available variants are set by means of a list box Off time The parameter indicates the switchoff time of the mains supply in the event of an error in milli seconds If e g a mains failure occurs the PS2 will not try to restart before the time indicated here is passed the power supp
318. signals alt ET E 036 21 12EF A Encoder emulation Voltage dass 481 Vac 680 Vdc ge reru controller 42 Ref current filter Peak current 40 00 A 28 28 Arms 2 000 s X Current controller i i Winding detection Drive function Drive function type SERVO VECTOR Identification Parameter set Drivename _ servo drive M406F Date 06 05 2015 Comment parameter set for test motor Time 10 00 45 ID 1 001 Projekt Online Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI Pow 0 Drv 2 Online 1 Drive The root of the tree is the drive selected in the Device overview With a double axis device the parameterization applies only to the selected axis When one drive has several parameter sets the parameter set selected in the 10 Device overview is displayed 2 Thematic sub division of the parameterization The parameter pages are combined thematically by the subordinated nodes 3 Parameter pages Via the parameter pages you configure the drive according to the application The individual parameters are combined thematically in groups Assignment of parameters by drive function device ES The displayed parameter pages depend on the selected drive function At the beginning of each parameter group you find a two rowed table explaining for which drive function and possibly for which device the parameters apply SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM UF VECTOR F
319. sls atu edes tux Ene icut bak ui e o 217 Error Memory PTT D DET 218 Position Measurement Systems eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 219 Inputs Quipuls PS2 o uisdioonpaiiscnieigu neat ip ilta uin sque Ungu nan xii gb td ds 220 Digital Do 1 i tcea RETO HINTEN 221 Digital UID coo e ete teure santo pce iuva E AES 222 Sine Cosine Display X 223 Delta Z Measurement seeseesssseseeeeeeeenen nennen nennen 223 Analog Inputs ssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeeseesseeaseaes 224 Analog OUtPUtS dr 225 Spindle Select FOZ c 226 Spindle Actual Values FC2 0 s sssesssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssesssees 227 SERVOLINK 4 Monitor ecce tnn 227 Coniguratio mizine nie a a aa a e S 228 Reference values ccccccccccccccecceceeeecesesaeseaeaeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesaaaaaeaaaea 229 Actual Values 1 222 25 0 zem n ea besseoc haepisevr it loe i EaR 230 drivemaster2 User Manual 9 Content 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 20 12 21 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 1 3 13 1 4 13 1 5 13 2 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 3 4 13 3 5 13 3 6 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 1 1 13 4 1 2 13 4 1 3 13 4 1 4 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 4 4 13 4 5 13 4 6 13 4 7 13 5 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 5 1 14 5 1 1 14 5 1 2 15 15 1 15 1 1 15 1 1 1 15 1 1 2 15 1 1 3 15 1 2
320. splays version information of the software and the contact address of SIEB amp MEYER Check for updates Opens the dialog Check for updates to download an update for the software drivemaster2 directly from the SIEB amp MEYER web page For further information refer to section 5 7 Update of drivemaster2 Software p 39 Program Start The software arivemaster2 is started via the Windows start menu Programs gt SIEB amp MEYER AG gt drivemaster2 The welcome screen appears as long as the program is initialized Then a dialog window appears asking the user for the first working step drivemaster2 User Manual 33 Description of the User Interface 2G Search for all connected devices 27 Open a parameter file Ege Load an existing project Q Create a new project f Setup connection to the device Exit the program Fig 10 Dialog window Start The following options are available gt Show initial operation guide Provides a selection of PDF documents about the initial operation of the individual devices Click on the desired document to open it Search for one connected device Searches the address range for one address able device As soon as the device is found it is displayed in the user interface and a so called online project is created Search for all connected devices Searches for addressable devices in the complete address range and creates a so called online project Open a parameter file Open
321. stion mark under the item Other devices it has not been detected properly This can occur when the device has been connected to the PC before the software drivemaster2 was installed on it for the first time Proceed as described in the following Check the driver installation by disconnecting the USB connector from the PC for a few seconds Then reconnect the USB connector Now the PC repeats the USB driver installation If the drive ist still not displayed correctly in Device Manager take the following steps Right click on the question mark under Other Devices in the Device Manager and select Uninstall Then right click on Other Devices and select Scan for hardware changes Now the USB driver is installed again Proceed as described in section 3 4 USB Driver Installation p 18 Wrong USB Driver Loaded If there is more than one USB driver installed on the PC Windows might not detect the drive and another USB driver is loaded Symptoms of the problem gt the drive is properly connected to the PC laptop via USB display must be on The USB driver displayed in the taskbar on the bottom right indicates 0 Bl Change the driver for the drive as follows Connect the drive via USB to the PC Search for the loaded driver in Device Manager The driver appears the moment the USB cable is connected Right click on the wrong driver and select Update driver software in the context menu drivemast
322. stor Refer to the respective data sheet of the manufacturer om The parameters are also used for the l t calculator of the ballast resistor If too much power is converted in the ballast the I t calculator triggers the error E04 Ballast circuit load Chopper It and switches the device off Resistance The parameter indicates the nominal resistance of the resistor in ohms Depending on the device the resistance can be set within a preset range If this parameter is set to the value zero all other parameters of the group become write protected and are set to zero too Thus the monitoring of the external ballast resistor is turned off Rated power The parameter indicates the rated power of the used ballast resistor in waffs This value is to find in the data sheet of the manufacturer drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Peak power The parameter indicates the maximum possible power of the ballast resistor in watts This value is to find in the data sheet of the manufacturer Time for peak power The parameter indicates the maximum period of time in seconds in which the peak power can be supplied continuously Internal Ballast Resistor SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM SD2S SD2S SD2T y SD2S This parameter group displays the values of the internal ballast resistor of the drive amplifier The values of the internal ballast resistor are read from the device and write protected ES The par
323. strength of the power electronics The parameter is related to the maximum admissible supply voltage AC voltage as effective value and to the corresponding voltage in the rectified intermediate circuit DC link voltage in volts drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Max rated current The parameter specifies the maximum rated current of the power output stage during S1 operation continuous operation as peak value as well as the corresponding RMS value in ampere The proper rated current is limited by this parameter Moreover it depends on other parameters as for example the cooling Peak current The Parameter specifies the maximum current of the power output stage as peak value as well as the corresponding RMS value in ampere The time period defined behind the effective value specifies the max time I t time the peak current is allowed to flow The load is monitored by an t calculator When the device is overloaded the l t calcu lator triggers the error E30 Power output stage load too high I t and switches the output stage off Drive Function SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 4 P4 v In this field the drive function of the drive amplifier is selected Drive function type The parameter indicates the selected drive function If you mouse click on the button the following dialog is opened Select drive function SERVO VECTOR Y 1 0 SERVO VECTOR HSPWM HSBLOCK FPA
324. stsbq usages bdo 201 Motor Measurement System F2 aee rer RR Dnm tet c ier ebrei od ier eo M epe ERR Ee 202 PulSe Generaton FC 2 m 202 Error E31 Speed emor Slip F2 ais secs rette teet danas ete rade Hle ele ode enne tru oan 203 Vif Characteristic CUIVO iioi ipee sie ense ings occ dde tese eec cv erede gma rra oce Dia gu aded dus 203 Vit Charactenstic Cune O2 etic terae ras eium aet te tete dentur doe E E sain dne doner EESO 204 Messages EE 204 Message Load Limit F2 cci reri tnr tte trece rane mue eter per ANE ere cede eee 204 Message Reference Value FC2 esses esee nnne nennen nnns 205 Message Temperature Monitoring FC2 e eene nee 205 Holding FUNCHOM uices dione renean or etia ete eda sna der o t ta aiaiai iertds 206 Folding F nction FC2 PX 206 Speed Reference Values sss nnn nnne nennen 208 Speed Reference Values F C2 2 eripe papier tequet ee concer vate exeo rcu er exuere aq 208 COMPENSATION iiri ertet e Penna ad Ia eve i COE de Cu a i a uaaa 211 Compensation EF C2 2 senec nt hehe Po RR ERE E esi DRE E EO hA Ebr EAE ERE ENDEN 211 Blei T el inei 213 Actual values PS asise ninpa tinens AERE MU CENE EI Nun M EUREN QI Mi ERE LI aii 214 Drive Actual Values SD2X ccccessssssseeeeeeeeeesssseeeeeeeeeessssssneeeeeeeeeeess 215 Drive Actual Values FG usioocu svi sen ue taxe naui de Sev pori vtu essc Se nir pea e 216 Errors and VUA jS ocala Siete
325. t For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps gt Type 2 Current controlled ramp absolute currents The acceleration is relative to a fix current value For this purpose you must set the characteristic curve on the page Variable Ramps drivemaster2 User Manual 139 10 Parameters of an SD2x Variable Ramps SD2x SVC SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR SVC FPAM Vv On the page Variable ramps you can parameterize a limit for the mean current Ef Device overview fl Parameters f Configuration Z o o O i Drive Power supply Acceleration 1 Acceleration 2 i Power output stage Motor S Motor measurement s By Drive control Bus system User level rights 5 gr Monitorings 1 Messages Warnings Errors iS La Analog signals p Analog inputs Analog outputs amp 2 lt f Digital signals n Acceleration 96 20 4 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 emp Digital inputs Current Current limit 96 amp Digital outputs AN Motor potentiometer M Motor potentiometer Ramp type Type 1 Current controlled ramp relative to Imax Y Encoder emulation Encoder emulation ul Pe i Pr Controller l Normal acceleration 100 0 Minimum acceleration 100 0 Start threshold 75 0 Stop threshold 125 0 CS Meg Ses L Dr Speed controller A at Imax 8 00 Arms gt 6 0 Arm
326. t Loader Settings Extras Help CEJ Fb 5 8 Eff Device overview fs Parameters E i POO drive B g Configuration Drive 8 Power supply Power output stage Motor XY Motor measurement syste Bo Drive control a pa 3g 9 User Level Rights 4 User Level Rights Password for Admin Level dtr View Readable Password for DEM Leve OEM System Software Download IV View Readable Admin Level OEM Level User Level no password SIEB amp MEYER mi 9 el Bus system User level rights 1 1 Monitorings tz i Analog signals al Digital signals Encoder emulation Dr Controller amp M Motor potentiometer Parameter Download Password OEM changing Writing Hiperface or EnDat data Show motor parameters Show object browser Show controller parameters Start drive setup tool Show all parameters Parameter input via terminal Projekt Mein Projekt Host localhost Server S amp M USB Server V2 0 GUI Pow 0 Drv 14 Fig 15 Parameter page User Level Rights 1 User level Indicates the user level in which the user is currently logged in Via the button you switch to the lowest user level for the parameter set 2 Node User level rights Node on the tab page Parameters that must be clicked to open the page for assigning the passwords and user rights 3 Passwords In this field you can edit the passwords for the Admin level and the OEM level Activate the check bo
327. t controller The peak current is also used in the l t calcu lator of the motor gt gt Indicates the maximum time during which the peak current is allowed to flow once out of the cold state This parameter is also used for the l t calculator When the device is overloaded the l t calculator triggers the error message E29 Motor load too high Motor I t and switches the drive amplifier off Minimum speed RPM Specifies the minimum possible reference speed of the motor The param eter limits indirectly the reference value of the speed control Maximum speed RPM Specifies the maximum possible mechanical speed of the motor The parameter is the top limit for the limitation of the speed controller Indicates the number of pole pairs in the stator winding and thus the number of magnetic pole pairs in the rotor Do not confuse the number of pole pairs Zp with the number of poles P The following applies Zp x P Moment of inertia kgm 1000 Defines the moment of inertia of the motor considering the measuring system and the brake The moments of inertia of couplings are not consid ered in this parameter Voltage constant V 1000 RPM Specifies the countervoltage constant of the motor The voltage is measured Phase Phase Vims 1000 between two phases rms rpm Torque constant Nm A Defines the torque generation depending on the impressed current Nm Ams Stator resistance Ohm Indicates the resistance of
328. t voltage corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage For devices with integrated power supply the value is a read only value Undervoltage The parameter specifies the lower limit of the DC link voltage The value is preset and a read only value When the voltage is below this limit the output stage is switched off and the error message E43 Undervoltage in DC link appears The limit may be reached when the load of the DC link is too high e g when the motor accelerates too fast or after a mains failure Overvoltage The parameter specifies the upper limit of the DC link voltage The parameter is a read only value When the voltage is above this limit the output stage is switched off and the error message E42 Overvoltage in DC link appears The limit can be reached when the motor is decelerated too rapidly or through heavy variations in the mains supply Shutdown Temperatures FC2 This parameter group displays the parameters for the monitoring of the thermal load of the output stage of a frequency converter The parameters are read only values loaded from the hardware Max heat sink temperature The parameter indicates the maximum heat sink temperature allowed for the operation of the system in degree centigrade If this temperature is exceeded the output stage will be switched off automatically and the error message E28 Power output stage temperature too high appears Max ambient temperature The parameter indicates
329. te Errors already removed can be reset with the button Execute error reset drivemaster2 User Manual FIN 12 2 Diagnosis Drive Actual Values SD2x This page displays all important data that describe the current status of the drive ug Device overview fis Parameters y Diagnosis 4 Sm POO drive Drive actual values 7 73 Drive actual values dl Enors and warnings f Error memory Ude link n Pant systems Nref css lef 3226 v wc race be 9988 ipm 388 ams 828 Ams amp Digital outputs E Sine Cosine Display 4Z Delta Z Measurement 23 Analog inputs ex Analog outputs 9 SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor GE Object browser Version information m r Fig 95 Diagnosis page Drive actual values for an SD2x Displayed actual values gt Nref Displays the reference speed value at the input of the speed controller The unit of the display depends on the type of motor linear or rotary Nact Displayes the actual speed value at the input of the speed controller The unit of the display depends on the type of motor linear or rotary Imax Displays the current limitation of the reference current value at the input of the current controller in amperes lref Displays the reference current value at the input of the current controller in amperes lact Displays the actual current value of the current controller in amperes Udc l
330. ted The vibration absorption must always be activated for permanently excited synchronous motors because these do not feature an electrical absorption For asynchronous motor the vibration absorption can be activated if required Reduced correction factor Correction factor The parameter indicate the maximum possible variation of the rotating field by means of the vibration absorption During operation the reduced correction factor is active As Soon as a vibration is detected the reduced correction factor will be switched to the standard correction factor After the vibration has been balanced the standard correc tion factor is set back to the reduced correction factor by means of the filter time The factor 0 1 for example allows the vibration absorption to alter the rotating field about 10 96 Typical values of synchronous motors are gt Reduced factor 0 1 10 96 gt Factor 0 3 30 Filter time The parameter Indicates the time constant in milli seconds When this times is passed the vibration absorption is reset from the standard correction factor to the reduced correction factor A typical value of the filter time is 500 ms Winding Detection SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv 170 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Ef Device overview ils Parameters I P00 HSPWM drive a Configuration gat Monitorings ifv Analog signals zd Di
331. ter Filter 1 4 The parameter specifies the type of the filter It is set by means of a list box The options No filter Low pass 1 order Low pass 2 order and Band stop filter are available Low pass 1 2 order A low pass is used to suppress noise in the reference current value This noise is created e g by noisy speed measurement By means of the low pass losses in the power output stage and in the motor can be reduced You can use a low pass 1 order or a low pass 2 order with Butterworth characteristic Set the desired filter and enter the 3 dB cut off frequency of the filter The unit is hertz ES Please consider that a low pass in the reference current value reduces the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integration time Band stop filter A band stop filter is used to suppress resonance frequencies caused by the mechan ical construction of the driven machine Enter the center frequency of the band stop filter The bandwidth is set automatically The unit is hertz drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x ES Please consider that a band stop filter in the reference current value can reduce the dynamics of the current control For this reason you must possibly adapt the control parameter of the speed controller reduce the amplification and increase the integration time
332. ter set ID The ID can be selected as desired by the user and can be used for identifying the drive version via the object dictionary For this purpose the object DEVICE_PARAMETER_IDENT_CODE is used The param eter set ID is a 32 bit value divided into a 16 bit part before the decimal point and a 16 bit decimal part Power supply unit On this page you can set the parameters of power supply unit integrated in the frequency converter z m EF Device overview 2 Parameters F Diagnosis POO pam converter Power supply 2 g Configuration ie Drive Mains Power Bj Power output stage Rated power Drive control P Mains phases h Analog signals Digital signals X Motor configuration 1 Motor configuration 2 Voltage 230 0 Peak power Mains frequency 50 Hz v Time for peak power Internal ballast resistor Resistor Rated power Peak power Time for peak power Fig 80 Parameter page Power supply Mains FC2 This parameter group serves to enter general data of the mains supply that is connected to the frequency converter Mains phases This parameter specifies the number of mains phases The user can select between single phase and three phase current via radio buttons The parameter depends on the provided supply system type ES For further information refer to the hardware documentation drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 Voltage The param
333. ter2 when a communication server is connected 1 Host This field contains the network address of the PC on which the communica tion server is installed The network address can either be the PC name or the IP address of the PC The network address localhost designates the PC of the current user 2 Server This field indicates the name of the communication server The client applica tion receives this name directly from the communication server 3 Communication status This field contains the current communication address If a communication with the drive is possible the background of the field is green and the status online is displayed behind the address If a communication with the drive is not possible the background of the field is red and the status offline is displayed behind the address Server symbols in taskbar Normally the communication servers run invisibly in the background of the application Only a small symbol is displayed in the info area of the taskbar Fig 124 Taskbar with symbols of the communication servers drivemaster2 User Manual 269 15 15 Communication 15 1 1 15 1 1 1 270 1 Serial communication server 2 USB communication server A local bus server is started and closed automatically by the application Bus servers installed on a remote PC can not be started and terminated automatically They must be activated separately before starting the application Normally ha
334. the first drive of a device and drive B is the second drive of a device Devices with one drive always have the letter A The communication address is made up of these three parts as follows address of the power supply unit address of the device drive code The addresses are displayed in the software drivemaster2 as follows gt Power x Power supply unit with the address x gt Pow x Drv yZ Drive Z of the device y connected to power supply unit x All in all the software drivemaster2 can address 256 different drives and 8 power supply units 8 power supply units with 16 devices each which include 2 drives each Communication with a Local PC via USB In the following the hardware and software configuration is described for assemblies in which the hardware is connected to a local PC via USB Hardware Configuration If the device to be connected provides a USB port you can connect it directly to the PC via USB cable Devices without USB port e g series SD2 are connected by means of a gateway to the PC This gateway forwards the communication to the connected devices via the RS485 bus For devices connected to a power supply unit PS2 the power supply unit is the gateway If a RS485 to USB converter is used the converter is the gateway In the following you find connection examples for both possibilities drivemaster2 User Manual 277 15 Communication Connection example with power supply unit PS2 T
335. the motor gt Negative Negative speed values are not passed to the motor Skip bandwidth By means of a skip bandwidth you can prevent that definite speeds are driven for a long time These speeds might be e g resonances of a machine Example Skip velocity 50000 rpm gt Skiprange 10000 rpm gt max admissible speed below skip speed 40000 rpm min admissible speed above skip speed 60000 rpm drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Speed reference values within the skip bandwidth 40000 60000 rpm are suppressed Skip bandwidth 60000 50000 40000 N Ref controller Max limit The parameter indicates the maximum possible reference speed in revo utions per minute Min limit The parameter indicates the minimum possible reference speed in revolutions per minute NMin mode Via this parameter you can select the reference speed to be driven in case a target value below the minimum speed has been selected Mode N Ref 0 n ref out Amin 1 0 min n ref in drivemaster2 User Manual 161 10 Parameters of an SD2x 162 Mode N Ref N Min hysteresis n ref out ref in ES It is not possible to reverse the direction of the motor rotation when the target value is below the determined minimum speed Ramps The ramps limit the acceleration via the reference speed value They are indicated in milliseconds The parameter displays the time required
336. the project wizard gt The device addresses for the communication can be changed by means of the project wizard In the software arivemaster2 projects are displayed in a tree structure on the tab page Device overview As usual the tree structure is hierarchical gt Device of the series SD2 can consist of several drives For this reason the drives of an SD2 are subordinated to one common device in a project gt Devices which communicate with the software via a PS2 are subordinated to this power supply unit in the project fl a s Eg Device overview 3 PS2 0 036 21 90F j SD2 0 036 21 10DDC F Drv OA 036 21 TODC A Bi Drv OB 036 21 10DC B sD2 1 03621 40DC f Div 1A 03621 40DC A POO Antrieb 1 FC2 2 021 90 101EC A i SD2 3 036 21 60DB B Drv 34 036 21 60DB A POO Servo Axis The name of the project is displayed in the status bar on the left oec Projekt 1 Host ES Projects that have been created by searching connected devices will auto matically be named Online project Project Files and Project Paths The software arivemaster2 saves project files with the file extension smp Saving the project file in any directory is not possible The following rules must be observed gt A project file is always saved in a project directory which has the same name as the project file drivemaster2 User Manual 261 14 14 Working with Projects 262 gt
337. ther log file options create more information and cause larger data amounts Especially in combination with communication records this may result in large data amounts gt Client lt gt Server communication Any communication between the application and the communication server is logged The amount of data depends on the amount of communication and may increase especially during long operating times of the communication server gt Server lt gt Device communication Any communication between the devices and the communication server is logged The amount of data depends on the amount of communication and may increase especially during long operating times of the communication server gt Log debug events Additional information on internal processes is logged Large amounts of data may be created gt Log extreme debug events Additional information is logged even when no communication takes place Huge amounts of data are created This option should only be activated for a short time gt View logfile The log file is displayed with the editor notepad exe Consider that the editor does only display the current state when the file was opened and that it is not updated in the editor Menu DNC Trace The DNC Trace can be started in addition to the log file Recording the communication in the log file is possible but only the event with its timestamp s displayed The DNC Trace also records the contents of the communication
338. ting value to trigger an error is indicated below each parameter W14 Ambient temperature The parameter indicates a threshold value for the ambient temperature of the device in degree centigrade As soon as the temperature has reached this value the warning W14 is triggered W15 Load ballast resistor The parameter indicates a threshold value for the ballast resistor load in percent As soon as the load has reached this value the warning W15 is triggered drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x 10 3 3 Error On this page the windows to trigger error messages are parameterized The hardware documentation of the device provides a list of all error message possible I za S EF Device overview Parameters 22 Diagnosis s fg POO DocAnis g Configuration QE Monitorings Error E31 Speed error slip Error E39 Tracking error 1 Messages Wari e Ls H a Speed error slip Window constant in RPM E39 Shutdown threshold 1 0000 1 Analog signals W12 Window 500 00 xl Digital signals E39 Window time 1 Encoder emulation Pr Controller E31 Shutdown threshold 2500 00 W12 Window time 10 W11 Window E31 Window time 10 Error E38 Overspeed E38 Shutdown threshold 7500 00 E38 Window time 10 Fig 28 Parameter page Errors Error E31 Speed error Slip SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v s v v Via this
339. tion provides the parameter pages Drive Power supply Power output stage and Drive control drivemaster2 User Manual 185 11 Parameters of an FC2 11 1 1 186 z a Eg Device overview Parameters m POO pam converter E Drive Power supply HW Power output stage Drive control I Analog signals acl Digital signals Motor configuration 1 5 Motor configuration 2 The individual pages display all data required for the general configuration of the drive system Drive This parameter page serves for general configuration of the frequency converter and provides information on the current parameter set kf Device overview ils Parameters 2 Diaenoss POO pam converter di Drive 2 z g Configuration d Drive selection Power supply Power output stage f Araia Drivedesignation 0241 90 101EC A j Analog signals Voltage dass 230 Vac 325 Vdc Digital signals Max rated current 21 00 A 14 85 Arms D Motor configuration 1 34 Motor configuration 2 Peak current 32 00 A 22 63 Arms 15 000 s 8 Drive function Drive function type HSPAM Identification Parameter set Drive name pam converter Date 15 02 2012 Comment test drive Time 14 13 53 ID 1 001 Fig 79 Parameter page Drive Drive Selection FC2 This field displays the characteristics of the selected power electroni
340. tools The other setup tools are operated the same way Calling the setup tool gt Start the setup tool via the menu item Extras drive setup tool The tool is an independent program for initial operation of drives C SIEB amp MEYER AG drive setup tool V1 8 Build 53 12 17 09 Pow ODrv 0A DER Fie Loader Settings WU D Parameter Set P00 Doc Axis1 SIEB amp MEYER m State Switch On Disabled Actual Drive Values Position Controller Velocity Controller Current Feed Forward Current Ref Filters Current Controller Settings Ref Current 0 00 Aeff Act Current 0 00 Aeff Motor Load 0 0 Ref Velocity 0 00 rpm Act Velocity 0 00 rpm Amplifier Load 0 0 Ref Position Act Position Amplifier Temp 20 Function elocity absolute values Max Current 0 0 deff Demand Velocity Hepto F11 invert sign Actual Current 0 00 Aeff Actual Velocity 0 00 rpm Action B F5 Drive Setup Active IB F6 Enable Operation B F7 stat E F9 Error Reset Host localhost Port 0x3600 Pow 0 Drv OA Online Click on the button Drive Setup Active The following dialog appears 3 drive setup tool 9 Attention drive setup tool is the command source now Click OK to confirm Thus the setup tool controls the drive 52 drivemaster2 User Manual First Steps Setting the parameters For setting up a drive amplifier we recommend using the reversing function
341. ts manually back to Off so the control functions are transmitted by the internal command channel again drivemaster2 User Manual Diagnosi Fai iagnosis 12 10 Sine Cosine Display This page displays the analog sine and cosine values of the feedback EW Device overview fs Parameters A Diagnosis E m POO Doku amp xis Sine Cosine Display 17 Drive actual values d Errors and warnings Actual Values f Error memory gt Position measurement system State peration Enabled UN Digital inputs e Digital outputs Sir ine Display Z Delta Z Measurement 23 Analog inputs Analog outputs SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor gt Object browser Version information Fig 103 D agnosis page Sine Cosine display On the left side the values of sine and cosine are displayed On the right side the values are illustrated as x y curve cosine x axis sine y axis Thus the display is only available for double track measuring systems e g resolver sine cosine encoder 12 11 Delta Z Measurement Via this page you can analyze a depth measuring system during SERVO VECTOR operation Eg Device overview fs Parameters Diagnosis m POO Doku amp xis T DeltazMeasurement 7 T7 Drive actual values d Errors and wamings Actual Values f Eror memory ES Position measurement system UN Digital inputs State Operation Enabled 9 Digital output
342. ty in the software At present the units mil meters per second meters per second and meters per minute are available Acceleration unit The parameter indicates the unit for acceleration in the software At present the units millimeters per square second and meters per square second are available drivemaster2 User Manual 99 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 3 100 Position Factor SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 Via this parameter the position factor for converting the measuring system is parame terized The unit of the position factor depends on the parameters of the group Units Motor measuring system This parameter defines the relation between the position unit of the position control see parameter Position unit and the position unit of the motor measuring system that means the position unit of the speed control For rotary motors the speed unit of the speed control is yom Thus the position unit for the speed control is in relation to revolutions When linear motors are used the internal position controller resolution is used as position unit of the speed control For this reason the parameter Position factor motor measuring system is a fixed value and write protected Monitorings The node Monitorings provides the parameter pages Messages Warnings and Errors H a Ef Device overview 5 Parameters mmi P00 Doc Drive g Configuration EE A Mon
343. u item Project Open project The Windows Explorer opens the directory of the project last edited Navigate to the desired project directory and open the project file therein smp The project including all parameter files is uploaded to the user interface 14 4 Writing a Project During writing of a project all existing parameter sets are loaded one after the other into the corresponding drives The download will be canceled when an error occurs during writing of a parameter set 14 Before downloading a project check that the device addresses set in the project match the addresses of the used devices If this is not the case the download is cancelled gt Start the project download via the menu Loader Write project to drives al You can also click on the symbol in the tool bar drivemaster2 User Manual 263 14 Working with Project orKing WI rojects nm 14 5 14 5 1 14 5 1 1 264 Creating a New Project A new project can be created as follows gt searching for connected devices description see section 5 5 1 1 Searching for Connected Devices p 35 gt bymeans of the project wizard Project Wizard Using the project wizard you can create a project manually For this purpose select the option Create new project after you have started the program Later you can modify the current project by means of the project wizard Then you select the menu Project Execute pr
344. ual 69 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 70 Chopper SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM 4 s v v This parameter group provides information on the intermediate circuit chopper When the motor is decelerated electrically energy is fed back into the intermediate circuit The chopper ensures that the intermediate circuit does not exceed a preset value For this purpose energy is converted into heat via an ohmic resistor Chopper level The parameter specifies the maximum admissible voltage in the intermediate circuit before the chopper is activated This value can only be read and depends on the used hardware External Ballast Resistor SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSPAM VF HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM SD2 SD2S SD2 SD2S SD2S SD2 SD2S 0362141 43 0362141 43 0362141 43 0362141 43 This parameter group provides the parameters to enter the technical data of the option ally connected ballast resistor NOTICE Resistance value and parameterization of the ballast resistor If the resistance value of the connected resistor is too small the drive and the resistor can be damaged If the resistance is too high the brake chopper possibly does not work and an error is triggered The same applies for incorrect parameteri zation of performance data Do not use ballast resistors beyond the adjustable resistance range and enter the correct performance data for the resistor The values depend on the used ballast resi
345. uctance mH Via this parameter external inductivity can be specified e g chokes 80 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x On delay motor holding brake Temperature monitoring Indicates the time which passes from the moment the motor holding brake is Switched on until the controller the torque is switched off Specifies which type of temperature monitoring is used in the motor The parameter is set via list box Depending on the selected type of temperature monitoring the parameter Limit of temperature monitoring appears Off delay motor holding Indicates the time which passes from the moment the controller the torque brake is switched on until the motor holding brake is switched off Limit of temperature moni Ohm PTC thermal contact toring For a resistor with a positive temperature coefficient PTC the parameter defines the maximum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet A thermal contact behaves like a PTC ms ms Ohm NTC For a resistor with a negative temperature coefficient NTC the parameter defines the minimum admissible value of the resistor before the output stage is switched off This value and the according switch off temperature is to find in the motor data sheet C KTY83 130 For an approximately linear resistance with positive temperature coefficient of the KTY seri
346. ue 5 Motor Feedback 6 Controller 7 Operating Mode Or Enter the moment of inertia of the load in relation to the servomotor If there is no load enter the value 0 Valid values are betwen 0 and 100 Stiffness of the speed controller hard medium smooth Moment of inertia of the load Moment of inertia ratio from the servomotor to load 1to 0 50 Back Next gt X Cancel On this page you can set the performance of the speed controller via its stiffness For this purpose the relation of the mass moments of inertia must be known ES This configuration of the controller only works if the mass moments of inertia are ideally coupled Complicated mechanical elements spring mass systems with influence of shafts and couplings require setting the speed controller manually or by means of special tools Click Next to continue Vm SIEB amp MEYER AG drivemaster2 DER Setup a new drive 6 Controller 7 Operating Mode Select the control chanel of the drive Drive control operating mode Velocity mode 1 Control Control chanel Serial interface RS485 USB Select the operating mode and the control channel of the drive ES For initial operation we recommend to select Velocity mode 1 and drive control via serial interface This configuration allows positioning the motor via the setup tool here via arive setup too X Now the created parameter set exists in the software drivemaster2
347. unction In this section you can select what is to be tested and how it is to be tested Velocity absolute values presetting of a velocity Velocity Reversing function presetting of two velocities for reversing Velocity pushing Presetting of a velocity for a defined period of time Current absolute values presetting of reference current Current DC resolver offset presetting of a DC reference current Current AC frequency presetting of a reference current and a frequency v Ww NW NW NN You have access to the input fields as soon as the connection to the device is made online and the drive setup is active button in the bottom left 13 At first you must switch on the controller to perform a function button Enable Opera tion This is only possible when there is no error Errors already removed can be reset with the button Error Reset By pressing the button Start the values in the input fields will be loaded into the device and the function will be performed Velocity absolute values Taking the maximum current into account the motor can be positioned with this func tion In addition you can change the direction of movement also during operation via the button The new maximum current will immediately be active but the reference drivemaster2 User Manual 243 Tools ty speed will not be active until the button Start has been clicked In addition the actual current and the actual sp
348. units For devices of the series FC2 this dialog allows defining the unit of the motor speed Either as frequency in hertz or as speed in revolutions per minute In addition you can set the unit of the currents for all devices here Either they are indicated as RMS value Arms or as sine peak amplitude A S Program options Menu Extras The menu items displayed in the menu Extras depend on the device selected in the device overview The following figure is an example of the menu Extras for an SD2x drivemaster2 User Manual 5 3 6 5 4 Description of the User Interface Oscar Opens the application Oscar in a new window Oscar is a diagnosis tool to be used for Extras Help User recording values and displaying these as curves drive setup tool Opens the application drive setup too in a new window The arive setup tool is used for initial operation of a drive amplifier or operating a motor without higher ranking control converter setup tool Opens the application converter setup too in a new window The converter setup too is used for initial operation of a frequency converter or operating a motor without higher ranking control hiper endat tool Opens the application Ajper endat too in a new window The hiper endat too is used for diagnosis and parameterization of the absolute enco ders Hiperface and EnDat Using the Ajper endat too is only possible when a motor with an absolute encoder is connected SDx Data
349. up Extras a new project or editing the currently loaded project Execute project wizard Open project A project is loaded from an E existing file file extension smp Save project Saves the current project B Save project under the selected file name If the project EJ has not been saved yet the dialog Save project as appears z Save project as Saves the current project gt in a new file Select a target directory for e the file and enter a new file name The file 8 is saved with the file extension smp Ba New parameters Opens the parameter 8 a el Open project Save project as New parameters Open parameters Save parameters Save parameters as wizard The parameter wizard helps you to create a new parameter set for the first parameterization of a device The param eter wizard is opened only for the device that is selected in the device overview Open parameters Opens a saved param eter file for the device selected in the device overview and replaces the values in the current parameter set by the values in the parameter file Save parameters Saves the current parameters of the device selected in the device overview under the existing file name If the parameter set has not been saved yet the dialog Save parameters as appears Save parameters as Saves the current parameters of the selected device in a new file Select a target directory for the file and enter a new file name The file is saved
350. uration le Drive Motor measurement system 27 Units 19 Power supply Type of measurement system Incremental encoder TTL Hg P t t Ae Connection X17 Vec_FB 5 3V Motor Motor measurement Sa Drive control User level rights E t Monitorings fv Analog signals ES Digital signals li Encoder emulation Dy Controller yste Velocity scaling 4400 000 RPM gt 100 000 Reference value Incremental encoder TTL Signal periods per revolution gt 4096 Measuring steps per revolution Interpolation factor Magnetic alignment current Arms Monitoring of sensor signals lt m Fig 21 Parameter page Motor measurement system Motor Measurement System SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM v v v v In this parameter group you select the motor measuring system to be used with the drive amplifier and the speed scaling NOTICE Voltage VCC varies depending on the set measuring system When the connected measuring system is operated under a wrong voltage it can be damaged Check that you have chosen the right measuring system in the software before connecting Type of measurement system The parameter specifies which measuring system will be used This is set via a list box Depending on the selected measuring system additional parameter group with additional parameters may be displayed drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x The following table indicates
351. urrent A PI current controller induces a voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes gt Holding current with time limit A PI current controller induces a voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes After the reference value zero is reached the holding current is limited to a certain time Its only purpose is to decelerate the motor securely to standstill The desired holding time is indicated in seconds drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Amplification Kp The parameter indicates the proportional amplification of the current controller in vo fs per ampere The reaction time of the current control circuit is reduced if a high propor tional amplification is selected If the amplification value is set too high the current control circuit starts vibrating Integration time Ti The parameter sets the integral amplification of the current controller therefore it is often called integral time constant Ti The integration time Ti is indicated in millisec onds The smaller the integration time is selected the quicker the current control circuit will react If the value is set too small the current control circuit starts vibrating Flux Controller SD2x HSPWM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv This pag
352. urrent 2 11 Aeff Motor Load 25 1 Ref velocity 159 92 rpm Act Velocity 159 92 rpm Amplifier Load 7 995 Ref Position Act Amplifier Temp 16 8 C Position controller You can change the parameters of the position controller online The new values are immediately active The new parameters will only have effect on the drive control when the operating mode is set to a position control profile velocity mode interpolated position control or electronic gear Actual Drive Values Position Controller Velocity Controller Current Feed Forward Current Ref Filters Current Controller Settings Kpl 50 0 17s Ti 0 ms Kp2 25 0 S 17s Speed controller You can change the parameters of the speed controller online The new values are immediately active In the drive function HSPWM you can check the ramps and the startup behavior via this tab page Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Current Controller Load Compensation Flux Control Settings Acceleration Ramp 100 ms Starting Current 2 70 Aeff Deceleration Ramp 100 5 ms Start Threashold Flux Control 750 rpm drivemaster2 User Manual 241 13 13 Tools 242 With any other drive function you can check the ramps and the control settings of the measuring system if available here Actual Drive Values Velocity Controller Settings Acceleration Ramp 400 ms Amplification 0 362 Deceleration Ramp 400 ms Readjustment Tn 4000 ms Current fe
353. urrent control circuit will react If the value is set too small the current control circuit starts vibrating drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an SD2x Start up SD2x HSBLOCK FPAM SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM z s E For FPAM operation the rotor position is determined by means of the phase voltage At standstill and at very low speeds it is not possible to measure the phase voltage For this reason the motor must be accelerated to a minimum speed via open loop control at first Then it can be commutated by the phase voltage measuring system The same applies for the braking process The motor is decelerated speed controlled as long as the phase voltage is sufficient to control the rotor position In consequence there are two motor driving ranges Open loop range and Speed controlled range The page Start up provides parameters to set the behavior of the drive in the open loop range El Device overview ds Parameters E gi POO FPAM drive p Startup 2 te g g Configuration flt Monitorings Open range Hiv Analog signals loop rang afl Digital signals Speed controlled range E Motor potentiometer fl Encoder emulation Er Controller lc Speed ref values Start up current Dr Speed controller 5 00 Amh Act Ref current filter ff Curent controller s EE Holding current 1 00 Arms Breaking current 2 00 Arms Start threshold Stop threshold 5000 000 RPM 5000 000 RPM
354. urs minutes seconds When a device with several parameter sets Multi Parameters p 62 is selected you can see the operating hours of each individual parameter set 218 drivemaster2 User Manual 12 6 Diagnosis Position Measurement Systems This page displayes position values of the measuring systems Eg Device overview fis Parameters A Diagnosis FR P00 M405H 1 3 Drive actual values Position Measurement Systems d Errors and warnings f Error memory zz Position measurement system Ss UN Digital inputs e Digital outputs Sine Cosine Display 4Z Delta Z Measurement vi Position Counter X8 Resolver 15238 re X5 ENCO Positions Actual Position 15238 e Pos Limit Switch Position Analog inputs 9 SERVOLINK 4 monitor CAN bus monitor PE Object browser v Version information 0 tg3e 2 Digital Input Pos Limit X7 ENCI Neg Limit Switch Position 15238 e 2 Digital Input Neg Limit g Counter Reset m 00 m Enable Zero Pulse Fig 99 Diagnosis page Position measurement systems Zero Pulse Position lt gt Counter reset Original counter Via the button Counter reset you can set the position counter to 0 This only takes place in the user interface in order to improve readability In the drive the position counter is not reset Click the button Original counter to display the position value of the drive co
355. ut stage Motor St Motor measurement syste CAN Bus Ry Drive control Gi Baud rate 10 v kBaud User level rights 22 Units Node ID Address selector switch 1 z i t Monitorings t fh Analog signals Programmable address 0 Ej a Digital signals H Encoder emulation Pr Controller Node Guarding v Node Life Time 500 ms Heartbeat Producer Time 0 Heartbeat Producer Time Heartbeat Consumer Fig 23 Parameter page Bus system for CAN bus drivemaster2 User Manual 93 10 10 Parameters of an SD2x 94 Further information on the CAN bus connection is to find in the documentation Drive System SD2 CAN Bus Connection CAN SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 SD2S 4 SD2 SD2B SD2S Via this tab page the CAN bus is parameterized CAN CAN Bus Baud rate 10 v kBaud Node ID Address selector switch 1 Node Guarding vj Node Life Time Heartbeat Producer Heartbeat Produce Heartbeat Consumer Baud rate Via this parameter you can set the baud rate of the CAN bus in the range of 10 kbaud to 1 Mbaud Node ID The node ID is the address assigned to the device in the bus system Via the param eter you can select how to calculate the node ID The following settings are available Address selector switch 1 The node ID is set via the ID switch on the front panel of the device Since you can set the ID switch to a value betwe
356. value or limiting value Noise rejection The parameter specifies a hysteresis threshold for noise rejection in percent 1 96 corresponds to a voltage of 0 1 V at the analog input drivemaster2 User Manual 113 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 4 2 114 Analog Outputs This page is only displayed for devices with an interface for analog outputs Here you can configure the outputs Analog Out 0 and Analog 1 if available B Device overview E Parameters F Diagnosis i POO Doc I g Configuration Ree aoe Monitorings Analog OutO Motor temperature X Output signal vy Analog signals J 0 000 10 000 V Analog inputs 0 0 100 0 C adl om i zc Analog outputs Digital signals Encoder emulation Controller X18 8 O Inverter Filter time 0 0 ms 10 000 y 100 0 c i Analog offset o 0 000 X18 4 Analog Out 1 Power output stage temperature v Output signal 0 000 10 000 V 0 0 100 0 C X18 6 C Inverter Filter time Scaling 0 0 ns 10 000 V 1100 0 ec 4 Analog offset o 0 000 y X18 4 Fig 30 Parameter page Analog outputs The function to be parameterized is selected by the list box at the top The parameters below the list box you can configure for each output accordingly Analog Out SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM Vv s v Function The parameter indicates the function of the analog output The following target reference and actual
357. value 8 Target value 1 200 000 Target value 9 Target value 2 300 000 Target value 10 Target value 3 0 000 Target value 11 Target value 4 0 000 Target value 12 Target value 5 0 000 Target value 13 Target value 6 Target value 14 Target value 7 Target value 15 J Fig 34 Parameter page Target values Internal Target Values SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM 4 y P4 v Target value 0 15 Here you can set up to 16 reference values for the speed The parameter is indicated in revolutions per m nute Selecting the target values is coded binary i e if you want to select 4 target values from externally you must reserve 2 digital inputs Internal target value Bit 0 and Internal target value Bit 1 The following table illustrates how to set the digital inputs to select a particular target value Internal target value D IN7 Internal D IN6 Internal D IN5 Internal D IN4 Internal target value Bit 0 target value Bit 1 target value Bit 2 target value Bit 3 Few ov ov Y if faetvanes Y Y Y if e s 9v Y v f Fawewer av v fav _ s drivemaster2 User Manual 10 8 Parameters of an SD2x Internal target value D IN7 Internal D IN6 Internal D IN5 Internal D IN4 Internal target value Bit 0 target value Bit 1 target value Bit 2 target value Bit 3 OV Encoder Emulation The node encoder emulation only provides t
358. value is in the range of the data transfer rate of the measuring system For less dynamic measuring systems field plate pulse generator or Hall sensor the filter time is usually approx 256 ms Compensation SD2xHSPAM VF SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK HSPAM VF VECTOR FPAM E v Via the parameter page Compensation you can set load and slip compensation Ef Device overview fla Parameters POO HSPAM drive E Compensation 7 f Configuration 18 Monitorings H E Analog signals Compensation mode Load compensation Y a Digital signals x Motor potentiometer Target values Encoder emulation Dr Controller 12 Speed ref values Dr Speed controller Current controller 3 Winding detection ir VF Characteristic curve K Compensate external inductance Idle reduction to Slip compensation 100 0 105 000 RPM Load increase by 19 Trated cos phi 5 60 Arms Fig 77 Parameter page Compensation You can set the following modes for the compensation gt FC2load compensation Compatible with older devices and to the series FC2 You should use this mode only to apply older parameter sets For more informa tion on the FC2 load compensation refer to Compensation FC2 p 211 gt Load compensation Standard load compensation om For V f control you can switch between FC2 load compensation and standard compensation The values are conv
359. values can be selected No function Target speed Speed reference value Speed actual value Speed error Current reference value Current actual value Motor temperature Power output stage temperature Motor load Power output stage load Voltage of the bus Active power DC link current Idc YYYY YY YY vV V V V Vv y drivemaster2 User Manual 10 5 Inverter Parameters of an SD2x The parameter inverts the analog output when the check box is activated This can be used for example for a static reversion of rotational direction Filter time Via this parameter a first order low pass filter is configured The filter time corresponds to the time constant of the low pass and is defined in milliseconds If the filter time is set to 0 ms the low pass filter is deactivated Scaling The parameter indicates the relation of voltage at the analog output to target reference or actual value Analog offset The parameter serves for setting an analog offset The offset is entered in vo ts Digital Signals The node Digital signals provides the pages Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs z 3 Ef Device overview 2 Parameters mm POO Doc Drive g Configuration 1 Monitorings 2 Analog signals BES Dic sora Digital inputs a a Digital outputs 8 Encoder emulation Dy Controller On these pages you can configure the functions of the digital inputs and outputs drivemaster2 User Ma
360. ve selected drive and saves it Read parameters from drive Reads Write parametersets to drive ag Searching for connected devices the current parameter set from the 2 Delete all parameter sets in drive selected drive b Write parameter sets to drive Writes P Delete system software in drive all parameter sets created for the selected drive into the device This menu item is only displayed for devices that support the function multi parameters p 62 Read parameter sets from drive Reads all available parameter sets from the selected drive This menu item is only displayed for devices that support the func tion multi parameters p 62 Searching for connected devices Searches for the devices connected to the PC Delete all parameter sets in drive Deletes the parameters or parameter sets of the selected drive Delete system software in drive Deletes the firmware or the logic programming of the selected drive Menu Settings Setup connection to the device Opens the dialog Setup connection to the Settings Extras Help U device for setting the communication server Z Setup connection to the device Language Opens the language selec wi Language p tion The languages German and b English are provided The selected S user I language is immediately active User Opens a dialog to log in or log out a user and to set the user level Program options Opens a dialog to make global settings for the
361. ve does not receive heartbeat messages within the set heartbeat time from the converter setup fool it stops the drive with a quick stop and switches over to the corre sponding error status This way damage can be avoided which might be caused when the motor moves and the communication between drive and converter setup tool is interrupted In this case the user has no access to the drive from the software anymore gt Help Help 9 Opens the online help for converter setup tool About Displays version information of the software and the contact address of SIEB amp MEYER Status Display The status display consists of 2 lines State Ready To Switch On The first line provides the following information hardware designation drive address here 0 A and the name of the current parameter set The colored status field in the second line indicates the current device status For this purpose the status word in the device is analyzed C Mem No error the actual operating mode is displayed drive setup tool is offline or the frequency converter is not ready for operation Red Error the error of top priority is displayed Motor Selection The motor selection is divided into the motor configuration selection of the character istic curve and the motor selection drivemaster2 User Manual 249 13 13 Tools 13 3 4 13 3 5 250 FNI Motor configuration selection of the characteristic cu
362. ve is kept in its position while the control is active All controllers remain active and the mechanical brake remains deactivated Stop Maximum current The motor is decelerated with the maximum peak current Then the drive is kept in its position while the control is active All controllers remain active and the mechanical brake remains deactivated Shutdown Brake with external ref value The motor is decelerated by an externally set deceleration ramp whereas the deceleration is as quick as possible considering the parameterization current limi tation As soon as the state Speed zero is reached or a time of 7 5 seconds has passed the output stage is switched off Then the control of the drive is off If applicable it is kept in its position by means of a mechanical brake Error response Short circuit motor phases Active If an error occurs the motor phases are short circuited Not active If an error occurs the motor phases are not short circuited Bus System The parameter page Bus system is only displayed when the control channel Can bus or DNC 8 Byte Telegram is selected see Drive control SD2x p 91 On the page Bus system you can set the parameters for the communication accordingly CAN Bus The page Bus system for CAN bus provides the tab pages CAN PDO 0 und PDO 1 BOE Ef Device overview fy Parameters Bg g Configuration Drive can Ppoo Poo 1 8 Power outp
363. via the Ethernet network with each other The individual devices are addressed the same as for local communication 15 5 4 2 Software Configuration It is required that the communication server runs on the remote PC and network access is allowed 15 drivemaster2 User Manual 287 15 Communication i ria After you have started the software drivemaster2 click the button Setup connec tion to the device to open the dialog for the communication Later you can also select the menu Settings Setup connection to the device to call the dialog Setup connection to the device Setup communication interface CO Local connection Network connection Network settings PC Name or IP Address 172 16 6 232 Used connection 5232 R5485 Y F Keep project connect Je Search devices connect X Cancel Make the following settings Communication interface Network connection Type RS232_RS485 PC Name or IP Address Name or IP address of the remote PC in the example above 172 16 6 232 Used connection RS232_RS485 Click on the button Search devices connect to apply the settings and create an online project 4 Then the corresponding communication server is started and the result is displayed in the status bar If successful the following entries should appear Host localhost Server S amp M Serial Server V2 0 I a The created project for the connection example above is structured as foll
364. voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes gt Holding current with time limit A PI current controller induces a voltage at the motor which then generates the desired current The desired current is defined in the parameter Holding current in amperes After the reference value zero is reached the holding current is limited to a certain time Its only purpose is to decelerate the motor securely to standstill The desired holding time is indicated in seconds gt Holding voltage A current is generated by means of a fix voltage value The holding current controller is not active in this mode i e there is no current limitation not even indi rect The holding voltage can hold the position of the motor permanently The desired DC voltage is defined in the parameter Holding voltage in vo fs gt Holding voltage with time limit drivemaster2 User Manual 177 10 Parameters of an SD2x 178 A current is generated by means of a fix voltage value The holding current controller is not active in this mode i e there is no current limitation not even indi rect The desired DC voltage is defined in the parameter Holding voltage in volts After the reference value zero is reached the holding voltage is limited to a certain time Its only purpose is to decelerate the motor securely to standstill The desired holding time is indicated in
365. w H Parameters 22 Diagnosis g Configuration t Monitorings hv Analog signals zi Digital signals 2 Digital inputsl Inversion a Digital outputs Encoder emulation u Oo Dr Controller ti 0 Li 0 Li O LI Li Fig 32 Parameter page Digital outputs D oUm Cs OF 036 21 40DC A Switch on Quick stop type 1 Neg limit switch type 1 Pos limit switch type 1 P controller Speed direction Intemal target value Bit 1 Parameter set Bit 4 Extemal hardware OK Each output can have the state 0 or 1 and can be parameterized individually Digital Out SD2x SERVO HSPWM HSBLOCK VECTOR FPAM v v r4 D OUTO D OUT5 HSPAM VF 4 10 Depending on the device you can configure up to five digital outputs The possible functions of each output depend on the current device and drive function and are set by means of a list box Refer to the hardware documentation of the device for an over view of the configurable output functions for each drive function The respective connector and pin of the used device are indicated left hand to the parameter Via the check box Inversion you can invert the digital output drivemaster2 User Manual 117 10 Parameters of an SD2x 10 6 118 E FEE Motor Potentiometer On the page Motor potentiometer you set the parameters of a motor potentiometer in the software drivemaster2 El Device overview fis Parameters
366. with the file extension 136 Export parameters to HTML Creates a new HTML file with the parameter set of the device selected in the device overview Select a directory in which the HTML file is to be saved and enter a file name Close The program is closed Export parameters to Html Close Menu Edit Cut The marked value of a text field is cut from the text field and stored in the clipboard Since Edit Loader Settings Extr open parameters are not allowed a new value must be entered 4 Cut SeN Copy The value of a text field is copied into the I Copy Ctrl C clipboard 1m Paste The content of the clipboard is pasted ju Paste iin into an input field provided that it is a value XX Delete Del Delete Deletes the selected part of an input field drivemaster2 User Manual 31 Description of the User Interface 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 32 Menu Loader Write system software to drive Writes a firmware file X36 or a Loader Settings Extras Help logic file L36 into the selected drive For further information refer to section 5 6 Download New System Write project to drives Qs 197 Write system software to drive Software p 38 ag Write project to drives Writes all Xr parameter sets of the current project UA Read parameters from drive into the devices Write parameters to drive Writes the i current parameter set into the QU Read parametersets from dri
367. xes to display the current passwords 4 User Level Rights Field in which you can assign the access rights for the lower user levels Acti vate the according check boxes to assign certain access rights to a user level Passwords The passwords must be made up of at least one character and maximum eight charac ters The characters can be numbers or letters except special characters or umlauts The software differentiates between capital and lower case letters Consider the following items when assigning passwords gt The password of the OEM level can only be assigned when you have already defined a password for the Admin level The passwords of the OEM and the Admin levels must be different If no password is assigned i e the input field is left empty the respective user level is not protected by password and the user automatically attains this user level gt For devices with several parameter sets see multi parameters p 62 SIEB amp MEYER recommends to use the same passwords for all parameter sets om On delivery no passwords are assigned in the drives and in the software arivemaster2 drivemaster2 User Manual 43 Password Protection and User Rights 44 drivemaster2 User Manual First Steps B First Steps This chapter is a quick start description for the software arivemaster2 The description particularly considers the operating elements for the online parameterization of a drive It is required that
368. y occurred Not every error displays a faulty connection During a device test each device not existing produces an error Addressing the Devices In order to ensure trouble free communication with several devices all devices organ ized in one project must have different communication addresses om An SD2T device is always organized as single device in one project There fore the device address is always Pow 0 Drv OA The communication address is made up of following three components gt Address of the power supply unit An individual address must be assigned to each power supply unit PS2 The address is set with the address selecting switch on the power supply unit The addresses 0 to 7 are available drivemaster2 User Manual 15 3 15 3 1 Communication Devices that are not connected via an external power supply unit PS2 always have the power address 0 Thus these devices can not be used together with a power supply unit PS2 with the address 0 gt Address of the device All devices must have different addresses The address is set with the address selecting switch on the device The addresses 0 to 15 are available the switch positions A to F correspond to the addresses 10 to 15 Devices that are connected to different power supply units can have the same address gt Drive code within the device There are devices which combine several drives For this reason these drives are labeled with a letter Drive A is
369. you can configure up to six digital inputs For each input a certain function is available which is set by means of the list box The respective connector and pin of the used device are indicated left hand to the parameter Digital Outputs This page provides the parameters of all digital outputs of the drive El Device overview 5 Parameters l2 Diagnosis Fay POO pam converter O f Configuration fh Analog signals Ad Dita sionals 021 90 101EC A a Digital inputs Fi tal unas BY Motor configuration 1 4 Motor configuration 2 Ready for operation Target reached Target 0 Current limitation Powerstage ready No function Fig 86 Parameter page Digital outputs Each output can have the state 0 or 1 and can be parameterized individually Digital Out FC2 D OUTO D OUT5 Here you can configure up to five digital outputs There are different functions for each output Set the desired function by means of the list box The respective connector and pin of the used device are indicated left hand to the parameter Motor Configuration 1 2 The nodes Motor configuration 1 and Motor configuration 2 provide each the pages Motor parameters Motor measurement system V F Characteristic curve Messages Holding function Speed reference values and Compensation drivemaster2 User Manual 11 4 1 drivemaster2 User Manual Parameters of an FC2 f Ef Device

drivemaster2 - SIEB & MEYER AG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

drivemaster2 - SIEB &amp; MEYER AG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

drivemaster2 - SIEB & MEYER AG